Proposed → Final Rule Diff

Comparing regulatory text changes

← Back to Pairs
+22095
Words Added
-14858
Words Removed
95%
Match Confidence
14
Sections Changed

Proposed Rule

2023-28763
2024-01-11
Accelerating Wireline Broadband Deployment by Removing Barriers to Infrastructure Investment
Federal Communications Commission

Final Rule

2024-00416
2024-01-12
Accelerating Wireline Broadband Deployment by Removing Barriers to Infrastructure Investment

📋 Change Summary

Key Substantive Changes:
  • Effective date changed
📦 Reorganized Content: 1 section(s) renamed/restructured (content preserved)
  • "IV. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis" → "IV. Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis" (82% similar)
7 Modified 2 Added 5 Removed ↻ 1 Reorganized XML Structured
Unchanged

Subject

<SUBJECT> Click to expand
Modified

Summary

<SUM> +48 / -75 words
⚠️ Substantially rewritten (89% changed) - showing side-by-side
Proposed
SUMMARY: In this document, the Commission adopted a Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (FNPRM) that tentatively concludes that the Commission should take further action to facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications that are submitted in large numbers. It also seeks comment on whether the Commission should modify its self-help rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly. Finally, it seeks comment on the impact of contractor availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready for surveys and make-ready work.
Final
SUMMARY: In this document, the Federal Communications Commission (Commission) establishes rules creating a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband buildouts.
Modified

Effective Dates

<EFFDATE> +34 / -50 words
⚠️ Substantially rewritten (95% changed) - showing side-by-side
Proposed
DATES: Comments are due on or before February 13, 2024, and reply comments are due on or before February 28, 2024. Written comments on the Paperwork Reduction Act proposed information collection requirements must be submitted by the public, Office of Management and Budget (OMB), and other interested parties on or before March 11, 2024.
Final
DATES: Effective February 12, 2024, except for §§ 1.1411(c)(4) (amendatory instruction 2) and 1.1415 (amendatory instruction 4), which are delayed indefinitely. The Commission will publish a document in the Federal Register announcing the effective date for those sections.
Modified

Supplementary Information

<SUPLINF> +21655 / -14172 words
⚠️ Substantially rewritten (96% changed) - showing side-by-side
Proposed
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: This is a summary of the Commission's Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (FNPRM) in WC Docket No. 17-84, FCC 23-109, adopted on December 13, 2023, and released on December 15, 2023. The full text of this document is available for public inspection at the following internet address: https://www.fcc.gov/document/fcc-seeks-make-pole-attachment-process-faster-more-transparent-and-more-cost-effective. The Providing Accountability Through Transparency Act, Public Law 118-9, requires each agency, in providing notice of a rulemaking, to post online a brief plain-language summary of the proposed rule. The required summary of this FNPRM is available at https://www.fcc.gov/proposed-rulemakings. To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities ( e.g., Braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at (202) 418-0530. Initial Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 Analysis This document may contain proposed information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the general public to comment on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. Comments should address: (a) whether the proposed collection of information is necessary for the proper performance of the functions of the Commission, including whether the information shall have practical utility; (b) the accuracy of the Commission's burden estimates; (c) ways to enhance the quality, utility, and clarity of the information collected; (d) ways to minimize the burden of the collection of information on the respondents, including the use of automated collection techniques or other forms of information technology; and (e) way to further reduce the information collection burden on small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. Comment Period and Filing Procedures Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's rules, 47 CFR 1.415, 1.419, interested parties may file comments and reply comments on or before the dates indicated on the first page of this document. Comments may be filed using the Commission's Electronic Comment Filing System (ECFS) or by paper. Commenters should refer to WC Docket No. 21-341 when filing in response to this FNPRM. • Electronic Filers: Comments may be filed electronically by accessing ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to file by paper must file an original and one copy of each filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and until further notice, the Commission no longer accepts any hand or messenger delivered filings. • Commercial overnight mail (other than U.S. Postal Service Express Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050 Junction Drive, Annapolis Junction, MD 20701. U.S. Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority Mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. People with Disabilities: To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities (braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at 202-418-0530 (voice), 202-418-0432 (TTY). Synopsis I. Introduction 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever federal investment in broadband, as well as other federal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the necessary infrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved and underserved areas in the United States. Key to these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission has taken significant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in states that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the District of Columbia have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently only apply to cable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission's pole attachment rules to broadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. Additionally, as a follow-on to the pole replacement clarification issued in the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, in the Declaratory Ruling below we provide further clarification regarding cost causation when a pole must be replaced for any reason other than lacking capacity to support a new attachment. Specifically, we clarify that a “red tagged” pole is one that the utility has identified as needing replacement for any reason other than the pole's lack of capacity, and we provide additional examples of when a pole replacement is not “necessitated solely” as a result of a third party's attachment or modification request— i.e., when a pole already requires replacement at the time the new attacher makes a request. We also clarify the obligation to share easement information and the applicable timelines for the processing of attachment requests for 3,000 or more poles. Finally, we seek comment in the FNPRM on ways to further facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable faster broadband deployment. II. Background 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the pole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act, the Commission determined that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the benefiting party must assume the cost of the modification. (Section 224(h) states that “[w]henever the owner of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the costs incurred by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible.” Section 224(i) states that “[a]n entity that obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the costs of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including the owner of such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).”) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, the Commission reiterated that application of the cost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the Internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of pole replacements. Specifically, NCTA asked the Commission to declare that: (1) utilities must share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, section 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with pole replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband services to Americans in unserved areas. 5. In the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that the record developed in response to the NCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice (87 FR 25181; Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that this Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second Further Notice, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not caused (necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the costs of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extent to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costs of pole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second Further Notice also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potential attachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expand use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachment complaints and the specific criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. III. Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking 7. We recognize that Congress has undertaken a number of initiatives allocating funding to further the deployment of broadband to unserved and underserved areas of the United States. In connection with this funding, broadband providers will have to deploy extensive facilities. This, in turn will require that they file significant numbers of applications seeking to attach these facilities to large numbers of poles. To that end, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable speedier broadband deployment. In seeking comment on these areas, we emphasize that even when there is not a specific Commission rule or policy that governs a particular situation, it is our expectation that parties negotiate in good faith to resolve issues that may arise. 8. Large Orders. We tentatively conclude that we should adopt a defined make-ready timeline for orders that exceed 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state in order to facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications that are submitted in large numbers. We seek comment on this tentative conclusion. Our current make-ready rule requires make-ready in the communications space to be completed within 30 days after the utility sends a notification to all existing attachers on a pole. (The rule provides 90 days from attachments above the communications space.) The 30-day timeframe applies for communications space make-ready requests up to the lesser of 300 poles or 0.5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. This make-ready timeframe is extended 45 extra days for requests up to the lesser of 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. For requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in the state, the Commission's rules require that a utility shall negotiate the timing of the make-ready in good faith. (As we clarify in the Declaratory Ruling accompanying this FNPRM, the first 3,000 poles of these large orders are subject to the timeline set forth in § 1.1411(g)(3).) We tentatively conclude that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state and seek comment on this tentative conclusion. 9. NCTA asserts that our rules do not at present sufficiently address the needs of attachers with these larger requests in the latter category. For example, NCTA asserts that its members have faced situations where the utilities have imposed limits on (1) the number of poles that may be included in any one application, and (2) the number of applications an attacher may submit at a time. NCTA states that these limitations “create problematic delays and jeopardize operators' ability to meet broadband build-out commitments.” At the same time, USTelecom notes the difficulties presented by these very large orders, noting that “make-ready requests involving more than 3,000 poles require flexibility that make-ready timelines cannot provide, given the many outside factors that impact the time required for make-ready for such large orders, including permitting delays, workforce shortages and staffing issues, and the coordination required among all the attachers to the poles.” Given these factors, would 90 additional days over the timeline set forth in § 1.411(e) be sufficient for processing these larger orders? Would some other amount of time be reasonable in all circumstances, or should the Commission create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles? If the Commission were to adopt additional make-ready timeline tiers, what would be an appropriate cut off number of poles for each tier? For instance, should the Commission add an additional number of days for application processing per 3,000 poles? Does the ability to deviate from the timelines specified in § 1.1411 provide utilities with enough flexibility such that imposing a 90 additional day limit would be reasonable? 10. We also seek comment on NCTA's proposal that the Commission revise its rules to prohibit utilities from limiting “the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application so as to avoid the timelines.” How prevalent are situations of the type described by NCTA? Are the reasons underlying utilities' imposition of such limitations as laid out by USTelecom valid, and do other reasons exist for these limitations? Would prohibiting utilities from imposing such limitations in fact speed up the attachment process, or would the same delays still exist for other reasons ( e.g., lack of qualified workers, shortages in materials, etc.) or even, as USTelecom alleges, “ultimately slow—rather than—accelerate deployment”? Specifically, NCTA proposes adding additional time to the existing timelines for these “larger” orders, for which our rules require that utilities negotiate the timing in good faith. Would NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders? Utilities have raised multiple concerns with such requirements. For example, they assert that compliance with expanded timelines may not be possible “if many permit applications by multiple attachers are submitted at approximately the same time, or if the contractor's workload is already heavy.” They also assert that given constraints on workforce availability, utilities would be forced to “choose between providing safe, reliable and affordable power to electric customers (which is mandated by the states), and performing requested pole replacements in an unreasonable and likely unattainable amount of time.” Are these concerns valid? Are there any other reasons why NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders would not work? What are the respective costs and benefits of such potential requirements? What other steps could we take to facilitate the pole attachment process for larger orders? 11. Self-Help and Use of Contractors. Should the Commission consider modifying its self-help rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly? NCTA also asserts that it has faced issues with utilities failing to process attachment applications in a timely manner. NCTA therefore proposes that utilities notify attachers in advance of survey and make-ready deadlines if the utility will be unable to complete a portion of the process. For instance, NCTA proposes that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period so that the attacher can elect self-help for the survey sooner. NCTA also proposes making self-help available for the estimate process, which is not contemplated under current Commission rules. We seek comment on NCTA's proposal. (We decline NCTA's request to adopt rules in the Fourth Report and Order regarding self-help and the use of contractors. We find that these issues would be better addressed after a more comprehensive record is developed.) How prevalent is the issue cited by NCTA? Can utilities feasibly be required to inform attachers within 15 business days of receiving a completed application that they will be unable to conduct a survey, estimate, or make-ready within the required time period? Do sufficient contractors exist that meet the minimum qualification requirements set forth in our rules such that adoption of NCTA's proposal would have the desired effect of speeding broadband deployment? What are the respective costs and benefits of adopting NCTA's proposal? Are there other ways to assist utilities in processing the larger number of applications they will likely receive in the coming months and years based on the funding initiatives in place for accelerating broadband deployment to unserved and underserved areas? 12. We also seek comment on the impact of contractor availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready for surveys and make-ready work. Specifically, do we need to amend the Commission's rules to make it easier for attachers to use their own contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready surveys and make-ready work when there are no contractors available from a utility list? Utility commenters point out the labor constraints in the contractor workforce; given such constraints, do our current rules provide adequate relief to attachers to timely identify and use qualified contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready work? If not, what can the Commission do to change this dynamic? 13. Pursuant to our rules, an attacher can do its own work when (1) completing surveys and make-ready work when the utility misses the deadlines for these activities, or (2) electing to use the one-touch make-ready process. (Note that there are no attacher self-help remedies for pole replacements.) When conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready work, the attacher must use a utility-approved contractor. For self-help surveys and make-ready work that is complex or is above the communications space on a pole, our rules require that a utility make available and keep up to date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors that it authorizes to perform such work. (The term “complex make-ready” means transfers and work within the communications space on a pole that would be reasonably likely to cause a service outage(s) or facility damage, including work such as splicing of any communication attachment or relocation of existing wireless attachments. Any and all wireless activities, including those involving mobile, fixed, and point-to-point wireless communications and wireless internet service providers, are to be considered complex.) Attachers can request to add contactors to the utility's list—provided the contractor meets the minimum qualifications in the Commission's rules—and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. Further, a utility may, but is not required to, keep up-to-date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors it authorizes to perform surveys and simple make-ready. If a utility provides such a list, then the new attacher must choose a contractor from the list to perform the work. Again, attachers may request the addition to the list of any contractor that meets the minimum qualifications in the Commission's rules, and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. However, if the utility does not provide a list of approved contractors for surveys or simple make-ready work or no utility-approved contractor is available within a reasonable time period, then the new attacher may choose its own qualified contractor who meets the Commission's minimum requirements. Utilities retain the right to disqualify such contractor, but disqualification must be based on reasonable safety or reliability concerns related to the contractor's failure to meet any of the Commission's minimum qualifications or to meet the utility's publicly available and commercially reasonable safety or reliability standards. The utility must provide notice of this objection to the attacher and must identify at least one available qualified contractor that the attacher can use instead to perform simple surveys and make-ready work. 14. Given that our current rules allow for attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utility fails to meet the Commission's deadlines (provided such contractors meet the minimum qualifications set forth in our rules), we seek comment on whether attachers are availing themselves of this option. Have attachers faced any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke this option? While a utility cannot be blamed for a lack of available contractors in an area due to workforce constraints, are utilities seeking to use their discretion set forth in the rules to disqualify otherwise-qualified contractors whom attachers may seek to bring in from outside of an area? We note that, at least for surveys and simple make-ready work, our current rules already require the utility to designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher—is this not being done? If not, is it due to labor constraints for which the utility should not be held responsible? In the instance where no qualified contractors are available for a project, how could the Commission help to solve that problem? IV. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis 15. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), the Commission has prepared this Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities by the policies and rules proposed in this FNPRM. The Commission requests written public comments on this IRFA. Comments must be identified as responses to the IRFA and must be filed by the deadlines for comments provided on the first page of the FNPRM. The Commission will send a copy of the FNPRM, including this IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA). In addition, the FNPRM and IRFA (or summaries thereof) will be published in the Federal Register . A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Proposed Rules 16. In order to continue the Commission's work combating illegal calls, this FNPRM proposes to impose several obligations on gateway providers. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to require gateway providers to authenticate and employ robocall mitigation techniques on all SIP calls that they allow into the United States from abroad that display a U.S. number in the caller ID field. The FNPRM also proposes that gateway providers should engage in robocall mitigation by (1) responding to all traceback requests from the Commission, law enforcement, and the industry traceback consortium within 24 hours; (2) complying with mandatory call blocking requirements; (3) complying with enhanced know-your-customer obligations; (4) complying with a general duty to mitigate illegal robocalls; and (5) filing a certification in the Robocall Mitigation Database. The Commission also proposes one blocking requirement for intermediate and terminating providers immediately downstream from the gateway provider, which would require those providers to block all traffic from a gateway provider that fails to block or effectively mitigate illegal traffic when notified of such traffic by the Commission. B. Legal Basis 17. The FNPRM proposes to find authority largely under those provisions through which it has previously adopted rules to stem the tide of robocalls in its Call Blocking and Call Authentication Orders. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to find authority under sections 201(a) and (b), 202(a), 251(e), the Truth in Caller ID Act, the TRACED Act and, where appropriate, ancillary authority. The FNPRM also proposes to conclude that, to the extent any of the rules we seek to adopt have an effect on foreign service providers, that effect is only indirect and therefore consistent with the Commission's authority. The FNPRM solicits comment on these proposals. C. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which the Proposed Rules Will Apply 18. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that may be affected by the proposed rules, if adopted. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business applies “unless an agency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activities of the agency and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .”) A “small business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA. 19. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small entities that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatory flexibility analysis, according to data from the Small Business Administration's (SBA) Office of Advocacy, in general a small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 20. Next, the type of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally “any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field.” The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the population of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less according to the registration and tax data for exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 21. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as “governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand.” U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the United States. (The Census of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (county, (there were 2,105 county governments with populations less than 50,000. This category does not include subcounty (municipal and township) governments) municipal, and town or township (there were 18,729 municipal and 16,097 town and township governments with populations less than 50,000)) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments—independent school districts (there were 12,040 independent school districts with enrollment populations less than 50,000) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the special purpose governments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the number of special purpose governments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 22. Wired Broadband Internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 23. Additionally, according to Commission data on internet access services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include aDSL, sDSL, Other Wireline, Cable Modem and FTTP). Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 24. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as VoIP service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of All Other Telecommunications. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firms in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 25. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide a variety of services, such as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not included in this industry.) 26. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 27. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 28. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (Incumbent LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 29. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 30. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 31. Operator Service Providers (OSPs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of operator services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 32. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 33. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of WISPA, including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfers or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 34. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 35. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to Part 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 36. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in the designated entities section in Part 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The “Designated entities” sections in subparts D-Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 37. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 38. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 39. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 40. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 41. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 42. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 43. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 44. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 45. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under Part 90 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commission estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 46. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 47. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 48. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 49. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 50. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806 MHz bands. Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 51. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 52. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800 MHz air-ground spectrum. 53. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 54. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 55. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 56. 3650-3700 MHz Band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700 MHz band fall in the Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 57. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are small internet Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the 3650-3700 MHz band. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 58. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of Title 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.) They also include the Upper Microwave Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 59. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 60. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 61. Broadband Radio Service and Educational Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of the Broadband Radio Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatory purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmission depends upon the transmitter power, the type of receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 62. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auction of BRS licenses, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the winning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 64. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million for the preceding five (5) years, and a very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 65. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms “primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications.” Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of transmitting telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g. dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 67. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers may not provide telephone service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 68. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscription or fee basis. The broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 69. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the purpose of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. Of these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 70. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is “a cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000.” For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a small cable operator. (In the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determined that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 71. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of “establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer.” This industry group is categorized based on fuel source and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control and Electric Power Distribution. 72. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. D. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements for Small Entities 73. In the FNPRM, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment. Some of these proposals may impose new or additional reporting or recordkeeping and/or other compliance obligations on small entities. Specifically, we seek comment on a proposal that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. We also seek comment on whether NCTA's proposal to add additional time to the existing application timelines for larger orders and prohibit utilities from limiting the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application, to avoid these timelines, will facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders. Additionally, we seek comment on whether the Commission should create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles. We also consider whether to require that a utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period, making self-help available for the estimate process, which is not contemplated under current Commission rules. We also seek comment on whether attachers face any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke self-help options, which allows attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utility fails to meet the Commission's deadlines. This information will help to inform whether potential rule changes are necessary. At this time, the Commission cannot quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the approaches discussed in the FNPRM, or whether any compliance requirements will require small entities to hire professionals; however, the Commission requests information on the costs and benefits of the approaches discussed, such as the availability of qualified contractors and other workforce constraints that may impact the speed and cost of deployment for utilities and attachers. E. Steps Taken To Minimize the Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 74. The RFA requires an agency to describe any significant, specifically small business, alternatives that it has considered in reaching its proposed approach, which may include the following four alternatives (among others): “(1) the establishment of differing compliance or reporting requirements or timetables that take into account the resources available to small entities; (2) the clarification, consolidation, or simplification of compliance and reporting requirements under the rule for such small entities; (3) the use of performance rather than design standards; and (4) an exemption from coverage of the rule, or any part thereof, for such small entities.” 75. The FNPRM seeks comment on whether the Commission should revise its rules to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment, including a tentative conclusion that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. The Commission's objective in requesting this information is to determine whether it can and should establish clear standards for when and how attachers and utilities must share the costs of a pole replacement precipitated by a new attachment request. Among the alternatives considered in the FNPRM is whether the Commission should allow additional time for the existing larger order timelines where our current rules require that utilities negotiate timing in good faith. We seek comment on whether requiring that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period would allow the attacher to elect self-help for the survey sooner. In the alternative, we inquire whether such expansion of time is reasonable for utilities if numerous permits are submitted around the same time or contractor workload is heavy. We also consider whether attachers are choosing to find their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when utilities fail to meet the Commission's deadlines. Similarly, we request information on whether or not utilities designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher. We also seek comment on how the Commission can help resolve situations where labor shortages may hinder utilities from meeting deadlines to respond to attachers. The Commission also seeks comment on and will consider the relative costs and benefits of any such revisions to its rules. Information submitted in response to these requests for comment will enable the Commission to evaluate the impact that revising its pole attachment rules would have on smaller entities. F. Federal Rules That May Duplicate, Overlap, or Conflict With the Proposed Rules 76. None. V. Procedural Matters 77. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act, the Commission has prepared an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities of the policies and rules addressed in this FNPRM. Written public comments are requested on the IRFA. Comments must be filed by the deadlines for comments on the FNPRM indicated on the first page of this document and must have a separate and distinct heading designating them as responses to the IRFA. The Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference Information Center, will send a copy of this FNPRM, including the IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the SBA. 78. Paperwork Reduction Act. The FNPRM contains proposed new information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the general public and OMB to comment on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. 79. Ex Parte Presentations—Permit-But-Disclose. The proceeding this FNPRM initiates shall be treated as a “permit-but-disclose” proceeding in accordance with the Commission's ex parte rules. Persons making ex parte presentations must file a copy of any written presentation or a memorandum summarizing any oral presentation within two business days after the presentation (unless a different deadline applicable to the Sunshine period applies). Persons making oral ex parte presentations are reminded that memoranda summarizing the presentation must (1) list all persons attending or otherwise participating in the meeting at which the ex parte presentation was made, and (2) summarize all data presented and arguments made during the presentation. If the presentation consisted in whole or in part of the presentation of data or arguments already reflected in the presenter's written comments, memoranda or other filings in the proceeding, the presenter may provide citations to such data or arguments in his or her prior comments, memoranda, or other filings (specifying the relevant page and/or paragraph numbers where such data or arguments can be found) in lieu of summarizing them in the memorandum. Documents shown or given to Commission staff during ex parte meetings are deemed to be written ex parte presentations and must be filed consistent with § 1.1206(b) of the Commission's rules. In proceedings governed by § 1.49(f) of the Commission's rules or for which the Commission has made available a method of electronic filing, written ex parte presentations and memoranda summarizing oral ex parte presentations, and all attachments thereto, must be filed through the electronic comment filing system available for that proceeding, and must be filed in their native format ( e.g., .doc, .xml, .ppt, searchable .pdf). Participants in this proceeding should familiarize themselves with the Commission's ex parte rules. VI. Ordering Clauses 80. Accordingly, it is ordered , pursuant to sections 4(i), 4(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), and 403 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 154(i), 154(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), 403, that this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking is adopted . 81. It is further ordered that the Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference information Center, shall send a copy of this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, including the Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA), to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Katura Jackson, Federal Register Liaison Officer. Proposed Rules The Federal Communications Commission proposes to amend part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Amend § 1.1411 by revising paragraph (g)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (g) * * * (4) A utility may add 90 days to the make-ready periods described in paragraph (e) of this section to all requests for attachment larger than the lesser of 3000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state.
Final
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: This is a summary of the Commission's Fourth Report and Order in WC Docket No. 17-84, adopted December 13, 2023, and released December 15, 2023. The full text of this document is available for public inspection at the following internet address: https://docs.fcc.gov/public/attachments/FCC-23-109A1.pdf. To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities ( e.g., Braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at (202) 418-0530. Synopsis I. Introduction 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever Federal investment in broadband, as well as other Federal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the necessary infrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved and underserved areas in the United States. Key to these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission has taken significant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in states that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the District of Columbia have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently only apply to cable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission's pole attachment rules to broadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. II. Background 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the pole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act, the Commission determined that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the benefiting party must assume the cost of the modification. (Section 224(h) states that whenever the owner of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the costs incurred by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible. Section 224(i) states that an entity that obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the costs of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including the owner of such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order (83 FR 31659-02, July 9, 2018), the Commission reiterated that application of the cost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of pole replacements. Specifically, NCTA asked the Commission to declare that: (1) utilities must share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with pole replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband services to Americans in unserved areas. 5. In the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that the record developed in response to the NCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking ( Second FNPRM ) (87 FR 25181-01, Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that the Fourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not caused (necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the costs of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extent to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costs of pole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second FNPRM also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potential attachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expand use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachment complaints and the specific criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. (To the extent that the Fourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) III. Report and Order 7. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt measures to expedite resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment. Specifically, we (1) establish an agency-wide rapid response team to provide coordinated review and assessment of such pole attachment disputes and to recommend effective dispute resolution procedures, and (2) adopt specific criteria to guide that team when considering whether a complaint (or portion thereof) should be included on the Enforcement Bureau's Accelerated Docket. We also require utilities to provide information regarding pole conditions and scheduled replacements to the extent that information is contained in cyclical pole inspection reports that utilities already create and maintain in the ordinary course of their business, or in pole inspection reports created between cyclical reports. (Both pole attachers and utilities made several other proposals, not addressed herein, regarding the process for pole attachments and replacements and ways they believe the process could be improved to reduce disputes and promote broadband deployment.) A. Accelerating Resolution of Pole Attachment Disputes That Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment 8. We amend our rules to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment by establishing a Commission intra-agency rapid response team—called the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT)—to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. (We codify these amendments in part 1, subpart J, of the Commission's rules ( i.e., Pole Attachment Complaint Procedures) by redesignating current § 1.1415 as § 1.1416 and adding a new § 1.1415. These rule amendments apply only to disputes involving pole attachments of a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service and do not apply to disputes involving pole attachments of a broadband-only internet service provider. They also do not apply to disputes involving poles that are owned or controlled by a railroad, the Federal Government, a state (including a political subdivision thereof such as a municipality), or a cooperative association, or where the poles at issue are located in a state, or the District of Columbia, that has certified to the Commission that it regulates the rates, terms, and conditions of pole attachments in that state or jurisdiction pursuant to 47 U.S.C. 224(c). Should we adopt the proposal set forth in the Open internet NPRM (88 FR 76048-01, Nov. 3, 2023) to reclassify broadband-only internet service as a telecommunications service, section 224 would once again apply to broadband-only internet service providers deployments.) At the outset, we emphasize that we expect all parties to comply with the Commission's pole attachment rules and to negotiate in good faith to craft solutions that suit the needs of attachers and utilities to facilitate deployment projects. We recognize, however, that in some instances disagreements arise as to the conduct of one or multiple parties, and we encourage parties in those instances to avail themselves of the Commission's dispute resolution processes to both facilitate the resolution of disputes and, when necessary, use the formal adjudication process to develop precedent upon which parties can rely to settle future potential disputes. In this document, we amend our rules to create the RBAT in an effort to make the Commission's pole attachment dispute resolution process more responsive and adaptable with the goal of facilitating deployment. 9. The RBAT will be charged with expediting the resolution of these disputes by swiftly engaging key stakeholders, gathering relevant information, distilling issues in dispute, and recommending to the parties, where appropriate, an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a complaint (or portion of a complaint) on the Accelerated Docket based on consideration of specified criteria, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. (The Schools, Health &amp; Libraries Broadband (SHLB) Coalition suggests that creation of the RBAT may result in a needless administrative step and associated delay, and suggests that the RBAT, if created, be vested with authority to resolve disputes without going through the additional step of a complaint process. We decline to adopt this approach. The RBAT is designed to assist parties in resolving their dispute expeditiously without need for litigation. But if parties are unable to reach a resolution, either through mediation or other means, our existing complaint procedures, including the Accelerated Docket, ensure a means of adjudicating the dispute in accordance with due process.) 10. In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on NCTA's proposed adoption of policies “favoring the placement of pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas on the [Commission's] Accelerated Docket[,]” a mechanism that requires the Commission to quickly resolve disputes between parties within 60 days. (Under § 1.736(a), complaint proceedings on the Accelerated Docket must be concluded within 60 days, and are therefore subject to shorter pleading deadlines and other modifications to the procedural rules that govern formal complaint proceedings.) It also sought comment on measures that would expedite the resolution of “pole replacement[ ]” disputes and on criteria for determining more generally “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” Based on broad record support among attachers for further streamlining our processes as applied to disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we conclude that the targeted measures outlined below are warranted and will advance the Commission's goal of timely broadband deployment. 11. As the Commission observed in the Second FNPRM, our current rules provide a 180-day deadline (or shot clock) for final action on pole access complaints where a cable television system operator or provider of telecommunications service claims that it has been denied access to a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way owned or controlled by a utility. (For purposes of this subsection, the Commission has defined a “pole access complaint” as a complaint “filed by a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service that alleges a complete denial of access to a utility pole[,]” and clarified that “[the] term [pole access complaint] does not encompass a complaint alleging that a utility is imposing unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions that amount to a denial of pole access.”) In addition, a 270-day shot clock currently applies to final action on all other pole attachment complaints ( i.e., those alleging unjust or unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions of attachment). Several commenters assert that these timeframes are commercially unreasonable for attachers seeking to deploy broadband networks, particularly in rural or unserved areas. (Charter asserts that the “[m]ere existence ” of a path allowing more routine use of the Accelerated Docket “could help broadband providers resolve disagreements without the need for Commission intervention” by “provid[ing] attachers facing government-imposed construction deadlines with a more credible option of seeking relief, thereby reducing the one-sided leverage held by pole owners today.”) NCTA submits that the need for expedited procedures has gained greater urgency recently for “providers . . . receiving government funds to build out broadband under deadlines that afford no time for a lengthy complaint process.” A number of commenters therefore propose more routine use of the Accelerated Docket, with its 60-day shot clock, especially for pole attachment disputes involving time-sensitive deployments in unserved areas. Several commenters also contend that the current Accelerated Docket rule does not sufficiently motivate utilities to comply with their obligation to allow pole access because it is unclear when Commission staff, in the exercise of their discretion under § 1.736(d) of our rules, will include a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Crown Castle asserts that “without certainty that the complaint will be promptly resolved, the decision to bring a formal complaint to the Commission involves business decisions about whether the resolution will be too late to meaningfully assist the deployment.” On the other hand, other commenters argue that sweeping or widespread imposition of the Accelerated Docket rule, with its highly compressed timeframes, could raise potential fairness and due process concerns given the complexity of the issues raised in most pole attachment cases. (Other commenters question the necessity of new rules (1) due to the relative infrequency of requests for Accelerated Docket treatment, see, e.g., Edison Electric Institute Comments at 54 (challenging the need to further expedite “denial of access” complaints based on “[t]he complete absence of [such] complaints before the Commission”), or (2) due to the lack of evidence of instances where dilatory actions of utilities have caused broadband grant recipients to lose access to such funding.) After considering these competing concerns, we find that the adoption of targeted dispute resolution reforms, as set forth below, will address the expressed need for quicker resolution of pole attachment disputes that may impede or delay broadband deployment while ensuring sufficient fairness and due process for all involved parties. 12. Disputes Subject to RBAT Review and Assessment Procedures. The Commission asked in the Second FNPRM whether any new dispute resolution procedures should be “limited to complaints that raise only discrete pole access issues” and do not require consideration of “whether a rate, term, or condition of attachment is unjust or unreasonable.” To address the need for timely broadband deployment, particularly in unserved or underserved areas, we apply the new procedures discussed below to any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities. To provide greater clarity regarding when such a dispute would be eligible for placement on the Accelerated Docket, we also adopt below specific criteria that will guide the RBAT in determining when a dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition. In light of the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, disputes raising relatively straightforward legal and evidentiary issues, as determined based on the RBAT's review of these criteria, are more likely to be considered appropriate for placement on the Accelerated Docket. 13. Although the record reflects differing views regarding which disputes should be subject to new dispute resolution procedures, a significant proportion of commenters seeking such reforms ask that we limit the focus of any new procedures to disputes that are interfering with active broadband deployment plans or projects. We adopt this suggestion based on our conclusion that focusing on pole attachment disputes that impede or delay a provider's ability to deploy new broadband facilities will align with, and advance most directly, the goal of timely broadband deployment. (Several utilities argue that across-the-board application of dispute resolution reforms to an entire category of disputes would fail to account for complexities in individual cases. But such comments assume that Accelerated Docket treatment would automatically apply to all disputes within the identified category. In fact, under the reforms we adopt herein, such disputes will receive individualized assessment and review (by the RBAT) based on a totality of factors analysis.) 14. RBAT Review and Assessment of Disputes that Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment. To expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay an active broadband deployment project, we amend our rules to establish the RBAT, which will be comprised of Enforcement Bureau and Wireline Competition Bureau staff with expertise in the Commission's pole attachment rules and orders. We charge the RBAT with prioritizing the resolution of any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities (including where the party is also seeking placement of the matter on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736). In performing this role, the RBAT will gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and provide guidance and advice on the most effective means of resolving the parties' dispute. Where appropriate, the RBAT will recommend to the parties an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a complaint, or portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. The RBAT will recommend use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined below, that a complaint, or portion thereof, is suitable for accelerated disposition. (The RBAT may recommend placement of a dispute on the Accelerated Docket in the exercise of the discretion afforded Commission staff “to decide whether a complaint, or portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket.” A prospective complainant may accept the recommendation, with or without the consent of the other party or parties to the dispute, by moving forward with the agreed upon schedule and process established by Commission staff in the case.) To request RBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party to the dispute contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. (The RBAT review and assessment process will be available only to attachers and pole owners that are direct parties to such dispute (including any legal counsel retained to represent a party in that specific dispute). For parties seeking both RBAT review and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, this initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b).) The MDRD Chief will direct the party to a streamlined form on the MDRD website—Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. The form will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute, and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket. (The form will require a submitting party to provide: information identifying the parties and the services they offer; the section(s) of the Act or Commission rule or order alleged to have been violated; a brief description of the parties' dispute (including how it relates to broadband deployment plans or projects, whether such plans or projects are subject to a deadline under a government funded broadband program, whether the dispute arises in an unserved or underserved area, what harm is occurring or is likely to occur as a result of the situation, and what aspects of the dispute require immediate redress); the specific relief sought; whether the parties have entered into a non-disclosure agreement; the steps the party has taken to resolve the matter with other parties to the dispute; a statement as to whether the parties are amenable to mediation; and a statement indicating whether the party intends to seek inclusion of the matter on the Accelerated Docket. The form also will elicit information relevant to whether the dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition including, for example, the number of poles in question, the number and complexity of claims at issue, and the likely need for discovery or expert affidavits. The RBAT may request additional information from the submitting party if more information is necessary to determine a course of action.) 15. Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT will schedule a meeting through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that one or both parties provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. (NCTA suggests that we specify the information the respondent will be required to provide. We find this approach impracticable, as the information required in a response will depend on the complainant's allegations. We employ a more flexible approach that enables the RBAT to request relevant information and documentation from either party, as appropriate.) In the initial meeting, or in a meeting shortly thereafter, the RBAT will provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including staff-supervised mediation, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other action. (Because mediation will be a prominent feature of the RBAT review, we decline to adopt INCOMPAS's proposal that the 180-day deadline for resolution of a pole access complaint be triggered by the submission of the request for RBAT Review and Assessment. If mediation succeeds, there will be no need for a complaint. If it does not, the filing of a complaint will commence review period deadlines under the relevant Commission rules.) To that end, the RBAT will attempt to distill the issues in dispute and identify issues that are most impacting a party's broadband deployment plans. For example, the RBAT may encourage parties to focus on the resolution of one or more threshold issues, or what appears to be the most urgent issue(s), if it finds that doing so may help the parties to narrow their dispute. Likewise, the RBAT may encourage parties, where appropriate, to streamline the proceeding by agreeing to focus on “test cases”— i.e., disputes over specific poles that the parties agree are representative of disputes over multiple poles. In this way, deciding the issue as to the test case will have broader impact. 16. Should the RBAT recommend staff-supervised mediation, it shall be conducted pursuant to § 1.737 of the Commission's rules. Because § 1.737 generally contemplates that mediations will be conducted by MDRD staff, we delegate authority to the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, to modify or waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (Waiver is appropriate for “good cause,” and is warranted only if both: (1) special circumstances warrant a deviation from the general rule, and (2) such deviation will serve the public interest.) The strict confidentiality requirements will apply to all written and oral communications prepared or made for purposes of a mediation pursuant to § 1.737(f), including mediation submissions, offers of compromise, and staff and party comments made during the course of the mediation (Mediation Communications). Through mediation, the RBAT will make every effort to settle or narrow the issues in dispute as expeditiously as possible. 17. In the event that the parties are unable to settle their dispute, and a prospective complainant seeks placement of its complaint on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT will decide whether the complaint or a portion of the complaint is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of the criteria set forth below. Because of the very short deadlines that apply in Accelerated Docket proceedings, Commission staff historically have carefully evaluated whether a particular dispute is appropriate for expedited disposition, resulting in the placement of relatively few cases on the Accelerated Docket. In evaluating whether a matter is suitable for expedited disposition, the RBAT must similarly be mindful of the due process concerns raised by commenters, such as the Pennsylvania PUC, regarding affording parties “the opportunity to be heard at a meaningful time and in a meaningful manner.” In addition, although mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under rule 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Finally, if the RBAT determines that a matter is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT is authorized to send appropriate matters to the Commission's Administrative Law Judge (ALJ) for an expedited “minitrial” ( i.e., trial-type hearing) as contemplated by § 1.736(h). 18. Criteria for Placement on the Accelerated Docket. The Commission sought comment in the Second FNPRM on the adoption of specific criteria to guide Commission staff on “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” (For example, the Commission asked if its policy should “take into account the number and complexity of the claims, need for discovery, need for expert affidavits, and ability of the parties to stipulate to facts.”) Based on the requests of several commenters for greater predictability surrounding Accelerated Docket placement decisions with respect to pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we establish criteria to aid the RBAT in making determinations regarding the placement of such matters on the Accelerated Docket. 19. In light of the strict time constraints that apply in Accelerated Docket cases, we decline to adopt a “presumption,” as suggested by some commenters, that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket and, instead, entrust the RBAT with this decision based on the criteria specified below. (There is no basis for us to conclude that a dispute will be suitable for the Accelerated Docket simply based on the number of poles at issue as INCOMPAS's proposal suggests.) We agree with Dominion/Xcel that a “one-size-fits-all policy” would not adequately take into account the complexity of the issues in particular complaint proceedings. We also agree with the Coalition of Concerned Utilities that the 60-day timeframe will be “too short” to resolve certain pole attachment disputes, and thus “blanket imposition” of the Accelerated Docket requirements would be unreasonable and “raise due process concerns” for utilities. Although Charter argues that the presumption could simply be rebutted if a particular complaint raises unusually complex issues, we reject this argument based on our experience with formal complaints. In particular, when parties oppose the operation of a presumption in a particular proceeding, these rebuttal efforts often lead to significant additional argumentation attendant to resolving the specific question of the presumption, thus unnecessarily complicating resolution of the underlying issues in dispute. To avoid the potential for unnecessary rounds of argumentation and to ensure that complaints accepted onto the Accelerated Docket are suitable for decision under the relevant time constraints, we reject proposals to create a presumption that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket. 20. After careful consideration of the record on this issue, we direct the RBAT to consider the factors below in determining whether to accept onto the Accelerated Docket a pole attachment dispute that is allegedly impeding or delaying a broadband facilities deployment plan or project. The RBAT shall determine eligibility for placement on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of these factors: • whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; • whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities, especially in an unserved or underserved area; • whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; • the number and complexity of the issues in dispute; • whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; • the likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; • the likely need for expert testimony; • the ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; • whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; • the willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and • such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding. The first three of these criteria will help the RBAT to ensure appropriate use of the Commission's processes in support of the goal of timely broadband deployment and ensure that the parties have made a sufficient effort to resolve or, at a minimum, identify and narrow the disputed issues prior to filing a complaint. The remaining criteria will help the RBAT to determine if a dispute is suitable for decision under the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, and also require it to consider whether including a matter on the Accelerated Docket would ensure the prompt and fair adjudication of the dispute. (A responding party's refusal to stipulate to facts or cooperate in the exchange of relevant information bearing on disputed facts will not itself defeat a request for acceptance of a pole attachment dispute on the Accelerated Docket.) By specifying the criteria that the RBAT must consider in making its determination, we hope to make the Accelerated Docket a more useful tool in the resolution of eligible pole attachment disputes and provide prospective complainants with greater certainty regarding which complaints will be deemed suitable for expedited resolution. 21. We will closely monitor the impact of the dispute resolution procedures adopted here and consider additional streamlining measures should we observe ongoing delay tactics or other unreasonable practices that hinder the ability of broadband providers to deploy new services or facilities. (Two commenters suggest narrowing the list of criteria to avoid delay tactics by utilities. We find that eliminating criteria is unnecessary, however, as these criteria are holistic in nature, and no single one will be dispositive. Moreover, the RBAT is not required to credulously accept assertions from either party.) B. Increasing Transparency by Providing Attachers With Utility Pole Inspection Information 22. We next amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe (if any). (The record demonstrates that utilities conduct inspections of their poles on a multi-year cycle, either as part of normal network management or as required by state law.) In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on requiring utilities to provide more information about their poles to prospective attachers, in order to reduce disputes. (Utilities did not challenge the Commission's general jurisdiction to require them to provide relevant information to prospective attachers, and ACA Connects asserted the Commission has such authority.) Several attaching entities indicated pole inspection information would be helpful in planning deployments. (This requirement applies only in the states that have not certified that they regulate pole attachments themselves. To the extent such reports may include sensitive or confidential network or financial information, we rely upon utilities and attachers to address the issue through redactions or non-disclosure agreements.) We believe this new requirement strikes a reasonable balance between additional transparency for prospective attachers and ensuring the utilities' expenditure of resources is no greater than necessary. As discussed below, however, we also strongly encourage utilities to voluntarily share pole-related information that is reasonably available and that they track in the normal course of business, both before and after receiving attachment applications, and we intend to continue to monitor the record in this proceeding to determine if additional information sharing mandates may be required. 23. For the purposes of the new transparency requirement, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle, while a periodic pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the inspection of any of its poles outside the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (Electric Utilities request that the new rule not require utilities to provide periodic pole inspection reports, arguing that the requirement will create confusion and invite disputes. We find that the definition of “periodic inspection report” is sufficiently clear and note that no other utility commenters claimed the definition was vague or otherwise problematic. We further find that this requirement is an important aspect of the rule. Cyclical pole inspections typically occur several years apart, sometimes by ten or more years, and periodic inspection reports will contain more recent inspection information. We also decline the Electric Utilities' request to seek further comment on transparency requirements in lieu of adopting a rule on report sharing. We find that the record is sufficient to adopt an information sharing rule at this time and the rule we adopt strikes an appropriate balance between providing attachers with additional helpful information while not being overly resource-intensive for utilities. Indeed, several utility parties are supportive of the new transparency requirement.) We note that this new transparency requirement is consistent with the existing practices of certain utilities to prepare such reports. When asking for information about the status of a utility's poles for a planned buildout, the attacher must submit its information request no earlier than contemporaneously with an attachment application. The utility will have ten business days to respond to the request. (The utility has the same amount of time to determine whether the application is complete.) This should allow sufficient time before the make-ready survey for the attacher to revise or amend its application as may be appropriate based on the information it receives. (“The term make-ready means the modification or replacement of a utility pole, or of the lines or equipment on the utility pole, to accommodate additional facilities on the utility pole.” After receiving a complete attachment application, a utility conducts a make-ready survey and provides a make-ready cost estimate to the attacher. During the survey stage, “the pole owner conducts an engineering study to determine whether and where attachment is feasible, and what make-ready is required.”) 24. We recognize that in some situations, the information provided by utilities in their pole inspection reports may lead new attachers to amend their attachment applications. In order to ensure that utilities have enough time to review such applications, in situations when the utility receives an amended attachment application prior to granting or denying the original application, we will allow a utility the option to restart the 45-day period for responding to the application on the merits and conducting the survey. (The option to restart the time period also applies to larger orders that are subject to a 60-day timeframe.) Utilities electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period in this manner must notify the attacher within 5 business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. (For example, if an amended application was filed on the 42nd day following the utility's determination that the original application was complete, the utility would only have three days, not five business days, to notify the attacher that the utility is restarting the 45-day application review and survey.) To avoid unnecessary delays and costs, we strongly encourage attachers to notify utilities of their intent to file, and to file, amended applications as quickly as possible after receiving a pole inspection report from the utility. We also encourage utilities to exercise their right to restart this 45-day period judiciously and to review amended applications as quickly as possible even when electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period. (Several parties asked that we require an automatic restart of the 45-day response period or start the application process over in such instances by requiring an attacher to file a new application rather than an amended application. We decline these requests and find that the procedures we adopt are sufficiently tailored to account for the needs of utilities to review amended applications while not needlessly slowing deployment. Under the new rule, utilities will always have the option of electing to restart the 45-day review period; but given that there may be instances where an amendment is minor or otherwise will not require a restart of the 45-day period, we find it reasonable to require utilities to actually review an amended application to determine whether a restart is necessary given the specific circumstances.) Regardless of whether the utility elects to restart the 45-day response period, any additional survey costs necessitated by the amended application, such as a second survey after a survey for the original application has been completed, will be borne by the new attacher consistent with the new attacher's obligation to pay for make-ready costs associated with its application. 25. In connection with the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule, we also require utilities to retain copies, in whatever form they were created, of any such cyclical or periodic pole inspection reports they conduct in the normal course of business, until such time as the utility completes a superseding cyclical pole inspection report covering the poles included in the attachment application. In creating these obligations, we reiterate that utilities are required to provide only the information they already possess and track in the normal course of conducting pole inspections at the time of the attacher's request for data. The new rule does not require utilities to collect or create new information for the sole purpose of responding to such requests or to provide all information they may possess on the affected poles outside their pole inspection reports. (Edison Electric Institute contends that “access to critical infrastructure by non-electric company personnel presents serious safety, reliability, and homeland security hazards,” and that “existing law bars electric companies from releasing some information about system infrastructure.” It does not directly assert, however, that utilities would be barred from disclosing information contained in a pole inspection report. And it notes that most of the information is “already available” and an attacher “can readily learn the condition” of poles by driving a proposed route. Although we do not know exactly what information utilities may include in their pole inspection reports, we anticipate that legal constraints on disclosure of critical infrastructure information can be addressed, to the extent that they arise, by the parties involved via appropriate redactions or use of a non-disclosure agreement. We do not intend our new rule to override laws precluding disclosure of certain information, but expect utilities to work in good faith to provide potential attachers with the information they can from their pole inspection reports.) We find this new limited requirement achieves a balance between a potential attacher's need for more information about the poles that it plans to use as part of a broadband buildout and the utility's interest in minimizing the burden of mandatory disclosures. 26. We conclude that requiring utilities to provide information about the state of their poles to attachers will help improve the attachment process and potentially reduce disputes. In particular, having such information early in the process will help attachers evaluate whether they want to adjust their plans in light of the poles' conditions. At the same time, we recognize the potential burdens on utilities that would result from imposing a mandate to compile extensive information for every pole attachment application the utility receives. We seek to strike a balance by (1) requiring utilities to provide such information as they already collect in the normal course of inspections done as part of managing their network and poles (which the record indicates include which poles have been identified as needing replacement), rather than having to gather information solely for attachers or from many disparate sources, and (2) tying requests for such information to poles contained in submitted attachment applications. 27. In striking this balance, we agree with utilities that they should not be required by rule to gather and provide extensive pole-related data for every pole attachment application about matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. The record shows that many utilities do not create specific maintenance or replacement schedules for poles. It also shows that some utilities provide a range of pole-related information—including whether any poles are red-tagged or otherwise identified for replacement—when responding to an attachment application after conducting a make-ready survey. We agree with the commenters asserting that a pre-application survey conducted by the attacher, or a make-ready survey conducted by a utility in response to a specific attachment application, are often the best ways to ensure the potential attacher and utility have up-to- date, accurate information on the current state of poles. (We recognize that a visual inspection may not necessarily provide all the information an attacher might desire. This supports requiring disclosure of pole inspection reports.) We also agree with Dominion/Xcel, however, that the information contained in general survey or pole inspection reports can be useful to prospective attachers in some cases. Therefore, although we decline at this time to impose broader duties on utilities to collect and provide more expansive pole-related information for every attachment application, we will require utilities to furnish already available information in pole inspection reports concerning specific poles upon request at the time an attachment application is submitted. (Some commenters support the balance struck in this new rule. Electric Utilities, on the other hand, request that any consideration of a rule to require disclosure of pole inspection reports be deferred to a further notice of proposed rulemaking.) 28. While we do not at this time codify a requirement for utilities to provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting a pole attachment application, as requested by some commenters, we understand that often utilities share pole information with attachers prior to the application process, particularly information not easily attained through visual inspection. We strongly encourage this pre-application collaboration and cooperation because there is value for both utilities and attachers in having the best available pole information to inform deployment forecasts and attachment requests. Although we recognize that some potential attachers could benefit from obtaining pole-related information prior to submitting an application, we decline to impose this requirement on utilities given that the underlying requests for information would be for preliminary build-out plans that may substantially change. Furthermore, establishing a pre-application duty for utilities would require the Commission to create a new process and timeline prior to the codified make-ready process, which has always been triggered by the filing of an application. Finally, given that prospective attachers also have the ability to gather information about poles on prospective routes through pre-application surveys and visual inspection of poles on a prospective route, we find that imposing an additional pre-application requirement on utilities is not justified at this time. (Through such visual inspection, an attacher typically can learn the age of a pole, whether it has been red tagged, when the most recent inspection occurred, and a pole's load and potential suitability for more attachments. As noted above, however, we also recognize that visual inspection alone may not always provide all the information an attacher may desire, thus supporting the new requirement that utilities provide attachers with cyclical and periodic pole inspection reports. For example, with regard to utility tags on poles, Crown Castle asserts that “not all poles are appropriately tagged or inspection tags may be missing, damaged, or unable to be interpreted without additional information from the pole owner.”) 29. We reject requests at this time that we mandate a variety of other disclosure requirements on utilities. (Several attachers requested that utilities be required to provide any relevant requested information about their poles that they retain in the ordinary course of business, which would go beyond pole inspection reports. While we encourage parties to voluntarily share information, we find that codifying a broad disclosure requirement for all information collected in the ordinary course of business could force utilities to expend significant resources to gather such information and could lead to additional disputes and complaints related to information sharing.) We agree with utilities that the most relevant information for purposes of an attachment request is whether the poles at issue are available or due for replacement. (Some utilities suspect that the purpose of many of the attachers' requests is only to provide ammunition for rate disputes with utilities, not to improve the attachment process.) For example, some attacher commenters ask the Commission to require utilities to create accessible databases (or establish a single database for all utilities) with information on things like pole age, condition, repair/replacement schedules, location, number of attachments, standard rate structure, and applicable engineering standards. They also ask that utilities be required to provide data from the owners' periodic load analyses for poles; the age, height, class, and condition of poles; and data on current attachments and pending attachment requests for relevant poles. And ACA Connects asks the Commission to require utilities to provide more details in their make-ready cost estimates to support those costs. For the reasons discussed below, we decline to adopt these requirements. With respect to certain financial information requested by some commenters regarding pole rates, we do not adopt new disclosure requirements, but make clear that some financial information is already required to be disclosed under our rules. 30. Before addressing these specific proposals, however, we note some attachers express concern that, by adopting a requirement to provide pole inspection reports but not codifying additional mandates, we may be inadvertently discouraging utilities from voluntarily providing pole-related information before receiving an attachment application, which at least some utilities do today. We stress that our actions in this final rule should not be understood to undermine or disincentivize such voluntary sharing. To the contrary, voluntary sharing of pole-related information is consistent with longstanding Commission policy favoring transparency in the pole attachment context, and we strongly encourage both utilities and attachers to collaborate and voluntarily share information with each other whenever such information is reasonably available and obtained in the normal course of business. (We reject claims that our actions here are inconsistent with the policy of promoting transparency, as Crown Castle asserts. To the contrary, this Order increases transparency by adopting a new disclosure requirement.) Voluntary sharing can be helpful to both attachers and utilities to promote more efficient buildouts by informing deployment forecasts, allowing more accurate applications, and decreasing disputes or delays after an application is submitted. (Such voluntary sharing also is helpful because “not all pole owners conduct these denominated inspections,” yet attachers still could benefit from receiving the kind of information that would have been included in such inspections had they occurred.) Having better and more accurate information prior to attachment applications will likely reduce make-ready costs, the frequency and severity of disputes, and improve the efficiency of the attachment process—benefiting both attachers and utilities. We will continue to monitor the record in this proceeding and will take further action if it becomes clear that voluntary information sharing arrangements are insufficiently promoting broadband deployment. 31. Database(s) of Pole Information. We decline (1) to require that each utility create an accessible database with an array of data on all its poles, or (2) to establish a single pole-information database for all utilities. The Commission rejected previous calls for a similar database requirement in 2011, in part based on the large burden outweighing potential benefits. We find that the 2011 reasoning remains valid. In particular, we find that the record continues to demonstrate that the burdens and costs of creating such a database (if a utility does not already have one) would be very large given the number of poles many utilities own or jointly own and the scope of pole data attachers seek, and that the alleged benefits of requiring such a database would be reduced by the new requirement we adopt in this final rule that utilities provide information from their pole inspection reports. Commenters contend that requiring such a pole-related database would help speed deployment by helping attachers plan better and avoid intermediate steps for both attachers and utilities. Utilities, however, assert that due to the very large number of poles they own or co-own and the ever-changing nature of pole networks, maintaining a fully up-to-date database would be almost impossible, and so the information for any given group of poles in a database could easily be out of date when the attacher needs it. One utility also submits that granting access to such voluminous pole information could result in the submission of incorrect applications. We find that the benefits of a database requirement remain speculative at best given how difficult it would be to keep such a large database up-to-date. 32. While some commenters argue that circumstances have changed since 2011, with some state utility commissions adopting database requirements for pole-related information, the states cited by these commenters are limited and, in any event, all regulate pole attachments at the state level pursuant to section 224(c) of the Act. As a result, compliance with pre-existing state-specific database requirements would likely offer little, if any, relief in complying with a newly imposed Federal database requirement. To the extent any utilities may have developed pole-related databases in states that do not regulate pole attachments, the record indicates that attachers are interested in specific types of data, not merely access to existing databases, which would require utilities to absorb additional, and potentially substantial, costs of either adding specific types of new data or searching databases for specific data of interest to attachers. (ACA Connects asserts that many utilities have developed pole-related databases since 2011, but it does not identify utilities that have done so in states that do not regulate pole attachments.) Again, we agree with the utilities that the value of such database information to attachers is highly unlikely to outweigh those burdens, as the information may well be out of date by the time an attacher submits an attachment request. Moreover, any added benefit would likely be minimal in light of the new information-sharing requirement we adopt in this final rule. 33. Loading Studies. According to NCTA, some utilities provide and allow attachers to rely on loading studies included in the utilities' cyclical pole inspection reports rather than making the attacher do its own loading study, but other utilities do not. NCTA asserts that “[w]here such studies have been conducted, pole owners should be required to use that existing analysis rather than forcing a new attacher to incur the expense and delay of performing a duplicative and redundant study.” We decline to adopt this proposal. To the extent pole inspection reports include loading studies, attachers will have access to such information under the new rule we adopt in this final rule. (In cases where the loading study is not part of the inspection report, we decline, at this time, to codify a requirement for a utility to provide an attacher with a loading study as NCTA requests, but strongly encourage utilities to provide such loading studies when reasonably requested and readily available.) We will not, however, dictate when a utility can require a loading study, as NCTA seems to request, as we continue to believe, consistent with the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, that such studies “can be important tools to address safety, reliability, and engineering concerns.” (NCTA also asserts that a utility should have to bear the cost of a loading analysis where none has been performed but the utility believes a study is necessary before allowing an attachment, and that utilities can instead recover the costs of such loading studies through annual attachment rental fees. As that issue relates to cost recovery rather than transparency, we do not address it here.) 34. Age, Height, Class, and Condition of Poles. We reject attachers' request to require utilities to provide data on the age, height, class, and condition of their poles, or the last date the pole was inspected, make-ready was conducted, or a pre-existing violation on the pole was fixed. The utilities state that they either routinely provide this type of data with make-ready estimates, that the information is accessible to attachers through their own pre-application surveys or when the attacher accompanies the utility on a make-ready survey, or that they do not track this data. To the extent utilities' pole inspection reports include such data, that information would be covered by the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule and available to attachers upon request after an application is filed. Given that attachers can often obtain this information either from the utility or through their own survey or inspection, we reject any additional requirement for pole condition information beyond that which we have already outlined, but we strongly encourage utilities to share this information when it is readily available and collected in the normal course of business. 35. Existing Attachments and Pending Attachment Requests. We also decline to require that utilities provide data on the number of attachments or pending attachment applications for each pole covered by an attachment request. As the utilities explain, pole networks are dynamic and pole conditions frequently change. We find that the record sufficiently demonstrates that attempting to keep a fully up-to-date list of the number of attachments or pending applications on every pole would be a very time-consuming and expensive proposition. (Some attachers also sought to require pole owners to produce information on utility transformers or voltage on a pole or the total attachment load on the pole, but utilities either deny the usefulness of such information or state that they do not track it.) Even if some utilities track this information, requiring them to compile the information and send it across a vast and shifting landscape of attachers and poles—and to keep that information updated—would be a considerable burden. Although attachers assert there would be some value in having this kind of data earlier, even if it is old, we find that, as with the proposed pole attachment database discussed above, any purported benefit is outweighed by the potentially considerable cost utilities would have to bear in complying with such a requirement. 36. Data Supporting Make-Ready Estimates. With regard to the request that utilities be required to provide more detailed supporting data in their make-ready estimates, particularly regarding the utility's costs, we again decline to adopt any new requirement. Current rules already require utilities to provide supporting cost details in their make-ready cost estimates. If utilities are not complying with those rules, attachers remain free to invoke the complaint process or seek mediation. 37. Financial Records Regarding Poles. We decline attachers' requests to create new obligations requiring utilities to provide additional financial data regarding poles and attachment rates, including outside plant records (also called continuing property records) as part of the rules being adopted at this time. (Continuing Property Records are “[o]utside plant records relevant to poles,” typically “including a detailed accounting of the units associated with accounts used to report pole plant investment such as vintage height, class, etc.” Several attachers repeated these requests in later submissions, asking that utilities be required to disclose a range of information related to rates, rather than only the information the utility relied on in computing rates, to enable attachers to, for example, evaluate the validity of utilities' reliance on presumptions in the pole attachment rate formula.) Attachers argue that such a duty for utilities to provide information will reduce rate disputes or make them easier to resolve. Our focus here, however, is on deployment rather than rate disputes. Further, § 1.1404(e) and (f) of the Commission's rules—which we do not alter here—already require that pole owners, upon request of a cable operator or telecommunications carrier, provide the information they have relied on in calculating rates, and information an attacher seeks to rely on in establishing that a rate, term, or condition is not just and reasonable. The Commission has explained that “it is critical that attaching entities have this information well in advance of executive-level discussions to ensure that those pre-complaint negotiations have a chance of success.” (NCTA contends the former language in § 1.1404(g) was inadvertently removed in a prior rule revision. We disagree. The Commission sought to “streamline the rules in [§ ] 1.1404” by removing the long list of information specified in that section but did not narrow the scope of information utilities must provide attachers. In light of these existing rules and the policy stated by the Commission in 2018, to the extent an attacher has a specific dispute with a utility, it already can seek and obtain certain financial data from the utility, prior to filing a complaint, under current rules.) We therefore decline to impose a new, broader duty to disclose additional financial records related to poles. (USTelecom, whose members include both pole owners and attachers, argues that imposing a duty beyond current law “would not accelerate broadband deployment or reduce its costs, but would likely have the opposite effect by diverting broadband providers' capital away from their own broadband deployment to subsidize their competitors' builds.”) IV. Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis 38. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) was incorporated into the Second FNPRM. The Commission sought written public comment on the proposals in the Second FNPRM, including comment on the IRFA. No comments were filed addressing the IRFA. This present Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) conforms to the RFA. A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Fourth Report and Order 39. In the Fourth Report and Order, the Commission adopts rules and policy changes that will make the pole attachment process faster and cheaper, particularly when poles have to be replaced during broadband buildouts. In the last five years, the Commission took significant steps in setting standards for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing telecommunications companies with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. B. Summary of Significant Issues Raised by Public Comments in Response to the IRFA 40. There were no comments raised that specifically addressed the proposed rules and policies presented in the Second FNPRM IRFA. Nonetheless, the Commission considered the potential impact of the rules proposed in the IRFA on small entities and took steps where appropriate and feasible to reduce the compliance burden for small entities in order to reduce the economic impact of the rules enacted herein on such entities. C. Response to Comments by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration 41. Pursuant to the Small Business Jobs Act of 2010, which amended the RFA, the Commission is required to respond to any comments filed by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA), and to provide a detailed statement of any change made to the proposed rules as a result of those comments. The Chief Counsel did not file any comments in response to the proposed rules in this proceeding. D. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which Rules Will Apply 42. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that may be affected by the rules adopted herein. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small-business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business applies unless an agency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activities of the agency and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .) A “small-business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA. 43. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small entities that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatory flexibility analysis, according to data from the SBA's Office of Advocacy, in general a small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 44. Next, the type of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the population of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less according to the registration and tax data for exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 45. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand. U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the United States. (The Census of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal, and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (2,105 county, 18,729 municipal, and 16,097 town and township governments) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments (independent school districts) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the special purpose governments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the number of special purpose governments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 46. Wired Broadband internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 47. Additionally, according to Commission data on internet access services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include asymmetric and symmetric digital subscriber line (aDSL and sDSL) (collectively xDSL), Other Wireline, Cable Modem, and fiber to the premises (FTTP).) Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 48. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as voice over internet protocol (VoIP) service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of All Other Telecommunications. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firms in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 49. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide a variety of services, such as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not included in this industry.) 50. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 51. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 52. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers ( Incumbent LECs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 53. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 54. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 55. Operator Service Providers ( OSPs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of operator services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 56. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 57. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of the Wireless internet Service Providers Association (WISPA), including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfers or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 58. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) . This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 59. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to part 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 60. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in the designated entities section in part 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The Designated entities sections in subparts D through Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 61. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 62. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 64. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 65. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 67. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 68. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 69. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under part 90 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commission estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 70. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 71. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including frequency division duplex (FDD)- and time division duplex (TDD)-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 72. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 73. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 74. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806 MHz bands. Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 75. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 76. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800 MHz air-ground spectrum. 77. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 78. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 79. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 80. 3650-3700 MHz band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700 MHz band fall in the Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 81. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are small internet Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the 3650-3700 MHz band. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 82. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of title 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.) They also include the Upper Microwave Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 83. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 84. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 85. Broadband Radio Service and Educational Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of the Broadband Radio Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatory purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmission depends upon the transmitter power, the type of receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 86. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 87. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auction of BRS licenses, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the winning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 88. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million for the preceding five (5) years, and a very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 89. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications. Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 90. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of transmitting telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 91. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers may not provide telephone service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 92. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscription or fee basis. The broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 93. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the purpose of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. Of these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 94. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is a cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000. For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a small cable operator. (In the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determined that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 95. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer. This industry group is categorized based on fuel source and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control, and Electric Power Distribution. 96. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. E. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements 97. In the Fourth Report and Order, we (1) establish a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) adopt a new requirement that utilities retain copies of their cyclical pole inspection reports and, upon request, provide prospective pole attachers with the information included in the most recent report regarding the poles affected by a prospective attacher's submitted attachment application. Our new requirements are minimally burdensome as they merely require (1) parties seeking to have complaints placed on the Accelerated Docket to submit a form to the newly-established Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT) that will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket, and (2) utilities to provide information they already collect in the normal course of business for cyclical pole inspection reports. 98. Parties seeking both RBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. This initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b). Additionally, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. We amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe. The record indicates that utilities already prepare such reports, making this new transparency requirement consistent with the existing practices. For these reasons, we believe that small and other utilities will not have an issue complying with the new obligation. 99. The Commission does not have sufficient information on the record to determine whether small entities will be required to hire professionals to comply with its decisions, or to quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the Fourth Report and Order. While some small entities may have some unique burdens, the Commission anticipates the requirements for pole attachment disputes and data collection by utility companies will have minimal cost implications because many of these obligations are consistent with existing Commission regulations to file disputes, and existing practices by utilities to prepare pole inspection reports. F. Steps Taken To Minimize Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 100. The RFA requires an agency to provide a description of the steps the agency has taken to minimize the significant economic impact on small entities including a statement of the factual, policy, and legal reasons for selecting the alternative adopted in the final rule and why each one of the other significant alternatives to the rule considered by the agency which affect the impact on small entities was rejected. 101. The Commission took steps to minimize significant economic impact on small entities and considered alternatives to new rules and processes adopted in the Fourth Report and Order that may impact small entities. By establishing the RBAT, we addressed commenters' request that we expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes, the delay of which may impose greater harm on small providers. In considering alternatives to the rules, we declined to adopt certain proposals that are burdensome, unnecessary, or would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. For example, we agreed with utilities that they should not be required to gather and provide pole-related data for matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. We also declined to require that small and other utilities provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting an application because this data would be speculative and the build-out may never occur. Additionally, we declined to establish a single pole-information database or require each utility to create a database of all its poles. Similar to our prior decisions on this matter, the record demonstrates that the burdens and costs of creating such a database are considerable given that many utilities own or jointly own poles. Further, the scope of pole data attachers seek exists in information from pole inspection reports we require small and other utility companies to provide in the Fourth Report and Order. We considered and declined to require small and other utilities to provide financial data regarding poles and attachment rates because this would be overly burdensome for the utilities. We also considered but declined to require small and other utilities to provide information on the age or condition of the poles, or number of current or pending attachment applications for each pole because it could be burdensome, unnecessary, or unfeasible in some cases, and would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. Finally, we declined to require small and other utilities to provide more detailed supporting data in their make ready estimates because the current complaint process should be sufficient to address a potential dispute on this matter. G. Report to Congress 102. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order, including the FRFA, in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act. In addition, the Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the FRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. A copy of the Fourth Report and Order (or summaries thereof) will also be published in the Federal Register . V. Procedural Matters 103. Regulatory Flexibility Act. The Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), requires that an agency prepare a regulatory flexibility analysis for notice and comment rulemakings, unless the agency certifies that the rule will not, if promulgated, have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small entities. Accordingly, we have prepared a Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) concerning the possible impact of the rule changes contained in the Fourth Report and Order on small entities. The FRFA is set forth herein. 104. Congressional Review Act. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). 105. Paperwork Reduction Act. This document may contain proposed new or modified information collection requirements subject to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (PRA), Public Law 104-13. Specifically, the rules adopted in 47 CFR 1.1411, 1.1415, and 1.1416 may require new or modified information collections. All such new or modified information collection requirements will be submitted to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) for review under Section 3507(d) of the PRA. OMB, the general public, and other Federal agencies will be invited to comment on the new or modified information collection requirements contained in this proceeding. In addition, we note that pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we previously sought specific comment on how the Commission might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In this document, we describe several steps we have taken to minimize the information collection burdens on small entities. VI. Ordering Clauses 106. Accordingly, it is ordered that pursuant to sections 1-4, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 151-54, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r), the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling hereby is adopted and part 1 of the Commission's Rules, 47 CFR part 1, is amended as set forth in Appendix A of the Fourth Report and Order. 107. It is further ordered that the Fourth Report and Order shall become effective 30 days after publication in the Federal Register , except that the amendments to § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415, 47 CFR 1.1411(c)(4), 1.1415, which may contain new or modified information collection requirements, will not become effective until the Office of Management and Budget completes review of any information collection requirements that the Wireline Competition Bureau determines is required under the Paperwork Reduction Act. The Commission directs the Wireline Competition Bureau to announce the effective date for § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415 by subsequent Public Notice. 108. It is further ordered that, pursuant to 47 CFR 1.4(b)(1), the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Fourth Report and Order will commence on the date that a summary of the Fourth Report and Order is published in the Federal Register , and the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Declaratory Ruling will commence upon release of the Declaratory Ruling. 109. It is further ordered that the Commission's Office of the Secretary, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis and Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. 110. It is further ordered that the Office of the Managing Director, Performance Evaluation and Records Management, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act, see 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Marlene Dortch, Secretary. Final Rules The Federal Communications Commission amends part 1 of title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Delayed indefinitely, amend § 1.1411 by adding paragraph (c)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (c) * * * (4) Information from cyclical pole inspection reports. (i) Upon submitting its attachment application, a new attacher may request in writing that the utility provide, as to the poles covered by such attachment application, the information regarding those poles contained in the utility's most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or, if available, any more recent pole inspection report. The utility shall provide the new attacher with this information within ten (10) business days of the new attacher's written request. (ii) Utilities shall retain copies of their pole inspection reports, in the form they are created, until a superseding report covering the poles included in the attachment application is completed. (iii) For purposes of this section, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of a routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (iv) After requesting and receiving pole inspection information from a utility related to poles covered by its application, a new attacher may amend an attachment application at any time until the utility grants or denies the original application. (A) A utility that receives such an amended attachment application may, at its option, restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) for responding to the application and conducting the survey. (B) A utility electing to restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) shall notify the attacher of its intent to do so within five (5) business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day (or 60th day, if applicable) after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. § 1.1415 [Redesignated as § 1.1416] 3. Redesignate § 1.1415 as § 1.1416. 4. Delayed indefinitely, add a new § 1.1415 to read as follows: § 1.1415 Dispute resolution procedures for pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment; functions of the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team. (a) An inter-bureau team, to be known as the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT), shall be established to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that are alleged to impede or delay the deployment of broadband facilities and to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. The RBAT shall consist of one or more staff from the Enforcement Bureau and one or more staff from the Wireline Competition Bureau. Senior staff in the Enforcement Bureau and the Wireline Competition Bureau shall designate individuals from their respective bureaus to serve on the RBAT. (b) The RBAT shall prioritize the resolution of a pole attachment dispute that a party seeking RBAT review has alleged is impeding or delaying an active broadband deployment project, including where the party is also seeking placement of the dispute on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. The RBAT shall gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and shall have discretion to decide the most appropriate process for resolving the dispute, including recommending an RBAT-supervised mediation process pursuant to § 1.737, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other appropriate action. Although RBAT-supervised mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. The RBAT may recommend to the parties use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined in paragraph (e) of this section, that a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket. (c) A party to a pole attachment dispute, prior to filing a formal complaint, may request RBAT review and assessment of such dispute if the party believes the dispute is impeding or delaying the deployment of a broadband facilities project. The party seeking RBAT review and assessment shall first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) by phone and in writing of the request. The MDRD Chief shall direct the requesting party to the location of a form on the MDRD website—FCC-5653, Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. (d) Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT shall schedule a meeting, through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that the party seeking RBAT review or any other party or parties to the dispute provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. In the initial meeting, or shortly thereafter, the RBAT shall provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including RBAT-supervised mediation pursuant to § 1.737; use of the Accelerated Docket; and/or any other appropriate action. If the parties seek RBAT-supervised mediation, the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, may waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (e) The RBAT shall have discretion to decide whether a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, involving a dispute that a party alleges to be impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. In determining whether to accept a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT shall base its decision on a totality of the factors from the following list: (1) Whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act, or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; (2) Whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities or services, especially in an unserved or underserved area; (3) Whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; (4) The number and complexity of the issues in dispute; (5) Whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; (6) The likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; (7) The likely need for expert testimony; (8) The ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; (9) Whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; (10) Willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and (11) Such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding.
Unchanged

List of Subjects

<LSTSUB> Click to expand
Modified

I. Introduction

<HD1> +2 / -167 words
1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever federalFederal investment in broadband, as well as other federalFederal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the necessary infrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved and underserved areas in the United States. Key to these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission has taken significant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in states that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the District of Columbia have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently only apply to cable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission's pole attachment rules to broadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. Additionally, as a follow-on to the pole replacement clarification issued in the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, in the Declaratory Ruling below we provide further clarification regarding cost causation when a pole must be replaced for any reason other than lacking capacity to support a new attachment. Specifically, we clarify that a “red tagged” pole is one that the utility has identified as needing replacement for any reason other than the pole's lack of capacity, and we provide additional examples of when a pole replacement is not “necessitated solely” as a result of a third party's attachment or modification request— i.e., when a pole already requires replacement at the time the new attacher makes a request. We also clarify the obligation to share easement information and the applicable timelines for the processing of attachment requests for 3,000 or more poles. Finally, we seek comment in the FNPRM on ways to further facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable faster broadband deployment.
Modified

II. Background

<HD1> +53 / -13 words
3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the pole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act, the Commission determined that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the benefiting party must assume the cost of the modification. (Section 224(h) states that “[w]heneverwhenever the owner of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the costs incurred by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible.”accessible. Section 224(i) states that “[a]nan entity that obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the costs of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including the owner of such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).”)right-of-way).) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order,Order (83 FR 31659-02, July 9, 2018), the Commission reiterated that application of the cost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the Internetinternet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of pole replacements. Specifically, NCTA asked the Commission to declare that: (1) utilities must share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, section§ 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with pole replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband services to Americans in unserved areas. 5. In the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that the record developed in response to the NCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking ( Second FNPRM ) (87 FR 25181;25181-01, Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that thisthe Fourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second Further Notice,FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not caused (necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the costs of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extent to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costs of pole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second Further NoticeFNPRM also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potential attachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expand use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachment complaints and the specific criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. (To the extent that the Fourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.)
Modified

V. Procedural Matters

<HD1> +223 / -444 words
⚠️ Substantially rewritten (93% changed) - showing side-by-side
Proposed
77. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act, the Commission has prepared an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities of the policies and rules addressed in this FNPRM. Written public comments are requested on the IRFA. Comments must be filed by the deadlines for comments on the FNPRM indicated on the first page of this document and must have a separate and distinct heading designating them as responses to the IRFA. The Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference Information Center, will send a copy of this FNPRM, including the IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the SBA. 78. Paperwork Reduction Act. The FNPRM contains proposed new information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the general public and OMB to comment on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. 79. Ex Parte Presentations—Permit-But-Disclose. The proceeding this FNPRM initiates shall be treated as a “permit-but-disclose” proceeding in accordance with the Commission's ex parte rules. Persons making ex parte presentations must file a copy of any written presentation or a memorandum summarizing any oral presentation within two business days after the presentation (unless a different deadline applicable to the Sunshine period applies). Persons making oral ex parte presentations are reminded that memoranda summarizing the presentation must (1) list all persons attending or otherwise participating in the meeting at which the ex parte presentation was made, and (2) summarize all data presented and arguments made during the presentation. If the presentation consisted in whole or in part of the presentation of data or arguments already reflected in the presenter's written comments, memoranda or other filings in the proceeding, the presenter may provide citations to such data or arguments in his or her prior comments, memoranda, or other filings (specifying the relevant page and/or paragraph numbers where such data or arguments can be found) in lieu of summarizing them in the memorandum. Documents shown or given to Commission staff during ex parte meetings are deemed to be written ex parte presentations and must be filed consistent with § 1.1206(b) of the Commission's rules. In proceedings governed by § 1.49(f) of the Commission's rules or for which the Commission has made available a method of electronic filing, written ex parte presentations and memoranda summarizing oral ex parte presentations, and all attachments thereto, must be filed through the electronic comment filing system available for that proceeding, and must be filed in their native format ( e.g., .doc, .xml, .ppt, searchable .pdf). Participants in this proceeding should familiarize themselves with the Commission's ex parte rules.
Final
103. Regulatory Flexibility Act. The Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), requires that an agency prepare a regulatory flexibility analysis for notice and comment rulemakings, unless the agency certifies that the rule will not, if promulgated, have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small entities. Accordingly, we have prepared a Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) concerning the possible impact of the rule changes contained in the Fourth Report and Order on small entities. The FRFA is set forth herein. 104. Congressional Review Act. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). 105. Paperwork Reduction Act. This document may contain proposed new or modified information collection requirements subject to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (PRA), Public Law 104-13. Specifically, the rules adopted in 47 CFR 1.1411, 1.1415, and 1.1416 may require new or modified information collections. All such new or modified information collection requirements will be submitted to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) for review under Section 3507(d) of the PRA. OMB, the general public, and other Federal agencies will be invited to comment on the new or modified information collection requirements contained in this proceeding. In addition, we note that pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we previously sought specific comment on how the Commission might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In this document, we describe several steps we have taken to minimize the information collection burdens on small entities.
Modified

VI. Ordering Clauses

<HD1> +290 / -50 words
⚠️ Substantially rewritten (83% changed) - showing side-by-side
Proposed
80. Accordingly, it is ordered , pursuant to sections 4(i), 4(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), and 403 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 154(i), 154(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), 403, that this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking is adopted . 81. It is further ordered that the Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference information Center, shall send a copy of this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, including the Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA), to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Katura Jackson, Federal Register Liaison Officer.
Final
106. Accordingly, it is ordered that pursuant to sections 1-4, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 151-54, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r), the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling hereby is adopted and part 1 of the Commission's Rules, 47 CFR part 1, is amended as set forth in Appendix A of the Fourth Report and Order. 107. It is further ordered that the Fourth Report and Order shall become effective 30 days after publication in the Federal Register , except that the amendments to § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415, 47 CFR 1.1411(c)(4), 1.1415, which may contain new or modified information collection requirements, will not become effective until the Office of Management and Budget completes review of any information collection requirements that the Wireline Competition Bureau determines is required under the Paperwork Reduction Act. The Commission directs the Wireline Competition Bureau to announce the effective date for § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415 by subsequent Public Notice. 108. It is further ordered that, pursuant to 47 CFR 1.4(b)(1), the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Fourth Report and Order will commence on the date that a summary of the Fourth Report and Order is published in the Federal Register , and the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Declaratory Ruling will commence upon release of the Declaratory Ruling. 109. It is further ordered that the Commission's Office of the Secretary, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis and Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. 110. It is further ordered that the Office of the Managing Director, Performance Evaluation and Records Management, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act, see 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Marlene Dortch, Secretary.
↻ Reorganized

IV. Initial Regulatory Flexibility AnalysisIV. Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis

82% similar (+2417/-2216)
15.38. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) was incorporated into the Second FNPRM. The Commission hassought prepared this Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities by the policies and rules proposed in this FNPRM. The Commission requests written public comment on the proposals in the Second FNPRM, including comment on the IRFA. No comments onwere this IRFA. Comments must be identified as responses to the IRFA and must be filed byaddressing the deadlinesIRFA. forThis commentspresent providedFinal onRegulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) conforms to the firstRFA. page of the FNPRM. The Commission will send a copy of the FNPRM, including this IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA). In addition, the FNPRM and IRFA (or summaries thereof) will be published in the Federal Register . A. Need for, and Objectives of, the ProposedFourth RulesReport 16. In order to continue the Commission's work combating illegal calls, this FNPRM proposes to impose several obligations on gateway providers. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to require gateway providers to authenticate and employOrder robocall39. mitigationIn techniques on all SIP calls that they allow into the UnitedFourth StatesReport from abroad that display a U.S. number in the caller ID field. The FNPRM also proposes that gateway providers should engage in robocall mitigation by (1) responding to all traceback requests from the Commission, law enforcement, and Order, the industry traceback consortium within 24 hours; (2) complying with mandatory call blocking requirements; (3) complying with enhanced know-your-customer obligations; (4) complying with a general duty to mitigate illegal robocalls; and (5) filing a certification in the Robocall Mitigation Database. The Commission alsoadopts proposesrules one blocking requirement for intermediate and terminatingpolicy providerschanges immediately downstream from the gateway provider, which would require those providers to block all traffic from a gateway provider that failswill make the pole attachment process faster and cheaper, particularly when poles have to blockbe orreplaced effectivelyduring mitigatebroadband illegalbuildouts. trafficIn when notified of such traffic by the Commission.last B.five Legalyears, Basis 17. The FNPRM proposes to find authority largely under those provisions through which it has previously adopted rules to stem the tideCommission took significant steps in setting standards for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of robocallsattaching inbroadband itsequipment Call Blocking and Call Authentication Orders. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to findutility authoritypoles, underwith sections 201(a) and (b), 202(a), 251(e), the Truthbackstop in Caller ID Act, the TRACED Act and, where appropriate, ancillary authority. The FNPRM also proposes to conclude that, to the extent any of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt rules we(1) seekestablishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to adoptexpedite haveresolution an effect on foreign service providers, that effect is only indirect and therefore consistent with the Commission's authority. The FNPRM solicits comment on these proposals. C. Description and Estimate of such disputes, and (2) providing telecommunications companies with information about the Numberstatus of Small Entities to Which the Proposedutility Rulespoles Willthey Applyplan 18. The RFA directs agencies to provideuse a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that may be affected by the proposed rules, if adopted. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as havingthey map out their broadband builds. B. Summary of Significant Issues Raised by Public Comments in Response to the sameIRFA meaning40. asThere were no comments raised that specifically addressed the termsproposed “smallrules business,” “small organization,” and “smallpolicies governmentalpresented jurisdiction.”in In addition, the termSecond “smallFNPRM business”IRFA. hasNonetheless, the sameCommission meaningconsidered as the termpotential “smallimpact business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business applies “unless an agency, after consultation with the Officerules proposed in the IRFA on small entities and took steps where appropriate and feasible to reduce the compliance burden for small entities in order to reduce the economic impact of Advocacy of the rules enacted herein on such entities. C. Response to Comments by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration 41. Pursuant to the Small Business Jobs Act of 2010, which amended the RFA, the Commission is required to respond to any comments filed by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA), and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to provide a detailed statement of any change made to the activitiesproposed rules as a result of those comments. The Chief Counsel did not file any comments in response to the agencyproposed rules in this proceeding. D. Description and publishesEstimate such definition(s) in the Federal Register .”) A “small business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA.Number 19. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of Small Entities to Which Rules Will Apply 42. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that couldmay be directly affected by the rules adopted herein. First,The whileRFA theregenerally aredefines industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatoryterm flexibility“small analysis,entity” accordingas to data from the Small Business Administration's (SBA) Office of Advocacy, in general a small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the Unitedsame States,meaning which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 20. Next, the type of small entity described as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small-business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a “small organization” is generally “any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field.” The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exemptbusiness organizations.applies (Theunless IRSan benchmarkagency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activities of the agency and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .) A “small-business concern” is similarone towhich: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the populationSBA. 43. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmentalentities jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the IRSregulatory flexibility analysis, according to data doesfrom not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S.SBA's reportingOffice revenues of $50,000Advocacy, orin lessgeneral accordinga small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 44. Next, the registrationtype of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and taxoperated dataand is not dominant in its field. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The(The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O.benchmark BMFis similar to the population of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for businesses for the tax year 20202020, withthere revenuewere approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less thanaccording or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continentalregistration U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii.tax This data does not include information for Puertoexempt Rico.)organizations 21.available Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as “governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand.” U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017IRS. Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the United States. (The CensusIRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number,description therewas wereextracted 36,931from generalthe purposeIRS governmentsE.O. (county,BMF (theredata werefor 2,105businesses countyfor governmentsthe tax year 2020 with populationsrevenue less than 50,000. This category does not include subcounty (municipal and township) governments) municipal, and town or townshipequal (thereto were$50,000 18,729for municipalRegion 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and 16,097Great townLakes Areas (175,272), and townshipRegion 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 45. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as governments with populations less than 50,000)) with populations of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than 50,000fifty thousand. U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and 12,040 special purpose governments—independent school districts (there were 12,040 independent school districts with enrollment populations less than 50,000) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the special purpose governments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the United States. (The Census of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal, and town or township) and special purpose governments category.)(special Accordingly,districts based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (2,105 county, 18,729 municipal, and 16,097 town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and township governments) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments (independent school districts) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the number of special purpose governments—independentgovernments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts withis enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 22. Wired Broadband Internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scopespecial purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the Internetcategory Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired“small broadbandgovernmental internetjurisdictions.” access(This servicetotal includeis variousderived types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internetsum atof information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission'snumber rules.of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the number of special purpose governments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 46. Wired Broadband internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet servicesaccess fallservice include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 23.47. Additionally, according to Commission data on internet access services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include aDSL,asymmetric sDSL, Other Wireline, Cable Modem and FTTP).symmetric digital subscriber line (aDSL and sDSL) (collectively xDSL), Other Wireline, Cable Modem, and fiber to the premises (FTTP).) Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 24.48. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as VoIPvoice over internet protocol (VoIP) service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of All Other Telecommunications. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firms in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 25.49. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide a variety of services, such as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not included in this industry.) 26.50. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 27.51. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 28.52. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (Incumbent( LECs).Incumbent LECs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 29.53. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 30.54. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 31.55. Operator Service Providers (OSPs).( OSPs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of operator services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 32.56. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 33.57. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of WISPA, including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the Wireless internet Service Providers Association (WISPA), including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfers or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 34.58. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite).Satellite) . This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 35.59. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to Partpart 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ((except except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) ThusThus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 36.60. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in the designated entities section in Partpart 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The “DesignatedDesignated entities”entities sections in subparts D-QD through Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 37.61. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 38.62. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) ThusThus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 39.63. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 40.64. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 41.65. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 42.66. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) ThusThus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 43.67. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on aan FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 44.68. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 45.69. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under Partpart 90 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commission estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 46.70. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on aan FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 47.71. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD-frequency division duplex (FDD)- and TDD-basedtime division duplex (TDD)-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ((except except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) ThusThus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 48.72. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on aan FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 49.73. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 50.74. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806 MHz bands. Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 51.75. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on aan FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 52.76. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800 MHz air-ground spectrum. 53.77. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ((except except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) ThusThus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 54.78. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on aan FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 55.79. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 56.80. 3650-3700 MHz Band.band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700 MHz band fall in the Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ((except except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) ThusThus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 57.81. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are small internet Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the 3650-3700 MHz band. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 58.82. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of Titletitle 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.) They also include the Upper Microwave Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ((except except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) ThusThus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 59.83. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 60.84. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 61.85. Broadband Radio Service and Educational Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of the Broadband Radio Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatory purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmission depends upon the transmitter power, the type of receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 62.86. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) ThusThus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 63.87. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auction of BRS licenses, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the winning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 64.88. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million for the preceding five (5) years, and a very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 65.89. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms “primarilyprimarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications.”telecommunications. Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 66.90. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of transmitting telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g.e.g., dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 67.91. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers may not provide telephone service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 68.92. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscription or fee basis. The broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 69.93. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the purpose of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. Of these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 70.94. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is “aa cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000.”$250,000,000. For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a small cable operator. (In the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determined that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 71.95. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of “establishments,establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer.”consumer. This industry group is categorized based on fuel source and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and ControlControl, and Electric Power Distribution. 72.96. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, TransmissionTransmission, and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. D.E. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements 97. In the Fourth Report and Order, we (1) establish a new process for Small Entities 73. In the FNPRM,Commission's wereview seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-readyassessment to enable quicker broadband deployment. Some of thesepole proposalsattachment maydisputes impose new or additional reporting or recordkeeping and/or other compliance obligations on small entities. Specifically, we seek comment on a proposal that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) adopt a new requirement that utilities shouldretain copies of their cyclical pole inspection reports and, upon request, provide prospective pole attachers with the information included in the most recent report regarding the poles affected by a prospective attacher's submitted attachment application. Our new requirements are minimally burdensome as they merely require (1) parties seeking to have ancomplaints additionalplaced 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. We also seek comment on whether NCTA's proposal to add additional time to the existingAccelerated applicationDocket timelines for larger orders and prohibit utilities from limiting the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application, to avoidsubmit thesea timelines,form to the newly-established Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT) that will facilitateelicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket, and (2) utilities to provide information they already collect in the normal course of business for cyclical pole attachmentinspection processreports. for98. suchParties orders.seeking Additionally,both weRBAT seekreview commentand assessment of a dispute that a party contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on whether the CommissionAccelerated shouldDocket, createthe additionalparty make-readymust timelinefirst tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles. We also consider whether to require that a utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the surveyChief withinof the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. This initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required 45-day period, making self-help available for the estimate process, which is not contemplated under current§ Commission1.736(b). rules.Additionally, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. We alsoamend seekour commentpole onattachment whether attachers face any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke self-help options, which allows attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready andrules for self-help when the utility fails to meet the Commission's deadlines. This information will help to inform whether potential rule changes are necessary. At this time, the Commission cannot quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the approaches discussed in the FNPRM, or whether any compliance requirements will require small entities to hire professionals; however, the Commission requests information on the costs and benefits of the approaches discussed, such as the availability of qualified contractors and other workforce constraints that may impact the speed and cost of deployment for utilities and attachers. E. Steps Taken To Minimize the Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 74. The RFA requires an agency to describeprovide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any significant,intervening, specificallyperiodic smallreports business,created alternativesbefore that it has considered in reaching its proposed approach, which may include the followingnext fourcyclical alternativesinspection, (among others): “(1) the establishment of differing compliance or reporting requirements or timetables that take into account the resources available to small entities; (2) the clarification, consolidation, or simplification of compliance and reporting requirements under the rule for such small entities; (3) the usepoles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of performance rather than design standards; and (4) an exemption from coverage of the rule,affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or anytimeframe. part thereof, for such small entities.” 75. The FNPRMrecord seeksindicates comment on whether the Commission should revise its rules to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment, including a tentative conclusion that utilities shouldalready prepare such reports, making this new transparency requirement consistent with the existing practices. For these reasons, we believe that small and other utilities will not have an additionalissue 90complying dayswith for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. The Commission's objective in requesting this information is to determine whether it can and should establish clear standards for when and how attachers and utilities must share the costs of a pole replacement precipitated by a new attachmentobligation. request.99. AmongThe Commission does not have sufficient information on the alternativesrecord consideredto indetermine the FNPRM is whether small entities will be required to hire professionals to comply with its decisions, or to quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the Fourth Report and Order. While some small entities may have some unique burdens, the Commission shouldanticipates allow additional time for the requirements for pole attachment disputes and data collection by utility companies will have minimal cost implications because many of these obligations are consistent with existing largerCommission orderregulations timelines where our current rules require that utilities negotiate timing in good faith. We seek comment on whether requiring that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period would allow the attacher to electfile self-helpdisputes, for the survey sooner. In the alternative, we inquire whether such expansion of time is reasonable for utilities if numerous permits are submitted around the same time or contractor workload is heavy. We also consider whether attachers are choosing to find their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and forexisting self-helppractices when utilities fail to meet the Commission's deadlines. Similarly, we request information on whether or not utilities designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher. We also seek comment on how the Commission can help resolve situations where labor shortages may hinder utilities from meeting deadlines to respondprepare pole inspection reports. F. Steps Taken To Minimize Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 100. The RFA requires an agency to attachers.provide Thea Commissiondescription also seeks comment on and will consider the relative costs and benefits of any such revisions to its rules. Information submitted in response to these requests for comment will enable the Commissionsteps to evaluate the agency has taken to minimize the significant economic impact that revising its pole attachment rules would have on smallersmall entities.entities F.including Federala Rulesstatement Thatof May Duplicate, Overlap, or Conflict With the Proposedfactual, Rulespolicy, 76.and None.legal reasons for selecting the alternative adopted in the final rule and why each one of the other significant alternatives to the rule considered by the agency which affect the impact on small entities was rejected. 101. The Commission took steps to minimize significant economic impact on small entities and considered alternatives to new rules and processes adopted in the Fourth Report and Order that may impact small entities. By establishing the RBAT, we addressed commenters' request that we expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes, the delay of which may impose greater harm on small providers. In considering alternatives to the rules, we declined to adopt certain proposals that are burdensome, unnecessary, or would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. For example, we agreed with utilities that they should not be required to gather and provide pole-related data for matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. We also declined to require that small and other utilities provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting an application because this data would be speculative and the build-out may never occur. Additionally, we declined to establish a single pole-information database or require each utility to create a database of all its poles. Similar to our prior decisions on this matter, the record demonstrates that the burdens and costs of creating such a database are considerable given that many utilities own or jointly own poles. Further, the scope of pole data attachers seek exists in information from pole inspection reports we require small and other utility companies to provide in the Fourth Report and Order. We considered and declined to require small and other utilities to provide financial data regarding poles and attachment rates because this would be overly burdensome for the utilities. We also considered but declined to require small and other utilities to provide information on the age or condition of the poles, or number of current or pending attachment applications for each pole because it could be burdensome, unnecessary, or unfeasible in some cases, and would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. Finally, we declined to require small and other utilities to provide more detailed supporting data in their make ready estimates because the current complaint process should be sufficient to address a potential dispute on this matter. G. Report to Congress 102. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order, including the FRFA, in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act. In addition, the Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the FRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. A copy of the Fourth Report and Order (or summaries thereof) will also be published in the Federal Register .
Added

III. Report and Order

<HD1> +8694 words
7. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt measures to expedite resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment. Specifically, we (1) establish an agency-wide rapid response team to provide coordinated review and assessment of such pole attachment disputes and to recommend effective dispute resolution procedures, and (2) adopt specific criteria to guide that team when considering whether a complaint (or portion thereof) should be included on the Enforcement Bureau's Accelerated Docket. We also require utilities to provide information regarding pole conditions and scheduled replacements to the extent that information is contained in cyclical pole inspection reports that utilities already create and maintain in the ordinary course of their business, or in pole inspection reports created between cyclical reports. (Both pole attachers and utilities made several other proposals, not addressed herein, regarding the process for pole attachments and replacements and ways they believe the process could be improved to reduce disputes and promote broadband deployment.) A. Accelerating Resolution of Pole Attachment Disputes That Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment 8. We amend our rules to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment by establishing a Commission intra-agency rapid response team—called the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT)—to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. (We codify these amendments in part 1, subpart J, of the Commission's rules ( i.e., Pole Attachment Complaint Procedures) by redesignating current § 1.1415 as § 1.1416 and adding a new § 1.1415. These rule amendments apply only to disputes involving pole attachments of a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service and do not apply to disputes involving pole attachments of a broadband-only internet service provider. They also do not apply to disputes involving poles that are owned or controlled by a railroad, the Federal Government, a state (including a political subdivision thereof such as a municipality), or a cooperative association, or where the poles at issue are located in a state, or the District of Columbia, that has certified to the Commission that it regulates the rates, terms, and conditions of pole attachments in that state or jurisdiction pursuant to 47 U.S.C. 224(c). Should we adopt the proposal set forth in the Open internet NPRM (88 FR 76048-01, Nov. 3, 2023) to reclassify broadband-only internet service as a telecommunications service, section 224 would once again apply to broadband-only internet service providers deployments.) At the outset, we emphasize that we expect all parties to comply with the Commission's pole attachment rules and to negotiate in good faith to craft solutions that suit the needs of attachers and utilities to facilitate deployment projects. We recognize, however, that in some instances disagreements arise as to the conduct of one or multiple parties, and we encourage parties in those instances to avail themselves of the Commission's dispute resolution processes to both facilitate the resolution of disputes and, when necessary, use the formal adjudication process to develop precedent upon which parties can rely to settle future potential disputes. In this document, we amend our rules to create the RBAT in an effort to make the Commission's pole attachment dispute resolution process more responsive and adaptable with the goal of facilitating deployment. 9. The RBAT will be charged with expediting the resolution of these disputes by swiftly engaging key stakeholders, gathering relevant information, distilling issues in dispute, and recommending to the parties, where appropriate, an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a complaint (or portion of a complaint) on the Accelerated Docket based on consideration of specified criteria, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. (The Schools, Health &amp; Libraries Broadband (SHLB) Coalition suggests that creation of the RBAT may result in a needless administrative step and associated delay, and suggests that the RBAT, if created, be vested with authority to resolve disputes without going through the additional step of a complaint process. We decline to adopt this approach. The RBAT is designed to assist parties in resolving their dispute expeditiously without need for litigation. But if parties are unable to reach a resolution, either through mediation or other means, our existing complaint procedures, including the Accelerated Docket, ensure a means of adjudicating the dispute in accordance with due process.) 10. In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on NCTA's proposed adoption of policies “favoring the placement of pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas on the [Commission's] Accelerated Docket[,]” a mechanism that requires the Commission to quickly resolve disputes between parties within 60 days. (Under § 1.736(a), complaint proceedings on the Accelerated Docket must be concluded within 60 days, and are therefore subject to shorter pleading deadlines and other modifications to the procedural rules that govern formal complaint proceedings.) It also sought comment on measures that would expedite the resolution of “pole replacement[ ]” disputes and on criteria for determining more generally “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” Based on broad record support among attachers for further streamlining our processes as applied to disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we conclude that the targeted measures outlined below are warranted and will advance the Commission's goal of timely broadband deployment. 11. As the Commission observed in the Second FNPRM, our current rules provide a 180-day deadline (or shot clock) for final action on pole access complaints where a cable television system operator or provider of telecommunications service claims that it has been denied access to a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way owned or controlled by a utility. (For purposes of this subsection, the Commission has defined a “pole access complaint” as a complaint “filed by a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service that alleges a complete denial of access to a utility pole[,]” and clarified that “[the] term [pole access complaint] does not encompass a complaint alleging that a utility is imposing unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions that amount to a denial of pole access.”) In addition, a 270-day shot clock currently applies to final action on all other pole attachment complaints ( i.e., those alleging unjust or unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions of attachment). Several commenters assert that these timeframes are commercially unreasonable for attachers seeking to deploy broadband networks, particularly in rural or unserved areas. (Charter asserts that the “[m]ere existence ” of a path allowing more routine use of the Accelerated Docket “could help broadband providers resolve disagreements without the need for Commission intervention” by “provid[ing] attachers facing government-imposed construction deadlines with a more credible option of seeking relief, thereby reducing the one-sided leverage held by pole owners today.”) NCTA submits that the need for expedited procedures has gained greater urgency recently for “providers . . . receiving government funds to build out broadband under deadlines that afford no time for a lengthy complaint process.” A number of commenters therefore propose more routine use of the Accelerated Docket, with its 60-day shot clock, especially for pole attachment disputes involving time-sensitive deployments in unserved areas. Several commenters also contend that the current Accelerated Docket rule does not sufficiently motivate utilities to comply with their obligation to allow pole access because it is unclear when Commission staff, in the exercise of their discretion under § 1.736(d) of our rules, will include a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Crown Castle asserts that “without certainty that the complaint will be promptly resolved, the decision to bring a formal complaint to the Commission involves business decisions about whether the resolution will be too late to meaningfully assist the deployment.” On the other hand, other commenters argue that sweeping or widespread imposition of the Accelerated Docket rule, with its highly compressed timeframes, could raise potential fairness and due process concerns given the complexity of the issues raised in most pole attachment cases. (Other commenters question the necessity of new rules (1) due to the relative infrequency of requests for Accelerated Docket treatment, see, e.g., Edison Electric Institute Comments at 54 (challenging the need to further expedite “denial of access” complaints based on “[t]he complete absence of [such] complaints before the Commission”), or (2) due to the lack of evidence of instances where dilatory actions of utilities have caused broadband grant recipients to lose access to such funding.) After considering these competing concerns, we find that the adoption of targeted dispute resolution reforms, as set forth below, will address the expressed need for quicker resolution of pole attachment disputes that may impede or delay broadband deployment while ensuring sufficient fairness and due process for all involved parties. 12. Disputes Subject to RBAT Review and Assessment Procedures. The Commission asked in the Second FNPRM whether any new dispute resolution procedures should be “limited to complaints that raise only discrete pole access issues” and do not require consideration of “whether a rate, term, or condition of attachment is unjust or unreasonable.” To address the need for timely broadband deployment, particularly in unserved or underserved areas, we apply the new procedures discussed below to any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities. To provide greater clarity regarding when such a dispute would be eligible for placement on the Accelerated Docket, we also adopt below specific criteria that will guide the RBAT in determining when a dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition. In light of the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, disputes raising relatively straightforward legal and evidentiary issues, as determined based on the RBAT's review of these criteria, are more likely to be considered appropriate for placement on the Accelerated Docket. 13. Although the record reflects differing views regarding which disputes should be subject to new dispute resolution procedures, a significant proportion of commenters seeking such reforms ask that we limit the focus of any new procedures to disputes that are interfering with active broadband deployment plans or projects. We adopt this suggestion based on our conclusion that focusing on pole attachment disputes that impede or delay a provider's ability to deploy new broadband facilities will align with, and advance most directly, the goal of timely broadband deployment. (Several utilities argue that across-the-board application of dispute resolution reforms to an entire category of disputes would fail to account for complexities in individual cases. But such comments assume that Accelerated Docket treatment would automatically apply to all disputes within the identified category. In fact, under the reforms we adopt herein, such disputes will receive individualized assessment and review (by the RBAT) based on a totality of factors analysis.) 14. RBAT Review and Assessment of Disputes that Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment. To expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay an active broadband deployment project, we amend our rules to establish the RBAT, which will be comprised of Enforcement Bureau and Wireline Competition Bureau staff with expertise in the Commission's pole attachment rules and orders. We charge the RBAT with prioritizing the resolution of any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities (including where the party is also seeking placement of the matter on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736). In performing this role, the RBAT will gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and provide guidance and advice on the most effective means of resolving the parties' dispute. Where appropriate, the RBAT will recommend to the parties an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a complaint, or portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. The RBAT will recommend use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined below, that a complaint, or portion thereof, is suitable for accelerated disposition. (The RBAT may recommend placement of a dispute on the Accelerated Docket in the exercise of the discretion afforded Commission staff “to decide whether a complaint, or portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket.” A prospective complainant may accept the recommendation, with or without the consent of the other party or parties to the dispute, by moving forward with the agreed upon schedule and process established by Commission staff in the case.) To request RBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party to the dispute contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. (The RBAT review and assessment process will be available only to attachers and pole owners that are direct parties to such dispute (including any legal counsel retained to represent a party in that specific dispute). For parties seeking both RBAT review and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, this initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b).) The MDRD Chief will direct the party to a streamlined form on the MDRD website—Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. The form will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute, and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket. (The form will require a submitting party to provide: information identifying the parties and the services they offer; the section(s) of the Act or Commission rule or order alleged to have been violated; a brief description of the parties' dispute (including how it relates to broadband deployment plans or projects, whether such plans or projects are subject to a deadline under a government funded broadband program, whether the dispute arises in an unserved or underserved area, what harm is occurring or is likely to occur as a result of the situation, and what aspects of the dispute require immediate redress); the specific relief sought; whether the parties have entered into a non-disclosure agreement; the steps the party has taken to resolve the matter with other parties to the dispute; a statement as to whether the parties are amenable to mediation; and a statement indicating whether the party intends to seek inclusion of the matter on the Accelerated Docket. The form also will elicit information relevant to whether the dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition including, for example, the number of poles in question, the number and complexity of claims at issue, and the likely need for discovery or expert affidavits. The RBAT may request additional information from the submitting party if more information is necessary to determine a course of action.) 15. Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT will schedule a meeting through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that one or both parties provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. (NCTA suggests that we specify the information the respondent will be required to provide. We find this approach impracticable, as the information required in a response will depend on the complainant's allegations. We employ a more flexible approach that enables the RBAT to request relevant information and documentation from either party, as appropriate.) In the initial meeting, or in a meeting shortly thereafter, the RBAT will provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including staff-supervised mediation, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other action. (Because mediation will be a prominent feature of the RBAT review, we decline to adopt INCOMPAS's proposal that the 180-day deadline for resolution of a pole access complaint be triggered by the submission of the request for RBAT Review and Assessment. If mediation succeeds, there will be no need for a complaint. If it does not, the filing of a complaint will commence review period deadlines under the relevant Commission rules.) To that end, the RBAT will attempt to distill the issues in dispute and identify issues that are most impacting a party's broadband deployment plans. For example, the RBAT may encourage parties to focus on the resolution of one or more threshold issues, or what appears to be the most urgent issue(s), if it finds that doing so may help the parties to narrow their dispute. Likewise, the RBAT may encourage parties, where appropriate, to streamline the proceeding by agreeing to focus on “test cases”— i.e., disputes over specific poles that the parties agree are representative of disputes over multiple poles. In this way, deciding the issue as to the test case will have broader impact. 16. Should the RBAT recommend staff-supervised mediation, it shall be conducted pursuant to § 1.737 of the Commission's rules. Because § 1.737 generally contemplates that mediations will be conducted by MDRD staff, we delegate authority to the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, to modify or waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (Waiver is appropriate for “good cause,” and is warranted only if both: (1) special circumstances warrant a deviation from the general rule, and (2) such deviation will serve the public interest.) The strict confidentiality requirements will apply to all written and oral communications prepared or made for purposes of a mediation pursuant to § 1.737(f), including mediation submissions, offers of compromise, and staff and party comments made during the course of the mediation (Mediation Communications). Through mediation, the RBAT will make every effort to settle or narrow the issues in dispute as expeditiously as possible. 17. In the event that the parties are unable to settle their dispute, and a prospective complainant seeks placement of its complaint on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT will decide whether the complaint or a portion of the complaint is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of the criteria set forth below. Because of the very short deadlines that apply in Accelerated Docket proceedings, Commission staff historically have carefully evaluated whether a particular dispute is appropriate for expedited disposition, resulting in the placement of relatively few cases on the Accelerated Docket. In evaluating whether a matter is suitable for expedited disposition, the RBAT must similarly be mindful of the due process concerns raised by commenters, such as the Pennsylvania PUC, regarding affording parties “the opportunity to be heard at a meaningful time and in a meaningful manner.” In addition, although mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under rule 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Finally, if the RBAT determines that a matter is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT is authorized to send appropriate matters to the Commission's Administrative Law Judge (ALJ) for an expedited “minitrial” ( i.e., trial-type hearing) as contemplated by § 1.736(h). 18. Criteria for Placement on the Accelerated Docket. The Commission sought comment in the Second FNPRM on the adoption of specific criteria to guide Commission staff on “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” (For example, the Commission asked if its policy should “take into account the number and complexity of the claims, need for discovery, need for expert affidavits, and ability of the parties to stipulate to facts.”) Based on the requests of several commenters for greater predictability surrounding Accelerated Docket placement decisions with respect to pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we establish criteria to aid the RBAT in making determinations regarding the placement of such matters on the Accelerated Docket. 19. In light of the strict time constraints that apply in Accelerated Docket cases, we decline to adopt a “presumption,” as suggested by some commenters, that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket and, instead, entrust the RBAT with this decision based on the criteria specified below. (There is no basis for us to conclude that a dispute will be suitable for the Accelerated Docket simply based on the number of poles at issue as INCOMPAS's proposal suggests.) We agree with Dominion/Xcel that a “one-size-fits-all policy” would not adequately take into account the complexity of the issues in particular complaint proceedings. We also agree with the Coalition of Concerned Utilities that the 60-day timeframe will be “too short” to resolve certain pole attachment disputes, and thus “blanket imposition” of the Accelerated Docket requirements would be unreasonable and “raise due process concerns” for utilities. Although Charter argues that the presumption could simply be rebutted if a particular complaint raises unusually complex issues, we reject this argument based on our experience with formal complaints. In particular, when parties oppose the operation of a presumption in a particular proceeding, these rebuttal efforts often lead to significant additional argumentation attendant to resolving the specific question of the presumption, thus unnecessarily complicating resolution of the underlying issues in dispute. To avoid the potential for unnecessary rounds of argumentation and to ensure that complaints accepted onto the Accelerated Docket are suitable for decision under the relevant time constraints, we reject proposals to create a presumption that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket. 20. After careful consideration of the record on this issue, we direct the RBAT to consider the factors below in determining whether to accept onto the Accelerated Docket a pole attachment dispute that is allegedly impeding or delaying a broadband facilities deployment plan or project. The RBAT shall determine eligibility for placement on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of these factors: • whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; • whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities, especially in an unserved or underserved area; • whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; • the number and complexity of the issues in dispute; • whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; • the likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; • the likely need for expert testimony; • the ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; • whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; • the willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and • such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding. The first three of these criteria will help the RBAT to ensure appropriate use of the Commission's processes in support of the goal of timely broadband deployment and ensure that the parties have made a sufficient effort to resolve or, at a minimum, identify and narrow the disputed issues prior to filing a complaint. The remaining criteria will help the RBAT to determine if a dispute is suitable for decision under the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, and also require it to consider whether including a matter on the Accelerated Docket would ensure the prompt and fair adjudication of the dispute. (A responding party's refusal to stipulate to facts or cooperate in the exchange of relevant information bearing on disputed facts will not itself defeat a request for acceptance of a pole attachment dispute on the Accelerated Docket.) By specifying the criteria that the RBAT must consider in making its determination, we hope to make the Accelerated Docket a more useful tool in the resolution of eligible pole attachment disputes and provide prospective complainants with greater certainty regarding which complaints will be deemed suitable for expedited resolution. 21. We will closely monitor the impact of the dispute resolution procedures adopted here and consider additional streamlining measures should we observe ongoing delay tactics or other unreasonable practices that hinder the ability of broadband providers to deploy new services or facilities. (Two commenters suggest narrowing the list of criteria to avoid delay tactics by utilities. We find that eliminating criteria is unnecessary, however, as these criteria are holistic in nature, and no single one will be dispositive. Moreover, the RBAT is not required to credulously accept assertions from either party.) B. Increasing Transparency by Providing Attachers With Utility Pole Inspection Information 22. We next amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe (if any). (The record demonstrates that utilities conduct inspections of their poles on a multi-year cycle, either as part of normal network management or as required by state law.) In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on requiring utilities to provide more information about their poles to prospective attachers, in order to reduce disputes. (Utilities did not challenge the Commission's general jurisdiction to require them to provide relevant information to prospective attachers, and ACA Connects asserted the Commission has such authority.) Several attaching entities indicated pole inspection information would be helpful in planning deployments. (This requirement applies only in the states that have not certified that they regulate pole attachments themselves. To the extent such reports may include sensitive or confidential network or financial information, we rely upon utilities and attachers to address the issue through redactions or non-disclosure agreements.) We believe this new requirement strikes a reasonable balance between additional transparency for prospective attachers and ensuring the utilities' expenditure of resources is no greater than necessary. As discussed below, however, we also strongly encourage utilities to voluntarily share pole-related information that is reasonably available and that they track in the normal course of business, both before and after receiving attachment applications, and we intend to continue to monitor the record in this proceeding to determine if additional information sharing mandates may be required. 23. For the purposes of the new transparency requirement, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle, while a periodic pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the inspection of any of its poles outside the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (Electric Utilities request that the new rule not require utilities to provide periodic pole inspection reports, arguing that the requirement will create confusion and invite disputes. We find that the definition of “periodic inspection report” is sufficiently clear and note that no other utility commenters claimed the definition was vague or otherwise problematic. We further find that this requirement is an important aspect of the rule. Cyclical pole inspections typically occur several years apart, sometimes by ten or more years, and periodic inspection reports will contain more recent inspection information. We also decline the Electric Utilities' request to seek further comment on transparency requirements in lieu of adopting a rule on report sharing. We find that the record is sufficient to adopt an information sharing rule at this time and the rule we adopt strikes an appropriate balance between providing attachers with additional helpful information while not being overly resource-intensive for utilities. Indeed, several utility parties are supportive of the new transparency requirement.) We note that this new transparency requirement is consistent with the existing practices of certain utilities to prepare such reports. When asking for information about the status of a utility's poles for a planned buildout, the attacher must submit its information request no earlier than contemporaneously with an attachment application. The utility will have ten business days to respond to the request. (The utility has the same amount of time to determine whether the application is complete.) This should allow sufficient time before the make-ready survey for the attacher to revise or amend its application as may be appropriate based on the information it receives. (“The term make-ready means the modification or replacement of a utility pole, or of the lines or equipment on the utility pole, to accommodate additional facilities on the utility pole.” After receiving a complete attachment application, a utility conducts a make-ready survey and provides a make-ready cost estimate to the attacher. During the survey stage, “the pole owner conducts an engineering study to determine whether and where attachment is feasible, and what make-ready is required.”) 24. We recognize that in some situations, the information provided by utilities in their pole inspection reports may lead new attachers to amend their attachment applications. In order to ensure that utilities have enough time to review such applications, in situations when the utility receives an amended attachment application prior to granting or denying the original application, we will allow a utility the option to restart the 45-day period for responding to the application on the merits and conducting the survey. (The option to restart the time period also applies to larger orders that are subject to a 60-day timeframe.) Utilities electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period in this manner must notify the attacher within 5 business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. (For example, if an amended application was filed on the 42nd day following the utility's determination that the original application was complete, the utility would only have three days, not five business days, to notify the attacher that the utility is restarting the 45-day application review and survey.) To avoid unnecessary delays and costs, we strongly encourage attachers to notify utilities of their intent to file, and to file, amended applications as quickly as possible after receiving a pole inspection report from the utility. We also encourage utilities to exercise their right to restart this 45-day period judiciously and to review amended applications as quickly as possible even when electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period. (Several parties asked that we require an automatic restart of the 45-day response period or start the application process over in such instances by requiring an attacher to file a new application rather than an amended application. We decline these requests and find that the procedures we adopt are sufficiently tailored to account for the needs of utilities to review amended applications while not needlessly slowing deployment. Under the new rule, utilities will always have the option of electing to restart the 45-day review period; but given that there may be instances where an amendment is minor or otherwise will not require a restart of the 45-day period, we find it reasonable to require utilities to actually review an amended application to determine whether a restart is necessary given the specific circumstances.) Regardless of whether the utility elects to restart the 45-day response period, any additional survey costs necessitated by the amended application, such as a second survey after a survey for the original application has been completed, will be borne by the new attacher consistent with the new attacher's obligation to pay for make-ready costs associated with its application. 25. In connection with the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule, we also require utilities to retain copies, in whatever form they were created, of any such cyclical or periodic pole inspection reports they conduct in the normal course of business, until such time as the utility completes a superseding cyclical pole inspection report covering the poles included in the attachment application. In creating these obligations, we reiterate that utilities are required to provide only the information they already possess and track in the normal course of conducting pole inspections at the time of the attacher's request for data. The new rule does not require utilities to collect or create new information for the sole purpose of responding to such requests or to provide all information they may possess on the affected poles outside their pole inspection reports. (Edison Electric Institute contends that “access to critical infrastructure by non-electric company personnel presents serious safety, reliability, and homeland security hazards,” and that “existing law bars electric companies from releasing some information about system infrastructure.” It does not directly assert, however, that utilities would be barred from disclosing information contained in a pole inspection report. And it notes that most of the information is “already available” and an attacher “can readily learn the condition” of poles by driving a proposed route. Although we do not know exactly what information utilities may include in their pole inspection reports, we anticipate that legal constraints on disclosure of critical infrastructure information can be addressed, to the extent that they arise, by the parties involved via appropriate redactions or use of a non-disclosure agreement. We do not intend our new rule to override laws precluding disclosure of certain information, but expect utilities to work in good faith to provide potential attachers with the information they can from their pole inspection reports.) We find this new limited requirement achieves a balance between a potential attacher's need for more information about the poles that it plans to use as part of a broadband buildout and the utility's interest in minimizing the burden of mandatory disclosures. 26. We conclude that requiring utilities to provide information about the state of their poles to attachers will help improve the attachment process and potentially reduce disputes. In particular, having such information early in the process will help attachers evaluate whether they want to adjust their plans in light of the poles' conditions. At the same time, we recognize the potential burdens on utilities that would result from imposing a mandate to compile extensive information for every pole attachment application the utility receives. We seek to strike a balance by (1) requiring utilities to provide such information as they already collect in the normal course of inspections done as part of managing their network and poles (which the record indicates include which poles have been identified as needing replacement), rather than having to gather information solely for attachers or from many disparate sources, and (2) tying requests for such information to poles contained in submitted attachment applications. 27. In striking this balance, we agree with utilities that they should not be required by rule to gather and provide extensive pole-related data for every pole attachment application about matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. The record shows that many utilities do not create specific maintenance or replacement schedules for poles. It also shows that some utilities provide a range of pole-related information—including whether any poles are red-tagged or otherwise identified for replacement—when responding to an attachment application after conducting a make-ready survey. We agree with the commenters asserting that a pre-application survey conducted by the attacher, or a make-ready survey conducted by a utility in response to a specific attachment application, are often the best ways to ensure the potential attacher and utility have up-to- date, accurate information on the current state of poles. (We recognize that a visual inspection may not necessarily provide all the information an attacher might desire. This supports requiring disclosure of pole inspection reports.) We also agree with Dominion/Xcel, however, that the information contained in general survey or pole inspection reports can be useful to prospective attachers in some cases. Therefore, although we decline at this time to impose broader duties on utilities to collect and provide more expansive pole-related information for every attachment application, we will require utilities to furnish already available information in pole inspection reports concerning specific poles upon request at the time an attachment application is submitted. (Some commenters support the balance struck in this new rule. Electric Utilities, on the other hand, request that any consideration of a rule to require disclosure of pole inspection reports be deferred to a further notice of proposed rulemaking.) 28. While we do not at this time codify a requirement for utilities to provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting a pole attachment application, as requested by some commenters, we understand that often utilities share pole information with attachers prior to the application process, particularly information not easily attained through visual inspection. We strongly encourage this pre-application collaboration and cooperation because there is value for both utilities and attachers in having the best available pole information to inform deployment forecasts and attachment requests. Although we recognize that some potential attachers could benefit from obtaining pole-related information prior to submitting an application, we decline to impose this requirement on utilities given that the underlying requests for information would be for preliminary build-out plans that may substantially change. Furthermore, establishing a pre-application duty for utilities would require the Commission to create a new process and timeline prior to the codified make-ready process, which has always been triggered by the filing of an application. Finally, given that prospective attachers also have the ability to gather information about poles on prospective routes through pre-application surveys and visual inspection of poles on a prospective route, we find that imposing an additional pre-application requirement on utilities is not justified at this time. (Through such visual inspection, an attacher typically can learn the age of a pole, whether it has been red tagged, when the most recent inspection occurred, and a pole's load and potential suitability for more attachments. As noted above, however, we also recognize that visual inspection alone may not always provide all the information an attacher may desire, thus supporting the new requirement that utilities provide attachers with cyclical and periodic pole inspection reports. For example, with regard to utility tags on poles, Crown Castle asserts that “not all poles are appropriately tagged or inspection tags may be missing, damaged, or unable to be interpreted without additional information from the pole owner.”) 29. We reject requests at this time that we mandate a variety of other disclosure requirements on utilities. (Several attachers requested that utilities be required to provide any relevant requested information about their poles that they retain in the ordinary course of business, which would go beyond pole inspection reports. While we encourage parties to voluntarily share information, we find that codifying a broad disclosure requirement for all information collected in the ordinary course of business could force utilities to expend significant resources to gather such information and could lead to additional disputes and complaints related to information sharing.) We agree with utilities that the most relevant information for purposes of an attachment request is whether the poles at issue are available or due for replacement. (Some utilities suspect that the purpose of many of the attachers' requests is only to provide ammunition for rate disputes with utilities, not to improve the attachment process.) For example, some attacher commenters ask the Commission to require utilities to create accessible databases (or establish a single database for all utilities) with information on things like pole age, condition, repair/replacement schedules, location, number of attachments, standard rate structure, and applicable engineering standards. They also ask that utilities be required to provide data from the owners' periodic load analyses for poles; the age, height, class, and condition of poles; and data on current attachments and pending attachment requests for relevant poles. And ACA Connects asks the Commission to require utilities to provide more details in their make-ready cost estimates to support those costs. For the reasons discussed below, we decline to adopt these requirements. With respect to certain financial information requested by some commenters regarding pole rates, we do not adopt new disclosure requirements, but make clear that some financial information is already required to be disclosed under our rules. 30. Before addressing these specific proposals, however, we note some attachers express concern that, by adopting a requirement to provide pole inspection reports but not codifying additional mandates, we may be inadvertently discouraging utilities from voluntarily providing pole-related information before receiving an attachment application, which at least some utilities do today. We stress that our actions in this final rule should not be understood to undermine or disincentivize such voluntary sharing. To the contrary, voluntary sharing of pole-related information is consistent with longstanding Commission policy favoring transparency in the pole attachment context, and we strongly encourage both utilities and attachers to collaborate and voluntarily share information with each other whenever such information is reasonably available and obtained in the normal course of business. (We reject claims that our actions here are inconsistent with the policy of promoting transparency, as Crown Castle asserts. To the contrary, this Order increases transparency by adopting a new disclosure requirement.) Voluntary sharing can be helpful to both attachers and utilities to promote more efficient buildouts by informing deployment forecasts, allowing more accurate applications, and decreasing disputes or delays after an application is submitted. (Such voluntary sharing also is helpful because “not all pole owners conduct these denominated inspections,” yet attachers still could benefit from receiving the kind of information that would have been included in such inspections had they occurred.) Having better and more accurate information prior to attachment applications will likely reduce make-ready costs, the frequency and severity of disputes, and improve the efficiency of the attachment process—benefiting both attachers and utilities. We will continue to monitor the record in this proceeding and will take further action if it becomes clear that voluntary information sharing arrangements are insufficiently promoting broadband deployment. 31. Database(s) of Pole Information. We decline (1) to require that each utility create an accessible database with an array of data on all its poles, or (2) to establish a single pole-information database for all utilities. The Commission rejected previous calls for a similar database requirement in 2011, in part based on the large burden outweighing potential benefits. We find that the 2011 reasoning remains valid. In particular, we find that the record continues to demonstrate that the burdens and costs of creating such a database (if a utility does not already have one) would be very large given the number of poles many utilities own or jointly own and the scope of pole data attachers seek, and that the alleged benefits of requiring such a database would be reduced by the new requirement we adopt in this final rule that utilities provide information from their pole inspection reports. Commenters contend that requiring such a pole-related database would help speed deployment by helping attachers plan better and avoid intermediate steps for both attachers and utilities. Utilities, however, assert that due to the very large number of poles they own or co-own and the ever-changing nature of pole networks, maintaining a fully up-to-date database would be almost impossible, and so the information for any given group of poles in a database could easily be out of date when the attacher needs it. One utility also submits that granting access to such voluminous pole information could result in the submission of incorrect applications. We find that the benefits of a database requirement remain speculative at best given how difficult it would be to keep such a large database up-to-date. 32. While some commenters argue that circumstances have changed since 2011, with some state utility commissions adopting database requirements for pole-related information, the states cited by these commenters are limited and, in any event, all regulate pole attachments at the state level pursuant to section 224(c) of the Act. As a result, compliance with pre-existing state-specific database requirements would likely offer little, if any, relief in complying with a newly imposed Federal database requirement. To the extent any utilities may have developed pole-related databases in states that do not regulate pole attachments, the record indicates that attachers are interested in specific types of data, not merely access to existing databases, which would require utilities to absorb additional, and potentially substantial, costs of either adding specific types of new data or searching databases for specific data of interest to attachers. (ACA Connects asserts that many utilities have developed pole-related databases since 2011, but it does not identify utilities that have done so in states that do not regulate pole attachments.) Again, we agree with the utilities that the value of such database information to attachers is highly unlikely to outweigh those burdens, as the information may well be out of date by the time an attacher submits an attachment request. Moreover, any added benefit would likely be minimal in light of the new information-sharing requirement we adopt in this final rule. 33. Loading Studies. According to NCTA, some utilities provide and allow attachers to rely on loading studies included in the utilities' cyclical pole inspection reports rather than making the attacher do its own loading study, but other utilities do not. NCTA asserts that “[w]here such studies have been conducted, pole owners should be required to use that existing analysis rather than forcing a new attacher to incur the expense and delay of performing a duplicative and redundant study.” We decline to adopt this proposal. To the extent pole inspection reports include loading studies, attachers will have access to such information under the new rule we adopt in this final rule. (In cases where the loading study is not part of the inspection report, we decline, at this time, to codify a requirement for a utility to provide an attacher with a loading study as NCTA requests, but strongly encourage utilities to provide such loading studies when reasonably requested and readily available.) We will not, however, dictate when a utility can require a loading study, as NCTA seems to request, as we continue to believe, consistent with the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, that such studies “can be important tools to address safety, reliability, and engineering concerns.” (NCTA also asserts that a utility should have to bear the cost of a loading analysis where none has been performed but the utility believes a study is necessary before allowing an attachment, and that utilities can instead recover the costs of such loading studies through annual attachment rental fees. As that issue relates to cost recovery rather than transparency, we do not address it here.) 34. Age, Height, Class, and Condition of Poles. We reject attachers' request to require utilities to provide data on the age, height, class, and condition of their poles, or the last date the pole was inspected, make-ready was conducted, or a pre-existing violation on the pole was fixed. The utilities state that they either routinely provide this type of data with make-ready estimates, that the information is accessible to attachers through their own pre-application surveys or when the attacher accompanies the utility on a make-ready survey, or that they do not track this data. To the extent utilities' pole inspection reports include such data, that information would be covered by the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule and available to attachers upon request after an application is filed. Given that attachers can often obtain this information either from the utility or through their own survey or inspection, we reject any additional requirement for pole condition information beyond that which we have already outlined, but we strongly encourage utilities to share this information when it is readily available and collected in the normal course of business. 35. Existing Attachments and Pending Attachment Requests. We also decline to require that utilities provide data on the number of attachments or pending attachment applications for each pole covered by an attachment request. As the utilities explain, pole networks are dynamic and pole conditions frequently change. We find that the record sufficiently demonstrates that attempting to keep a fully up-to-date list of the number of attachments or pending applications on every pole would be a very time-consuming and expensive proposition. (Some attachers also sought to require pole owners to produce information on utility transformers or voltage on a pole or the total attachment load on the pole, but utilities either deny the usefulness of such information or state that they do not track it.) Even if some utilities track this information, requiring them to compile the information and send it across a vast and shifting landscape of attachers and poles—and to keep that information updated—would be a considerable burden. Although attachers assert there would be some value in having this kind of data earlier, even if it is old, we find that, as with the proposed pole attachment database discussed above, any purported benefit is outweighed by the potentially considerable cost utilities would have to bear in complying with such a requirement. 36. Data Supporting Make-Ready Estimates. With regard to the request that utilities be required to provide more detailed supporting data in their make-ready estimates, particularly regarding the utility's costs, we again decline to adopt any new requirement. Current rules already require utilities to provide supporting cost details in their make-ready cost estimates. If utilities are not complying with those rules, attachers remain free to invoke the complaint process or seek mediation. 37. Financial Records Regarding Poles. We decline attachers' requests to create new obligations requiring utilities to provide additional financial data regarding poles and attachment rates, including outside plant records (also called continuing property records) as part of the rules being adopted at this time. (Continuing Property Records are “[o]utside plant records relevant to poles,” typically “including a detailed accounting of the units associated with accounts used to report pole plant investment such as vintage height, class, etc.” Several attachers repeated these requests in later submissions, asking that utilities be required to disclose a range of information related to rates, rather than only the information the utility relied on in computing rates, to enable attachers to, for example, evaluate the validity of utilities' reliance on presumptions in the pole attachment rate formula.) Attachers argue that such a duty for utilities to provide information will reduce rate disputes or make them easier to resolve. Our focus here, however, is on deployment rather than rate disputes. Further, § 1.1404(e) and (f) of the Commission's rules—which we do not alter here—already require that pole owners, upon request of a cable operator or telecommunications carrier, provide the information they have relied on in calculating rates, and information an attacher seeks to rely on in establishing that a rate, term, or condition is not just and reasonable. The Commission has explained that “it is critical that attaching entities have this information well in advance of executive-level discussions to ensure that those pre-complaint negotiations have a chance of success.” (NCTA contends the former language in § 1.1404(g) was inadvertently removed in a prior rule revision. We disagree. The Commission sought to “streamline the rules in [§ ] 1.1404” by removing the long list of information specified in that section but did not narrow the scope of information utilities must provide attachers. In light of these existing rules and the policy stated by the Commission in 2018, to the extent an attacher has a specific dispute with a utility, it already can seek and obtain certain financial data from the utility, prior to filing a complaint, under current rules.) We therefore decline to impose a new, broader duty to disclose additional financial records related to poles. (USTelecom, whose members include both pole owners and attachers, argues that imposing a duty beyond current law “would not accelerate broadband deployment or reduce its costs, but would likely have the opposite effect by diverting broadband providers' capital away from their own broadband deployment to subsidize their competitors' builds.”)
Added

Final Rules

<HD1> +1219 words
The Federal Communications Commission amends part 1 of title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Delayed indefinitely, amend § 1.1411 by adding paragraph (c)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (c) * * * (4) Information from cyclical pole inspection reports. (i) Upon submitting its attachment application, a new attacher may request in writing that the utility provide, as to the poles covered by such attachment application, the information regarding those poles contained in the utility's most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or, if available, any more recent pole inspection report. The utility shall provide the new attacher with this information within ten (10) business days of the new attacher's written request. (ii) Utilities shall retain copies of their pole inspection reports, in the form they are created, until a superseding report covering the poles included in the attachment application is completed. (iii) For purposes of this section, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of a routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (iv) After requesting and receiving pole inspection information from a utility related to poles covered by its application, a new attacher may amend an attachment application at any time until the utility grants or denies the original application. (A) A utility that receives such an amended attachment application may, at its option, restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) for responding to the application and conducting the survey. (B) A utility electing to restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) shall notify the attacher of its intent to do so within five (5) business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day (or 60th day, if applicable) after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. § 1.1415 [Redesignated as § 1.1416] 3. Redesignate § 1.1415 as § 1.1416. 4. Delayed indefinitely, add a new § 1.1415 to read as follows: § 1.1415 Dispute resolution procedures for pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment; functions of the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team. (a) An inter-bureau team, to be known as the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT), shall be established to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that are alleged to impede or delay the deployment of broadband facilities and to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. The RBAT shall consist of one or more staff from the Enforcement Bureau and one or more staff from the Wireline Competition Bureau. Senior staff in the Enforcement Bureau and the Wireline Competition Bureau shall designate individuals from their respective bureaus to serve on the RBAT. (b) The RBAT shall prioritize the resolution of a pole attachment dispute that a party seeking RBAT review has alleged is impeding or delaying an active broadband deployment project, including where the party is also seeking placement of the dispute on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. The RBAT shall gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and shall have discretion to decide the most appropriate process for resolving the dispute, including recommending an RBAT-supervised mediation process pursuant to § 1.737, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other appropriate action. Although RBAT-supervised mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. The RBAT may recommend to the parties use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined in paragraph (e) of this section, that a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket. (c) A party to a pole attachment dispute, prior to filing a formal complaint, may request RBAT review and assessment of such dispute if the party believes the dispute is impeding or delaying the deployment of a broadband facilities project. The party seeking RBAT review and assessment shall first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) by phone and in writing of the request. The MDRD Chief shall direct the requesting party to the location of a form on the MDRD website—FCC-5653, Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. (d) Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT shall schedule a meeting, through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that the party seeking RBAT review or any other party or parties to the dispute provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. In the initial meeting, or shortly thereafter, the RBAT shall provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including RBAT-supervised mediation pursuant to § 1.737; use of the Accelerated Docket; and/or any other appropriate action. If the parties seek RBAT-supervised mediation, the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, may waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (e) The RBAT shall have discretion to decide whether a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, involving a dispute that a party alleges to be impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. In determining whether to accept a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT shall base its decision on a totality of the factors from the following list: (1) Whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act, or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; (2) Whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities or services, especially in an unserved or underserved area; (3) Whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; (4) The number and complexity of the issues in dispute; (5) Whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; (6) The likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; (7) The likely need for expert testimony; (8) The ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; (9) Whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; (10) Willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and (11) Such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding.
Removed

Addresses

<ADD> -245 words
ADDRESSES: Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's rules, 47 CFR 1.415, 1.419, interested parties may file comments and reply comments on or before the dates indicated in this document. Comments and reply comments may be filed using the Commission's Electronic Comment Filing System (ECFS). See Electronic Filing of Documents in Rulemaking Proceedings, 63 FR 24121 (1998). Interested parties may file comments or reply comments, identified by CG Docket No. 17-59 and WC Docket No. 17-97 by any of the following methods: • Electronic Filers: Comments may be filed electronically by accessing ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs/. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to file by paper must file an original and one copy of each filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and until further notice, the Commission no longer accepts any hand or messenger delivered filings. • Commercial overnight mail (other than U.S. Postal Service Express Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050 Junction Drive, Annapolis Junction, MD 20701. • U.S. Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. In addition to filing comments with the Secretary, a copy of any comments on the Paperwork Reduction Act proposed information collection requirements contained herein should be submitted to the Federal Communications Commission via email to PRA@fcc.gov and to Nicole Ongele, FCC, via email to Nicole.Ongele@fcc.gov.
Removed

Initial Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 Analysis

<HD1> -186 words
This document may contain proposed information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the general public to comment on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. Comments should address: (a) whether the proposed collection of information is necessary for the proper performance of the functions of the Commission, including whether the information shall have practical utility; (b) the accuracy of the Commission's burden estimates; (c) ways to enhance the quality, utility, and clarity of the information collected; (d) ways to minimize the burden of the collection of information on the respondents, including the use of automated collection techniques or other forms of information technology; and (e) way to further reduce the information collection burden on small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees.
Removed

Comment Period and Filing Procedures

<HD1> -218 words
Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's rules, 47 CFR 1.415, 1.419, interested parties may file comments and reply comments on or before the dates indicated on the first page of this document. Comments may be filed using the Commission's Electronic Comment Filing System (ECFS) or by paper. Commenters should refer to WC Docket No. 21-341 when filing in response to this FNPRM. • Electronic Filers: Comments may be filed electronically by accessing ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to file by paper must file an original and one copy of each filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and until further notice, the Commission no longer accepts any hand or messenger delivered filings. • Commercial overnight mail (other than U.S. Postal Service Express Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050 Junction Drive, Annapolis Junction, MD 20701. U.S. Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority Mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. People with Disabilities: To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities (braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at 202-418-0530 (voice), 202-418-0432 (TTY).
Removed

III. Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking

<HD1> -1950 words
7. We recognize that Congress has undertaken a number of initiatives allocating funding to further the deployment of broadband to unserved and underserved areas of the United States. In connection with this funding, broadband providers will have to deploy extensive facilities. This, in turn will require that they file significant numbers of applications seeking to attach these facilities to large numbers of poles. To that end, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable speedier broadband deployment. In seeking comment on these areas, we emphasize that even when there is not a specific Commission rule or policy that governs a particular situation, it is our expectation that parties negotiate in good faith to resolve issues that may arise. 8. Large Orders. We tentatively conclude that we should adopt a defined make-ready timeline for orders that exceed 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state in order to facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications that are submitted in large numbers. We seek comment on this tentative conclusion. Our current make-ready rule requires make-ready in the communications space to be completed within 30 days after the utility sends a notification to all existing attachers on a pole. (The rule provides 90 days from attachments above the communications space.) The 30-day timeframe applies for communications space make-ready requests up to the lesser of 300 poles or 0.5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. This make-ready timeframe is extended 45 extra days for requests up to the lesser of 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. For requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in the state, the Commission's rules require that a utility shall negotiate the timing of the make-ready in good faith. (As we clarify in the Declaratory Ruling accompanying this FNPRM, the first 3,000 poles of these large orders are subject to the timeline set forth in § 1.1411(g)(3).) We tentatively conclude that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state and seek comment on this tentative conclusion. 9. NCTA asserts that our rules do not at present sufficiently address the needs of attachers with these larger requests in the latter category. For example, NCTA asserts that its members have faced situations where the utilities have imposed limits on (1) the number of poles that may be included in any one application, and (2) the number of applications an attacher may submit at a time. NCTA states that these limitations “create problematic delays and jeopardize operators' ability to meet broadband build-out commitments.” At the same time, USTelecom notes the difficulties presented by these very large orders, noting that “make-ready requests involving more than 3,000 poles require flexibility that make-ready timelines cannot provide, given the many outside factors that impact the time required for make-ready for such large orders, including permitting delays, workforce shortages and staffing issues, and the coordination required among all the attachers to the poles.” Given these factors, would 90 additional days over the timeline set forth in § 1.411(e) be sufficient for processing these larger orders? Would some other amount of time be reasonable in all circumstances, or should the Commission create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles? If the Commission were to adopt additional make-ready timeline tiers, what would be an appropriate cut off number of poles for each tier? For instance, should the Commission add an additional number of days for application processing per 3,000 poles? Does the ability to deviate from the timelines specified in § 1.1411 provide utilities with enough flexibility such that imposing a 90 additional day limit would be reasonable? 10. We also seek comment on NCTA's proposal that the Commission revise its rules to prohibit utilities from limiting “the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application so as to avoid the timelines.” How prevalent are situations of the type described by NCTA? Are the reasons underlying utilities' imposition of such limitations as laid out by USTelecom valid, and do other reasons exist for these limitations? Would prohibiting utilities from imposing such limitations in fact speed up the attachment process, or would the same delays still exist for other reasons ( e.g., lack of qualified workers, shortages in materials, etc.) or even, as USTelecom alleges, “ultimately slow—rather than—accelerate deployment”? Specifically, NCTA proposes adding additional time to the existing timelines for these “larger” orders, for which our rules require that utilities negotiate the timing in good faith. Would NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders? Utilities have raised multiple concerns with such requirements. For example, they assert that compliance with expanded timelines may not be possible “if many permit applications by multiple attachers are submitted at approximately the same time, or if the contractor's workload is already heavy.” They also assert that given constraints on workforce availability, utilities would be forced to “choose between providing safe, reliable and affordable power to electric customers (which is mandated by the states), and performing requested pole replacements in an unreasonable and likely unattainable amount of time.” Are these concerns valid? Are there any other reasons why NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders would not work? What are the respective costs and benefits of such potential requirements? What other steps could we take to facilitate the pole attachment process for larger orders? 11. Self-Help and Use of Contractors. Should the Commission consider modifying its self-help rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly? NCTA also asserts that it has faced issues with utilities failing to process attachment applications in a timely manner. NCTA therefore proposes that utilities notify attachers in advance of survey and make-ready deadlines if the utility will be unable to complete a portion of the process. For instance, NCTA proposes that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period so that the attacher can elect self-help for the survey sooner. NCTA also proposes making self-help available for the estimate process, which is not contemplated under current Commission rules. We seek comment on NCTA's proposal. (We decline NCTA's request to adopt rules in the Fourth Report and Order regarding self-help and the use of contractors. We find that these issues would be better addressed after a more comprehensive record is developed.) How prevalent is the issue cited by NCTA? Can utilities feasibly be required to inform attachers within 15 business days of receiving a completed application that they will be unable to conduct a survey, estimate, or make-ready within the required time period? Do sufficient contractors exist that meet the minimum qualification requirements set forth in our rules such that adoption of NCTA's proposal would have the desired effect of speeding broadband deployment? What are the respective costs and benefits of adopting NCTA's proposal? Are there other ways to assist utilities in processing the larger number of applications they will likely receive in the coming months and years based on the funding initiatives in place for accelerating broadband deployment to unserved and underserved areas? 12. We also seek comment on the impact of contractor availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready for surveys and make-ready work. Specifically, do we need to amend the Commission's rules to make it easier for attachers to use their own contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready surveys and make-ready work when there are no contractors available from a utility list? Utility commenters point out the labor constraints in the contractor workforce; given such constraints, do our current rules provide adequate relief to attachers to timely identify and use qualified contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready work? If not, what can the Commission do to change this dynamic? 13. Pursuant to our rules, an attacher can do its own work when (1) completing surveys and make-ready work when the utility misses the deadlines for these activities, or (2) electing to use the one-touch make-ready process. (Note that there are no attacher self-help remedies for pole replacements.) When conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready work, the attacher must use a utility-approved contractor. For self-help surveys and make-ready work that is complex or is above the communications space on a pole, our rules require that a utility make available and keep up to date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors that it authorizes to perform such work. (The term “complex make-ready” means transfers and work within the communications space on a pole that would be reasonably likely to cause a service outage(s) or facility damage, including work such as splicing of any communication attachment or relocation of existing wireless attachments. Any and all wireless activities, including those involving mobile, fixed, and point-to-point wireless communications and wireless internet service providers, are to be considered complex.) Attachers can request to add contactors to the utility's list—provided the contractor meets the minimum qualifications in the Commission's rules—and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. Further, a utility may, but is not required to, keep up-to-date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors it authorizes to perform surveys and simple make-ready. If a utility provides such a list, then the new attacher must choose a contractor from the list to perform the work. Again, attachers may request the addition to the list of any contractor that meets the minimum qualifications in the Commission's rules, and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. However, if the utility does not provide a list of approved contractors for surveys or simple make-ready work or no utility-approved contractor is available within a reasonable time period, then the new attacher may choose its own qualified contractor who meets the Commission's minimum requirements. Utilities retain the right to disqualify such contractor, but disqualification must be based on reasonable safety or reliability concerns related to the contractor's failure to meet any of the Commission's minimum qualifications or to meet the utility's publicly available and commercially reasonable safety or reliability standards. The utility must provide notice of this objection to the attacher and must identify at least one available qualified contractor that the attacher can use instead to perform simple surveys and make-ready work. 14. Given that our current rules allow for attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utility fails to meet the Commission's deadlines (provided such contractors meet the minimum qualifications set forth in our rules), we seek comment on whether attachers are availing themselves of this option. Have attachers faced any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke this option? While a utility cannot be blamed for a lack of available contractors in an area due to workforce constraints, are utilities seeking to use their discretion set forth in the rules to disqualify otherwise-qualified contractors whom attachers may seek to bring in from outside of an area? We note that, at least for surveys and simple make-ready work, our current rules already require the utility to designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher—is this not being done? If not, is it due to labor constraints for which the utility should not be held responsible? In the instance where no qualified contractors are available for a project, how could the Commission help to solve that problem?
Removed

Proposed Rules

<HD1> -111 words
The Federal Communications Commission proposes to amend part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Amend § 1.1411 by revising paragraph (g)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (g) * * * (4) A utility may add 90 days to the make-ready periods described in paragraph (e) of this section to all requests for attachment larger than the lesser of 3000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state.
[Subject] Accelerating Wireline Broadband Deployment by Removing Barriers to Infrastructure Investment [Summary] SUMMARY: In this document, the Federal Communications Commission adopted(Commission) establishes rules creating a Thirdnew Furtherprocess Noticefor the Commission's review and assessment of Proposed Rulemaking (FNPRM) that tentatively concludes that the Commission should take further action to facilitate the processing of pole attachment applicationsdisputes that areimpede submitted in large numbers. It also seeks comment on whether the Commission should modify its self-help rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly. Finally, it seeks comment on the impact of contractor availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touchdelay make-readybroadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband buildouts. [Effective Dates] DATES: Effective February 12, 2024, except for surveys§§ 1.1411(c)(4) (amendatory instruction 2) and make-ready1.1415 work.(amendatory [Effective Dates]instruction DATES: Comments4), which are duedelayed onindefinitely. orThe beforeCommission Februarywill publish a document in the Federal Register announcing the effective date for those sections. [Supplementary Information] SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: This is a summary of the Commission's Fourth Report and Order in WC Docket No. 17-84, adopted December 13, 2024,2023, and replyreleased commentsDecember are15, due2023. onThe full text of this document is available for public inspection at the following internet address: https://docs.fcc.gov/public/attachments/FCC-23-109A1.pdf. To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities ( e.g., Braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or beforecall February 28, 2024. Written comments on the PaperworkConsumer Reduction&amp; ActGovernmental proposedAffairs informationBureau collectionat requirements(202) must418-0530. beSynopsis submittedI. byIntroduction 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the public,Commission Officeremains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of Management and Budget (OMB), and other interested parties on or before March 11, 2024. [Addresses] ADDRESSES: Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's rules,universal 47service CFRfund, 1.415, 1.419, interested parties may file comments and reply comments on or before the datesInfrastructure indicatedInvestment in this document. Comments and replyJobs commentsAct, maywhich beincluded filed using the Commission'slargest Electronicever CommentFederal Filinginvestment System (ECFS). See Electronic Filing of Documents in Rulemakingbroadband, Proceedings,as 63well FRas 24121other (1998).Federal Interested parties may file comments or reply comments, identified by CG Docket No. 17-59 and WCstate Docketbroadband No.deployment 17-97programs, bymore anyfunding ofthan ever is available to build the followingnecessary methods:infrastructure • Electronic Filers: Comments may be filed electronically by accessing ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs/. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to filebring bymuch-needed paperbroadband mustservices fileto anunserved original and oneunderserved copyareas ofin each filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and until further notice, the United States. Key to these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission nohas longertaken acceptssignificant anysteps handin orsetting messengerthe delivered“rules filings.for the Commercialroad” overnightfor mail (other than U.S. Postal Service Express Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050 Junction Drive, Annapolis Junction, MD 20701. • U.S. Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. In addition to filing comments with the Secretary,discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a copyrobust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of any comments on the Paperwork Reduction Act proposed information collection requirements contained herein should be submitted to the Federal Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission viajurisdiction emailthose pole attachments in states that have elected to PRA@fcc.govregulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and to Nicole Ongele, FCC, via email to Nicole.Ongele@fcc.gov. [Supplementary Information] SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: This is a summary of the District of Columbia have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's Thirdpole Furtherattachment Noticerules currently only apply to cable operators and providers of Proposedtelecommunications Rulemakingservices (FNPRM) in WC Docket No. 17-84, FCC 23-109, adopted on December 13, 2023, and releasedtherefore ondo Decembernot 15,apply 2023. The full text of this document is available for public inspection at the following internet address: https://www.fcc.gov/document/fcc-seeks-make-pole-attachment-process-faster-more-transparent-and-more-cost-effective. The Providing Accountability Through Transparency Act, Public Law 118-9, requires each agency, in providing notice of a rulemaking, to postbroadband-only onlineinternet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a brieftelecommunications plain-languageservice, summarywhich ofwould, if completed, apply section 224 and the proposedCommission's rule.pole Theattachment requiredrules summary of this FNPRM is available at https://www.fcc.gov/proposed-rulemakings. To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities ( e.g., Braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.govbroadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or calldelay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the Consumerstatus &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at (202) 418-0530. Initial Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 Analysis This document may contain proposed information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the generalutility publicpoles they plan to commentuse on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as requiredthey bymap out their broadband builds. II. Background 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the Paperworkpole Reductionattachment Actrequirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of 1995, Public Law 104-13. Comments should address: (a) whether the proposedAct, collection of information is necessary for the properCommission performancedetermined that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the functionsbenefiting party must assume the cost of the Commission,modification. including(Section whether224(h) states that whenever the informationowner shall have practical utility; (b) the accuracy of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the Commission'sowner burdenshall estimates;provide (c)written waysnotification of such action to enhanceany entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the quality,costs utility,incurred andby clarity of the informationowner collected;in (d)making wayssuch pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible. Section 224(i) states that an entity that obtains an attachment to minimizea pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the burdencosts of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the collectionmodification of informationan onexisting attachment sought by any other entity (including the respondents,owner including the use of automatedsuch collectionpole, techniquesduct, conduit, or right-of-way).) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other formsattachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of information technology; and (e) way to further reduce the informationnew collectionpole. burdenThe onCommission small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduceadopted thea informationcost collectionsharing burdenprinciple for smallwhen businessan concernsexisting attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with fewersafety than 25 employees. Comment Period and Filing Procedures Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's rules, 47 CFR 1.415, 1.419, interested parties may file comments and reply comments on or beforeother requirements. In the dates2018 indicatedWireline onInfrastructure Order (83 FR 31659-02, July 9, 2018), the firstCommission pagereiterated that application of this document. Comments may be filed using the Commission'scost Electronicsharing Commentprinciple. Filing4. SystemOn (ECFS)July or16, by2020, paper.NCTA—the Commentersinternet should&amp; referTelevision Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to WCclarify Docketits No.rules 21-341 when filing in responsethe context of pole replacements. Specifically, NCTA asked the Commission to thisdeclare FNPRM.that: (1) Electronicutilities Filers: Comments may be filed electronically by accessing ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to file by paper must fileshare anin original and one copy of each filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and until further notice, the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission noprecedent; longer(2) acceptspole anyattachment handcomplaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or messengerdesignate deliveredan filings.authorized contractor Commercial overnight mail (other than U.S. Postal Service Express Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050do Junctionso. Drive,NCTA Annapolisargued Junction,that MDwithout 20701.Commission U.S.action, Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority Mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. People with Disabilities: To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities (braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumercosts &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at 202-418-0530 (voice), 202-418-0432 (TTY). Synopsis I. Introduction 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobileoperational challenges associated with pole replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband networksservices for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuringAmericans consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever federal investment in broadband, as well as other federal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the necessary infrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved andareas. underserved5. areasIn in the United2021 States.Pole KeyReplacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to theseact broadbandon projectsNCTA's arePetition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the utilityallocation poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission has taken significant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments.replacement (Notecosts within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that section 224(c) of the Communicationsrecord Actdeveloped of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in statesresponse that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the DistrictNCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of Columbiathe have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently only apply to cable operators and providersprior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission's pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment rulesrequests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking ( Second FNPRM ) (87 FR 25181-01, Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to broadband-onlypay internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission'sfull reviewcost and assessment of a pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. Additionally, as a follow-on to the pole replacement clarificationand issued in the 2021proper Poleallocation Replacementof Declaratorycosts Ruling,among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the Declaratoryextent Ruling below we provide further clarification regarding cost causation when a pole must be replaced for any reason other than lacking capacity to support a new attachment. Specifically, we clarify that a “red tagged” pole is one that the utilityFourth hasReport identified as needing replacement for any reason other than the pole's lack of capacity, and weOrder providedoes additional examples of when a pole replacement is not “necessitatedexpressly solely”address as a resulttopic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a third party's attachment or modification request— i.e., when a pole already requires replacement atnot caused (necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the timecosts of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extent to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costs of pole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attacherattachments makes a request. We also clarify the obligation to share easement information and the applicableeffect timelines for the processing of attachmentearly requests for 3,000 or more poles. Finally, we seek comment in the FNPRM on ways to further facilitate the processing of pole attachmentretirements applicationson pole replacement cost causation and make-readycost allocation calculations. The Second FNPRM also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to enableshare fasterinformation broadbandwith deployment.potential II.attachers Backgroundconcerning 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expand use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachment requirementscomplaints located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act,specific criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the CommissionAccelerated determinedDocket. (To the extent that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefitFourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) III. Report and Order 7. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt measures to expedite resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment. Specifically, we (1) establish an agency-wide rapid response team to provide coordinated review and assessment of such pole attachment disputes and to recommend effective dispute resolution procedures, and (2) adopt specific criteria to guide that team when considering whether a particularcomplaint party,(or thenportion underthereof) costshould causationbe principles,included on the benefitingEnforcement partyBureau's mustAccelerated assumeDocket. We also require utilities to provide information regarding pole conditions and scheduled replacements to the costextent of the modification. (Section 224(h) states that “[w]heneverinformation is contained in cyclical pole inspection reports that utilities already create and maintain in the ownerordinary course of atheir pole,business, duct, conduit, or right-of-wayin intendspole inspection reports created between cyclical reports. (Both pole attachers and utilities made several other proposals, not addressed herein, regarding the process for pole attachments and replacements and ways they believe the process could be improved to modifyreduce disputes and promote broadband deployment.) A. Accelerating Resolution of Pole Attachment Disputes That Impede or alterDelay Broadband Deployment 8. We amend our rules to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment by establishing a Commission intra-agency rapid response team—called the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT)—to provide coordinated review and assessment of such pole,disputes. duct,(We conduit,codify these amendments in part 1, subpart J, of the Commission's rules ( i.e., Pole Attachment Complaint Procedures) by redesignating current § 1.1415 as § 1.1416 and adding a new § 1.1415. These rule amendments apply only to disputes involving pole attachments of a cable television system or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonableprovider opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of telecommunications service and do not apply to disputes involving pole attachments of a broadband-only internet service provider. They also do not apply to disputes involving poles that are owned or controlled by a railroad, the costsFederal incurredGovernment, by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible.” Section 224(i) states that “[a]n entity that obtains an attachment to a pole,state conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the costs of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including a political subdivision thereof such as a municipality), or a cooperative association, or where the ownerpoles at issue are located in a state, or the District of suchColumbia, pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).”) The Commission also found that whenhas certified to the Commission that it regulates the rates, terms, and conditions of pole attachments in that state or jurisdiction pursuant to 47 U.S.C. 224(c). Should we adopt the proposal set forth in the Open internet NPRM (88 FR 76048-01, Nov. 3, 2023) to reclassify broadband-only internet service as a utilitytelecommunications decidesservice, section 224 would once again apply to modifybroadband-only ainternet service providers deployments.) At the outset, we emphasize that we expect all parties to comply with the Commission's pole forattachment itsrules own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to addnegotiate in good faith to craft solutions that suit the needs of attachers and utilities to facilitate deployment projects. We recognize, however, that in some instances disagreements arise as to the conduct of one or modifymultiple itsparties, own attachments and appliedwe encourage parties in those instances to avail themselves of the Commission's dispute resolution processes to both facilitate the resolution of disputes and, when necessary, use the formal adjudication process to develop precedent upon which parties can rely to settle future potential disputes. In this principledocument, we amend our rules to utilitiescreate the RBAT in an effort to make the Commission's pole attachment dispute resolution process more responsive and otheradaptable attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018goal Wireline Infrastructure Order, the Commission reiterated that application of facilitating deployment. 9. The RBAT will be charged with expediting the costresolution sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the Internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of polethese replacements.disputes Specifically,by NCTAswiftly askedengaging key stakeholders, gathering relevant information, distilling issues in dispute, and recommending to the Commissionparties, towhere declareappropriate, that:an (1)abbreviated utilitiesmediation mustprocess, share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, section 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of a complaint (or portion of a complaint) on the Commission'sAccelerated rules;Docket based on consideration of specified criteria, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. (The Schools, Health &amp; Libraries Broadband (SHLB) Coalition suggests that creation of the RBAT may result in a needless administrative step and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated delay, and suggests that the RBAT, if created, be vested with poleauthority replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband services to Americansresolve disputes without going through the additional step of a complaint process. We decline to adopt this approach. The RBAT is designed to assist parties in unservedresolving areas.their 5.dispute expeditiously without need for litigation. But if parties are unable to reach a resolution, either through mediation or other means, our existing complaint procedures, including the Accelerated Docket, ensure a means of adjudicating the dispute in accordance with due process.) 10. In the 2021Second PoleFNPRM, Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission withsought greatercomment flexibilityon NCTA's proposed adoption of policies “favoring the placement of pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas on the [Commission's] Accelerated Docket[,]” a mechanism that requires the Commission to tailorquickly regulatoryresolve solutions,”disputes itbetween observedparties within 60 days. (Under § 1.736(a), complaint proceedings on the Accelerated Docket must be concluded within 60 days, and are therefore subject to shorter pleading deadlines and other modifications to the procedural rules that govern formal complaint proceedings.) It also sought comment on measures that would expedite the resolution of “pole replacement[ ]” disputes and on criteria for determining more generally “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” Based on broad record developedsupport among attachers for further streamlining our processes as applied to disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we conclude that the targeted measures outlined below are warranted and will advance the Commission's goal of timely broadband deployment. 11. As the Commission observed in response to the NCTASecond PetitionFNPRM, revealedour inconsistentcurrent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules andprovide priora precedent,180-day “utilitiesdeadline may(or notshot requireclock) requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for final action on pole replacementaccess costscomplaints where a cable television system operator or provider of telecommunications service claims that it has been denied access to a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way owned or controlled by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Secondutility. Further(For Noticepurposes (87 FR 25181; Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that this Reportsubsection, and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second Further Notice, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission soughthas commentdefined on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole“pole replacementaccess complaint” as a complaint “filed by a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service that alleges a complete denial of access to a utility pole[,]” and clarified that “[the] term [pole access complaint] does not causedencompass (necessitated solely) by a newcomplaint alleging that a utility is imposing unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions that amount to a denial of pole access.”) In addition, a 270-day shot clock currently applies to final action on all other pole attachment request,complaints and( wheni.e., andthose howalleging partiesunjust mustor shareunreasonable rates, terms, or conditions of attachment). Several commenters assert that these timeframes are commercially unreasonable for attachers seeking to deploy broadband networks, particularly in rural or unserved areas. (Charter asserts that the costs“[m]ere existence ” of a path allowing more routine use of the Accelerated Docket “could help broadband providers resolve disagreements without the need for Commission intervention” by “provid[ing] attachers facing government-imposed construction deadlines with a more credible option of seeking relief, thereby reducing the one-sided leverage held by pole replacement.owners Thetoday.”) CommissionNCTA alsosubmits soughtthat comment on the extentneed to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for expedited procedures has gained greater urgency recently for “providers . . . receiving government funds to build out broadband under deadlines that afford no time for a lengthy complaint process.” A number of commenters therefore propose more routine use of the costsAccelerated ofDocket, with its 60-day shot clock, especially for pole upgradesattachment anddisputes modificationsinvolving unrelatedtime-sensitive deployments in unserved areas. Several commenters also contend that the current Accelerated Docket rule does not sufficiently motivate utilities to newcomply attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second Further Notice also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potential attachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their polesobligation and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expandallow use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachmentaccess complaintsbecause andit is unclear when Commission staff, in the specificexercise criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. III. Further Notice of Proposedtheir Rulemakingdiscretion 7.under We§ recognize1.736(d) that Congress has undertaken a number of initiativesour allocatingrules, funding to further the deployment of broadband to unserved and underserved areas of the United States. In connection with this funding, broadband providers will haveinclude a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Crown Castle asserts that “without certainty that the complaint will be promptly resolved, the decision to deploybring extensivea facilities.formal This,complaint in turn will require that they file significant numbers of applications seeking to attach these facilities to large numbers of poles. To that end, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable speedier broadband deployment. In seeking comment on these areas, we emphasize that even when there is not a specific Commission ruleinvolves business decisions about whether the resolution will be too late to meaningfully assist the deployment.” On the other hand, other commenters argue that sweeping or policywidespread thatimposition governs a particular situation, it is our expectation that parties negotiate in good faith to resolve issues that may arise. 8. Large Orders. We tentatively conclude that we should adopt a defined make-ready timeline for orders that exceed 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility'sAccelerated polesDocket rule, with its highly compressed timeframes, could raise potential fairness and due process concerns given the complexity of the issues raised in amost state in order to facilitate the processing of pole attachment applicationscases. that(Other arecommenters submittedquestion in large numbers. We seek comment on this tentative conclusion. Our current make-ready rule requires make-ready in the communicationsnecessity space to be completed within 30 days after the utility sends a notification to all existing attachers on a pole. (The rule provides 90 days from attachments above the communications space.) The 30-day timeframe applies for communications space make-ready requests up to the lesser of 300new polesrules (1) due to the relative infrequency of requests for Accelerated Docket treatment, see, e.g., Edison Electric Institute Comments at 54 (challenging the need to further expedite “denial of access” complaints based on “[t]he complete absence of [such] complaints before the Commission”), or 0.5(2) percentdue to the lack of evidence of instances where dilatory actions of utilities have caused broadband grant recipients to lose access to such funding.) After considering these competing concerns, we find that the utility'sadoption poles in a state. This make-ready timeframe is extended 45 extra days for requests up to the lesser of 3,000targeted polesdispute resolution reforms, as set forth below, will address the expressed need for quicker resolution of pole attachment disputes that may impede or 5delay percentbroadband ofdeployment while ensuring sufficient fairness and due process for all involved parties. 12. Disputes Subject to RBAT Review and Assessment Procedures. The Commission asked in the utility'sSecond polesFNPRM whether any new dispute resolution procedures should be “limited to complaints that raise only discrete pole access issues” and do not require consideration of “whether a rate, term, or condition of attachment is unjust or unreasonable.” To address the need for timely broadband deployment, particularly in unserved or underserved areas, we apply the new procedures discussed below to any pole attachment dispute that a state.party Foralleges requestsis exceedingimpeding 3,000 poles or 5delaying percent of the utility'sdeployment poles in the state, the Commission's rules require that a utility shall negotiate the timing of broadband facilities. To provide greater clarity regarding when such a dispute would be eligible for placement on the make-readyAccelerated Docket, we also adopt below specific criteria that will guide the RBAT in gooddetermining faith.when (Asa wedispute clarifyis insuitable for accelerated disposition. In light of the Declaratorystrict Rulingtime accompanyingconstraints this FNPRM, the first 3,000 poles of these large orders are subject to the timelineAccelerated setDocket, forthdisputes inraising §relatively 1.1411(g)(3).)straightforward Welegal tentatively conclude that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state and seekevidentiary commentissues, as determined based on this tentative conclusion. 9. NCTA asserts that our rules do not at present sufficiently address the needsRBAT's review of attachers with these largercriteria, requestsare inmore likely to be considered appropriate for placement on the latterAccelerated category.Docket. For13. example,Although NCTA asserts that its members have faced situations where the utilitiesrecord havereflects imposeddiffering limitsviews regarding which disputes should be subject to new dispute resolution procedures, a significant proportion of commenters seeking such reforms ask that we limit the focus of any new procedures to disputes that are interfering with active broadband deployment plans or projects. We adopt this suggestion based on (1)our conclusion that focusing on pole attachment disputes that impede or delay a provider's ability to deploy new broadband facilities will align with, and advance most directly, the numbergoal of polestimely broadband deployment. (Several utilities argue that mayacross-the-board beapplication included in any one application, and (2) the number of applicationsdispute resolution reforms to an attacherentire maycategory submitof atdisputes would fail to account for complexities in individual cases. But such comments assume that Accelerated Docket treatment would automatically apply to all disputes within the identified category. In fact, under the reforms we adopt herein, such disputes will receive individualized assessment and review (by the RBAT) based on a time.totality NCTAof states that these limitations “create problematic delays and jeopardize operators' ability to meet broadband build-out commitments.” At the same time, USTelecom notes the difficulties presented by these very large orders, noting that “make-ready requests involving more than 3,000 poles require flexibility that make-ready timelines cannot provide, given the many outside factors analysis.) 14. RBAT Review and Assessment of Disputes that impactImpede or Delay Broadband Deployment. To expedite the timeresolution requiredof forpole make-readyattachment fordisputes suchthat largeimpede orders,or includingdelay permittingan delays,active workforcebroadband shortagesdeployment project, we amend our rules to establish the RBAT, which will be comprised of Enforcement Bureau and staffingWireline issues,Competition Bureau staff with expertise in the Commission's pole attachment rules and orders. We charge the coordinationRBAT requiredwith amongprioritizing all the attachersresolution to the poles.” Given these factors, would 90 additional days over the timeline set forth in § 1.411(e) be sufficient for processing these larger orders? Would some other amount of timeany bepole reasonable in all circumstances, or should the Commission create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applicationsdispute that coulda rangeparty fromalleges requestingis accessimpeding to thousands of poles to tens or evendelaying hundreds of thousands of poles? If the Commissiondeployment were to adopt additional make-ready timeline tiers, what would be an appropriate cut off number of polesbroadband forfacilities each(including tier?where For instance, should the Commissionparty addis an additional number of days for application processing per 3,000 poles? Does the ability to deviate from the timelines specified in § 1.1411 provide utilities with enough flexibility such that imposing a 90 additional day limit would be reasonable? 10. We also seekseeking commentplacement of the matter on NCTA's proposal that the CommissionAccelerated reviseDocket itsunder rules§ 1.736). In performing this role, the RBAT will gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and provide guidance and advice on the most effective means of resolving the parties' dispute. Where appropriate, the RBAT will recommend to prohibit utilities from limiting “the size of an application or the numberparties of poles included in an applicationabbreviated somediation asprocess, toplacement avoid the timelines.” How prevalent are situations of a complaint, or portion of a complaint, on the typeAccelerated describedDocket, byand/or NCTA?any Are the reasons underlying utilities' imposition of such limitations as laid out by USTelecom valid, and do other reasonsaction existthat for these limitations? Would prohibiting utilities from imposing such limitations in fact speed up the attachmentRBAT process,determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. The RBAT will recommend use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined below, that a complaint, or wouldportion thereof, is suitable for accelerated disposition. (The RBAT may recommend placement of a dispute on the sameAccelerated delaysDocket still exist for other reasons ( e.g., lack of qualified workers, shortages in materials, etc.) or even, as USTelecom alleges, “ultimately slow—rather than—accelerate deployment”? Specifically, NCTA proposes adding additional time to the existingexercise timelinesof for these “larger” orders, for which our rules require that utilities negotiate the timingdiscretion inafforded goodCommission faith.staff Would“to NCTA'sdecide proposedwhether newa timingcomplaint, requirements for larger orders facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders? Utilities have raised multiple concerns with such requirements. For example, they assert that compliance with expanded timelines may not be possible “if many permit applications by multiple attachers are submitted at approximately the same time, or ifportion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the contractor'sAccelerated workloadDocket.” isA alreadyprospective heavy.”complainant Theymay alsoaccept assert that given constraints on workforce availability, utilities would be forced to “choose between providing safe, reliable and affordable power to electric customers (which is mandated by the states),recommendation, with or without the consent of the other party or parties to the dispute, by moving forward with the agreed upon schedule and performingprocess requestedestablished poleby replacementsCommission staff in an unreasonable and likely unattainable amount of time.” Are these concerns valid? Are there any other reasons why NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders would not work? What are the respectivecase.) costsTo request RBAT review and benefitsassessment of sucha potentialdispute requirements? What other steps could we take to facilitate the pole attachment process for larger orders? 11. Self-Help and Use of Contractors. Should the Commission consider modifying its self-help rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly? NCTA also asserts that it has faced issues with utilities failing to process attachment applications in a timelyparty manner. NCTA therefore proposes that utilities notify attachers in advance of survey and make-ready deadlines if the utility will be unable to complete a portion of the process.dispute Forcontends instance, NCTA proposes that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period so that the attacher can elect self-help for the survey sooner. NCTA also proposes making self-help available for the estimate process, which is notimpeding contemplatedor underdelaying currentdeployment Commission rules. We seek comment on NCTA's proposal. (We decline NCTA's request to adopt rules in the Fourth Report and Order regarding self-help and the use of contractors.broadband Wefacilities, find that these issues would be better addressed after a more comprehensive record is developed.) How prevalent is the issueparty citedmust first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by NCTA?phone Canand utilities feasibly be required to inform attachers within 15 business days of receiving a completed application that they will be unable to conduct a survey, estimate, or make-ready within the required time period? Do sufficient contractors exist that meet the minimum qualification requirements set forth in ourwriting. rules(The RBAT review and assessment process will be available only to attachers and pole owners that are direct parties to such dispute (including any legal counsel retained to represent a party in that adoptionspecific dispute). For parties seeking both RBAT review and inclusion of NCTA'sa proposalproceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, this initial notification by phone and in writing would haveneed to be made prior to filing the desiredformal effectcomplaint of speeding broadband deployment? What are the respective costs and benefitswould constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b).) The MDRD Chief will direct the party to a streamlined form on the MDRD website—Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. The form will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of adopting NCTA's proposal? Are there other ways to assist utilities in processing the largerdispute, number of applications they will likely receive in the coming months and years based on the funding initiatives in place for accelerating broadband deployment to unservedwhether and underserved areas? 12. We also seek comment on the impactdispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket. (The form will require a submitting party to provide: information identifying the parties and the services they offer; the section(s) of contractor availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready for surveys and make-ready work. Specifically, do we need to amend the Commission'sAct rulesor Commission rule or order alleged to makehave been violated; a brief description of the parties' dispute (including how it easierrelates for attachers to usebroadband theirdeployment ownplans contractorsor projects, whether such plans or projects are subject to do self-help and one-touch make-ready surveys and make-ready work when there are no contractors available from a utilitydeadline list?under Utilitya commentersgovernment pointfunded outbroadband program, whether the labordispute constraintsarises in an unserved or underserved area, what harm is occurring or is likely to occur as a result of the contractorsituation, workforce; given such constraints, do our current rules provide adequate relief to attachers to timely identify and use qualified contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready work? If not, what canaspects of the Commissiondispute dorequire immediate redress); the specific relief sought; whether the parties have entered into a non-disclosure agreement; the steps the party has taken to changeresolve this dynamic? 13. Pursuant to our rules, an attacher can do its own work when (1) completing surveys and make-ready work when the utilitymatter misseswith other parties to the deadlinesdispute; for these activities, or (2) electing to use the one-touch make-ready process. (Note that there are no attacher self-help remedies for pole replacements.) When conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready work, the attacher must use a utility-approvedstatement contractor.as For self-help surveys and make-ready work that is complex or is above the communications space on a pole, our rules require that a utility make available and keep up to datewhether the parties are amenable to mediation; and a reasonablystatement sufficientindicating listwhether the party intends to seek inclusion of contractors that it authorizes to perform such work. (The term “complex make-ready” means transfers and work within the communicationsmatter space on athe poleAccelerated thatDocket. wouldThe beform reasonablyalso will elicit information relevant to whether the dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition including, for example, the number of poles in question, the number and complexity of claims at issue, and the likely need for discovery or expert affidavits. The RBAT may request additional information from the submitting party if more information is necessary to causedetermine a servicecourse outage(s) or facility damage, including work such as splicing of anyaction.) communication15. attachmentUpon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT will schedule a meeting through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or relocationparties of existing wireless attachments. Any and all wireless activities, including those involving mobile, fixed, and point-to-point wireless communications and wireless internet service providers, are to be considered complex.) Attachers can request to add contactors to the utility'sdispute list—providedwith respect to one or more issues raised by the contractorparty meetsseeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that one or both parties provide the minimumRBAT qualificationswith documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. (NCTA suggests that we specify the information the respondent will be required to provide. We find this approach impracticable, as the information required in a response will depend on the Commission'scomplainant's rules—andallegations. We employ a more flexible approach that enables the utilityRBAT cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. Further, a utility may, but is not required to, keep up-to-date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors it authorizes to perform surveys and simple make-ready. If a utility provides such a list, then the new attacher must choose a contractor from the list to perform the work. Again, attachers may request relevant information and documentation from either party, as appropriate.) In the additioninitial meeting, or in a meeting shortly thereafter, the RBAT will provide guidance and advice to the listparties on the most effective means of anyresolving contractortheir dispute, including staff-supervised mediation, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other action. (Because mediation will be a prominent feature of the RBAT review, we decline to adopt INCOMPAS's proposal that meets the minimum180-day qualificationsdeadline in the Commission's rules, and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. However, if the utility does not provide a list of approved contractors for surveysresolution orof simple make-ready work or no utility-approved contractor is available within a reasonablepole timeaccess period,complaint then the new attacher may choose its own qualified contractor who meets the Commission's minimum requirements. Utilities retain the right to disqualify such contractor, but disqualification must be basedtriggered onby reasonable safety or reliability concerns related to the contractor'ssubmission failure to meet any of the Commission'srequest minimumfor qualificationsRBAT orReview to meet the utility's publicly available and commerciallyAssessment. reasonableIf safetymediation orsucceeds, reliabilitythere standards.will Thebe utilityno mustneed provide notice of this objection to the attacher and must identify at least one available qualified contractor that the attacher can use instead to perform simple surveys and make-ready work. 14. Given that our current rules allow for attachersa complaint. If it does not, the filing of a complaint will commence review period deadlines under the relevant Commission rules.) To that end, the RBAT will attempt to choosedistill their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utilityissues fails to meet the Commission's deadlines (provided such contractors meet the minimum qualifications set forth in ourdispute rules),and weidentify seekissues commentthat on whether attachers are availingmost themselvesimpacting a party's broadband deployment plans. For example, the RBAT may encourage parties to focus on the resolution of thisone option.or Havemore attachersthreshold facedissues, anyor obstacleswhat fromappears utilities when seeking to invoke this option? While a utility cannot be blamed for a lack of available contractors in an area due to workforce constraints, are utilities seeking to use their discretion set forth in the rulesmost urgent issue(s), if it finds that doing so may help the parties to disqualifynarrow otherwise-qualifiedtheir contractorsdispute. whomLikewise, attachers may seek to bring in from outside of an area? We note that, at least for surveys and simple make-ready work, our current rules already require the utilityRBAT may encourage parties, where appropriate, to designatestreamline an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher—is this not being done? If not, is it due to labor constraints for which the utilityproceeding should not be held responsible? In the instance where no qualified contractors are available for a project, how could the Commission help to solve that problem? IV. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis 15. As required by agreeing to focus on “test cases”— i.e., disputes over specific poles that the Regulatoryparties Flexibilityagree Actare representative of 1980,disputes over multiple poles. In this way, deciding the issue as amended (RFA), the Commission has prepared this Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities by the policies and rules proposed in this FNPRM. The Commission requests written public comments on this IRFA. Comments must be identified as responses to the IRFAtest andcase must be filed by the deadlines for comments provided on the first page of the FNPRM. The Commission will sendhave abroader copyimpact. 16. Should the RBAT recommend staff-supervised mediation, it shall be conducted pursuant to § 1.737 of the FNPRM, including this IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA). In addition, the FNPRM and IRFA (or summaries thereof) will be published in the Federal Register . A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Proposed Rules 16. In order to continue the Commission's workrules. combatingBecause illegal§ calls,1.737 generally contemplates that mediations will be conducted by MDRD staff, we delegate authority to the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, to modify or waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this FNPRMcontext, proposesor as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (Waiver is appropriate for “good cause,” and is warranted only if both: (1) special circumstances warrant a deviation from the general rule, and (2) such deviation will serve the public interest.) The strict confidentiality requirements will apply to impose several obligations on gateway providers. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to require gateway providers to authenticate and employ robocall mitigation techniques on all SIPwritten calls that they allow into the United States from abroad that display a U.S. number in the caller ID field. The FNPRM also proposes that gateway providers should engage in robocall mitigation by (1) responding to all traceback requests from the Commission, law enforcement, and oral communications prepared or made for purposes of a mediation pursuant to § 1.737(f), including mediation submissions, offers of compromise, and staff and party comments made during the industrycourse tracebackof consortium within 24 hours; (2) complying with mandatory call blocking requirements; (3) complying with enhanced know-your-customer obligations; (4) complying with a general duty to mitigate illegal robocalls; and (5) filing a certification in the Robocallmediation Mitigation(Mediation Database.Communications). TheThrough Commissionmediation, also proposes one blocking requirement for intermediate and terminating providers immediately downstream from the gatewayRBAT provider,will whichmake wouldevery requireeffort those providers to blocksettle all traffic from a gateway provider that fails to block or effectivelynarrow mitigate illegal traffic when notified of such traffic by the Commission.issues B. Legal Basis 17. The FNPRM proposes to find authority largely under those provisions through which it has previously adopted rules to stem the tide of robocalls in dispute as expeditiously as possible. 17. In the event that the parties are unable to settle their dispute, and a prospective complainant seeks placement of its Callcomplaint Blockingon and Call Authentication Orders. Specifically, the FNPRMAccelerated proposesDocket, to find authority under sections 201(a) and (b), 202(a), 251(e), the TruthRBAT will decide whether the complaint or a portion of the complaint is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of the criteria set forth below. Because of the very short deadlines that apply in CallerAccelerated IDDocket Act,proceedings, Commission staff historically have carefully evaluated whether a particular dispute is appropriate for expedited disposition, resulting in the TRACEDplacement Act and, where appropriate, ancillary authority. The FNPRM also proposes to conclude that, to the extent any of relatively few cases on the rulesAccelerated weDocket. seekIn evaluating whether a matter is suitable for expedited disposition, the RBAT must similarly be mindful of the due process concerns raised by commenters, such as the Pennsylvania PUC, regarding affording parties “the opportunity to adoptbe haveheard anat effect on foreign service providers, that effect is only indirect and therefore consistent with the Commission's authority. The FNPRM solicits comment on these proposals. C. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which the Proposed Rules Will Apply 18. The RFA directs agencies to provide a descriptionmeaningful of,time and wherein feasible,a anmeaningful estimatemanner.” of the number of small entities that may be affected by the proposed rules, if adopted. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, although mediation is generally voluntary, the termRBAT “smallmay business”require hasthat the sameparties meaningparticipate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under rule 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the termAccelerated “smallDocket. businessFinally, concern”if under the SmallRBAT Businessdetermines Act.that (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a smallmatter businessis appliessuitable “unless an agency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for publicinclusion comment,on establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activitiesAccelerated Docket, the RBAT is authorized to send appropriate matters to the Commission's Administrative Law Judge (ALJ) for an expedited “minitrial” ( i.e., trial-type hearing) as contemplated by § 1.736(h). 18. Criteria for Placement on the Accelerated Docket. The Commission sought comment in the Second FNPRM on the adoption of specific criteria to guide Commission staff on “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the agencyAccelerated Docket.” (For example, the Commission asked if its policy should “take into account the number and publishescomplexity such definition(s) in the Federal Register .”) A “small business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA.claims, 19.need Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small entities that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for smalldiscovery, businessesneed for expert affidavits, and ability of the parties to stipulate to facts.”) Based on the requests of several commenters for greater predictability surrounding Accelerated Docket placement decisions with respect to pole attachment disputes that areimpede usedor delay broadband deployment, we establish criteria to aid the RBAT in making determinations regarding the regulatoryplacement flexibility analysis, according to data from the Small Business Administration's (SBA) Office of Advocacy,such matters on the Accelerated Docket. 19. In light of the strict time constraints that apply in generalAccelerated Docket cases, we decline to adopt a small“presumption,” business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 20. Next, the type of small entity described as suggested by some commenters, that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket and, instead, entrust the RBAT with this decision based on the criteria specified below. (There is no basis for us to conclude that a “smalldispute organization”will isbe generallysuitable “any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field.” The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the populationAccelerated Docket simply based on the number of lesspoles thanat 50,000issue benchmarkas INCOMPAS's proposal suggests.) We agree with Dominion/Xcel that a “one-size-fits-all policy” would not adequately take into account the complexity of the issues in 5particular U.S.C.complaint 601(5)proceedings. We also agree with the Coalition of Concerned Utilities that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS60-day benchmarktimeframe haswill beenbe used“too short” to estimateresolve certain pole attachment disputes, and thus “blanket imposition” of the numberAccelerated Docket requirements would be unreasonable and “raise due process concerns” for utilities. Although Charter argues that the presumption could simply be rebutted if a particular complaint raises unusually complex issues, we reject this argument based on our experience with formal complaints. In particular, when parties oppose the operation of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a smallpresumption exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in itsa field.)particular Nationwide,proceeding, these rebuttal efforts often lead to significant additional argumentation attendant to resolving the specific question of the presumption, thus unnecessarily complicating resolution of the underlying issues in dispute. To avoid the potential for taxunnecessary yearrounds 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000argumentation or less according to the registration and taxto dataensure that complaints accepted onto the Accelerated Docket are suitable for exemptdecision organizationsunder available from the IRS.relevant (Thetime IRSconstraints, Exemptwe Organizationreject Businessproposals Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000create a presumption that all pole access disputes for Regionactive 1—Northeastdeployments Areabe (58,577),placed Regionon 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continentalAccelerated U.S.,Docket. Alaska,20. andAfter Hawaii.careful Thisconsideration data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 21. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as “governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand.” U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017record Censuson ofthis Governmentsissue, indicatewe theredirect were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the UnitedRBAT States.to (Theconsider Censusthe factors below in determining whether to accept onto the Accelerated Docket a pole attachment dispute that is allegedly impeding or delaying a broadband facilities deployment plan or project. The RBAT shall determine eligibility for placement on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of Governmentsthese surveyfactors: is conductedwhether everythe fiveprospective (5)complainant yearsstates compilinga dataclaim for yearsviolation ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of generalthe purposeAct governments (county, municipal and town or township)a andCommission specialrule purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (county, (there were 2,105 county governments with populations less than 50,000. This category does not include subcounty (municipal and township) governments) municipal, and town or townshiporder (therethat werefalls 18,729within municipal and 16,097 town and township governments with populations less than 50,000)) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments—independent school districts (there were 12,040 independent school districts with enrollment populations less than 50,000) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the specialCommission's purposejurisdiction; governments whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governmentsdisputes dataappears doeslikely notto provideadvance data aggregated based on population size for the specialdeployment purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governmentsbroadband data,facilities, weespecially estimatein thatan atunserved least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township)underserved witharea; populations whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; • the number and complexity of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the numberissues in dispute; • whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of specialrules purposeor governments—independentpolicies; school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017likely Censusneed for, and complexity of, discovery; • the likely need for expert testimony; • the ability of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 22. Wired Broadband Internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scopeparties to stipulate to facts; • whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; • the willingness of the Internetprospective Servicecomplainant Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receiveseek information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadbandruling connectionon undera subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and • such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding. The first three of these criteria will help the RBAT to ensure appropriate use of the Commission's rules.processes Wired broadband internet services fall in support of the Wiredgoal Telecommunicationsof Carrierstimely industry.broadband deployment and ensure that the parties have made a sufficient effort to resolve or, at a minimum, identify and narrow the disputed issues prior to filing a complaint. The SBAremaining smallcriteria businesswill sizehelp standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entireRBAT year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 23. Additionally, according to Commissiondetermine dataif a dispute is suitable for decision under the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, and also require it to consider whether including a matter on internetthe accessAccelerated servicesDocket aswould ensure the prompt and fair adjudication of Junethe 30,dispute. 2019,(A nationwideresponding thereparty's wererefusal approximatelyto 2,747stipulate providersto facts or cooperate in the exchange of connectionsrelevant overinformation 200bearing kbpson disputed facts will not itself defeat a request for acceptance of a pole attachment dispute on the Accelerated Docket.) By specifying the criteria that the RBAT must consider in atmaking leastits onedetermination, directionwe usinghope various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include aDSL, sDSL, Other Wireline, Cable Modem and FTTP). Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintainmake the confidentialityAccelerated Docket a more useful tool in the resolution of eligible pole attachment disputes and provide prospective complainants with greater certainty regarding which complaints will be deemed suitable for expedited resolution. 21. We will closely monitor the providers.)impact The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the numberdispute resolution procedures adopted here and consider additional streamlining measures should we observe ongoing delay tactics or other unreasonable practices that hinder the ability of broadband providers to deploy new services or facilities. (Two commenters suggest narrowing the list of criteria to avoid delay tactics by utilities. We find that wouldeliminating qualifycriteria is unnecessary, however, as smallthese undercriteria are holistic in nature, and no single one will be dispositive. Moreover, the SBA'sRBAT smallis businessnot sizerequired standard.to However,credulously accept assertions from either party.) B. Increasing Transparency by Providing Attachers With Utility Pole Inspection Information 22. We next amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in lighttheir most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the generalaffected datapoles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe (if any). (The record demonstrates that utilities conduct inspections of their poles on fixeda technologymulti-year servicecycle, providerseither as part of normal network management or as required by state law.) In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on requiring utilities to provide more information about their poles to prospective attachers, in order to reduce disputes. (Utilities did not challenge the Commission's 2022general Communicationsjurisdiction Marketplaceto Report,require wethem believeto provide relevant information to prospective attachers, and ACA Connects asserted the Commission has such authority.) Several attaching entities indicated pole inspection information would be helpful in planning deployments. (This requirement applies only in the states that have not certified that they regulate pole attachments themselves. To the majorityextent such reports may include sensitive or confidential network or financial information, we rely upon utilities and attachers to address the issue through redactions or non-disclosure agreements.) We believe this new requirement strikes a reasonable balance between additional transparency for prospective attachers and ensuring the utilities' expenditure of wirelineresources internetis accessno servicegreater providersthan cannecessary. beAs considereddiscussed smallbelow, entities.however, 24.we Internetalso Servicestrongly Providersencourage (Non-Broadband).utilities Internetto accessvoluntarily serviceshare providerspole-related usinginformation client-suppliedthat telecommunicationsis connectionsreasonably (available e.g.,and dial-upthat ISPs)they astrack well as VoIP service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industrynormal classificationcourse of Allbusiness, Otherboth Telecommunications.before Theand SBAafter smallreceiving businessattachment sizeapplications, standardand forwe intend to continue to monitor the record in this industryproceeding classifiesto firmsdetermine withif annualadditional receiptsinformation sharing mandates may be required. 23. For the purposes of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entirenew year.transparency Ofrequirement, those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a morecyclical precisepole estimateinspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the numberresults of firms that meet the SBAroutine sizeinspection standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firmsits poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle, while a periodic pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 25. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmissionnormal course of voice,its data,business text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that theysets operateforth the results of the inspection of any of its poles outside the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (Electric Utilities request that the new rule not require utilities to provide aperiodic varietypole inspection reports, arguing that the requirement will create confusion and invite disputes. We find that the definition of services,“periodic suchinspection asreport” wiredis telephonysufficiently services,clear including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and videonote programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that theyno operateother areutility includedcommenters inclaimed the definition was vague or otherwise problematic. We further find that this industry.requirement Wiredis Telecommunicationsan Carriersimportant areaspect also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers:the Incumbentrule. LocalCyclical Exchangepole Carriersinspections (ILECs),typically Competitiveoccur Accessseveral Providersyears (CAPs)apart, sometimes by ten or more years, and Competitiveperiodic Localinspection Exchangereports Carrierswill (CLECs),contain Cable/Coaxmore CLECs,recent Interconnectedinspection VOIPinformation. Providers,We Non-Interconnectedalso VOIPdecline Providers,the Shared-TenantElectric ServiceUtilities' Providers,request Audioto Bridgeseek Servicefurther Providers,comment on transparency requirements in lieu of adopting a rule on report sharing. We find that the record is sufficient to adopt an information sharing rule at this time and Otherthe Localrule Servicewe Providers.adopt Localstrikes Resellersan fallappropriate intobalance anotherbetween U.S.providing Censusattachers Bureauwith industryadditional grouphelpful andinformation thereforewhile data for these providers is not includedbeing inoverly resource-intensive for utilities. Indeed, several utility parties are supportive of the new transparency requirement.) We note that this industry.)new 26.transparency requirement is consistent with the existing practices of certain utilities to prepare such reports. When asking for information about the status of a utility's poles for a planned buildout, the attacher must submit its information request no earlier than contemporaneously with an attachment application. The SBAutility smallwill have ten business sizedays standardto respond to the request. (The utility has the same amount of time to determine whether the application is complete.) This should allow sufficient time before the make-ready survey for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entireattacher year.to Ofrevise thisor number,amend 2,964its firmsapplication operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as may be appropriate based on the information it receives. (“The term make-ready means the modification or replacement of Decembera 31,utility 2021,pole, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 27. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commissionlines noror equipment on the SBAutility haspole, developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to localaccommodate exchangeadditional services.facilities Providerson of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closestutility industrypole.” withAfter receiving a complete attachment application, a utility conducts a make-ready survey and provides a make-ready cost estimate to the attacher. During the survey stage, “the pole owner conducts an SBAengineering smallstudy business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to asdetermine wirelinewhether carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitivewhere Localattachment Exchangeis Carriersfeasible, (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Otherwhat Localmake-ready Serviceis Providers.)required.”) The24. SBAWe smallrecognize business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in thissome industrysituations, for the entireinformation year.provided Ofby thisutilities number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in their pole inspection reports may lead new attachers to amend their attachment applications. In order to ensure that utilities have enough time to review such applications, in situations when the 2022utility Universalreceives Servicean Monitoringamended Report,attachment asapplication ofprior Decemberto 31,granting 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewerdenying employees. Consequently, using the SBA'soriginal smallapplication, businesswe sizewill standard,allow most of these providers can be considered small entities. 28. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (Incumbent LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a smallutility business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closestoption industryto withrestart an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire45-day year.period Offor responding to the application on the merits and conducting the survey. (The option to restart the time period also applies to larger orders that are subject to a 60-day timeframe.) Utilities electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period in this number,manner 2,964must firmsnotify operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberattacher within 5 business days of firmsreceipt that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commissionamended estimatesapplication that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewerby employees. Consequently, using the SBA's45th smallday after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. (For example, if an amended application was filed on the 42nd day following the utility's determination that the original application was complete, the utility would only have three days, not five business sizedays, standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 29. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to localnotify exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the followingattacher typesthat the utility is restarting the 45-day application review and survey.) To avoid unnecessary delays and costs, we strongly encourage attachers to notify utilities of providers:their Competitiveintent Accessto Providersfile, (CAPs) and Competitiveto Localfile, Exchangeamended Carriersapplications (CLECs),as Cable/Coaxquickly CLECs,as Interconnectedpossible VOIPafter Providers,receiving Non-Interconnecteda VOIPpole Providers,inspection Sharedreport Tenantfrom Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closestutility. industryWe withalso encourage utilities to exercise their right to restart this 45-day period judiciously and to review amended applications as quickly as possible even when electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period. (Several parties asked that we require an SBAautomatic smallrestart businessof size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire45-day year.response Ofperiod thisor number,start 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberapplication process over in such instances by requiring an attacher to file a new application rather than an amended application. We decline these requests and find that the procedures we adopt are sufficiently tailored to account for the needs of firmsutilities to review amended applications while not needlessly slowing deployment. Under the new rule, utilities will always have the option of electing to restart the 45-day review period; but given that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there weremay 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be consideredinstances smallwhere entities. 30. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBAamendment smallis businessminor size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewerotherwise employeeswill as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not providerequire a morerestart precise estimate of the number45-day period, we find it reasonable to require utilities to actually review an amended application to determine whether a restart is necessary given the specific circumstances.) Regardless of firmswhether that meet the SBAutility sizeelects standard.)to Additionally,restart based on Commission data in the 202245-day Universalresponse Serviceperiod, Monitoringany Report,additional survey costs necessitated by the amended application, such as ofa Decembersecond 31,survey 2021,after therea weresurvey 127for providers that reported they were engaged in the provisionoriginal ofapplication interexchangehas services.been Ofcompleted, thesewill providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be consideredborne smallby entities. 31. Operator Service Providers (OSPs). Neither the Commissionnew norattacher consistent with the SBAnew hasattacher's developedobligation ato smallpay business size standard specifically for operatormake-ready servicecosts providers.associated The closest applicable industry with anits SBAapplication. small25. businessIn sizeconnection standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numbernew transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule, we also require utilities to retain copies, in whatever form they were created, of firmsany such cyclical or periodic pole inspection reports they conduct in the normal course of business, until such time as the utility completes a superseding cyclical pole inspection report covering the poles included in the attachment application. In creating these obligations, we reiterate that meetutilities are required to provide only the SBAinformation size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they werealready engagedpossess and track in the provisionnormal course of operatorconducting services.pole Ofinspections theseat providers, the Commissiontime estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 32. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commissionattacher's norrequest the SBA has developed a definition for smalldata. businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBAnew smallrule businessdoes sizenot standardrequire utilities to collect or create new information for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entiresole year.purpose Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of responding to such requests or to provide all information they may possess on the numberaffected ofpoles firmsoutside their pole inspection reports. (Edison Electric Institute contends that meet“access theto SBAcritical sizeinfrastructure standard.)by Additionally,non-electric basedcompany onpersonnel Commissionpresents dataserious safety, reliability, and homeland security hazards,” and that “existing law bars electric companies from releasing some information about system infrastructure.” It does not directly assert, however, that utilities would be barred from disclosing information contained in a pole inspection report. And it notes that most of the 2022information Universalis Service“already Monitoringavailable” Report,and asan attacher “can readily learn the condition” of Decemberpoles 31,by 2021,driving therea wereproposed 90route. providersAlthough we do not know exactly what information utilities may include in their pole inspection reports, we anticipate that reportedlegal constraints on disclosure of critical infrastructure information can be addressed, to the extent that they werearise, engagedby in the provisionparties involved via appropriate redactions or use of othera tollnon-disclosure services.agreement. OfWe thesedo providers,not intend our new rule to override laws precluding disclosure of certain information, but expect utilities to work in good faith to provide potential attachers with the Commissioninformation estimatesthey that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can befrom consideredtheir smallpole entities.inspection 3.reports.) Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 33. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of WISPA, including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We alsofind consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA,new bylimited includingrequirement themachieves undera balance between a potential attacher's need for more information about the “Wirelesspoles Providers—Fixedthat it plans to use as part of a broadband buildout and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extentutility's interest in minimizing the wirelessburden services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winningmandatory biddersdisclosures. 26. We conclude that claimrequiring utilities to qualifyprovide asinformation smallabout businesses at the closestate of antheir auctionpoles doesto notattachers necessarilywill representhelp improve the numberattachment process and potentially reduce disputes. In particular, having such information early in the process will help attachers evaluate whether they want to adjust their plans in light of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commissionpoles' doesconditions. notAt generally track subsequent business size unless, in the contextsame time, we recognize the potential burdens on utilities that would result from imposing a mandate to compile extensive information for every pole attachment application the utility receives. We seek to strike a balance by (1) requiring utilities to provide such information as they already collect in the normal course of assignmentsinspections done as part of managing their network and transferspoles (which the record indicates include which poles have been identified as needing replacement), rather than having to gather information solely for attachers or reportablefrom eligibilitymany events,disparate unjustsources, enrichment issues are implicated. 34. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining(2) switchingtying requests for such information to poles contained in submitted attachment applications. 27. In striking this balance, we agree with utilities that they should not be required by rule to gather and transmission facilities to provide communicationsextensive viapole-related data for every pole attachment application about matters they do not track in the airwaves.normal Establishmentscourse inof this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business asthrough smalltheir ifinspections. itThe hasrecord 1,500shows that many utilities do not create specific maintenance or fewerreplacement employees.schedules U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017poles. showIt also shows that theresome wereutilities 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a morerange precise estimate of pole-related information—including whether any poles are red-tagged or otherwise identified for replacement—when responding to an attachment application after conducting a make-ready survey. We agree with the numbercommenters asserting that a pre-application survey conducted by the attacher, or a make-ready survey conducted by a utility in response to a specific attachment application, are often the best ways to ensure the potential attacher and utility have up-to- date, accurate information on the current state of firmspoles. (We recognize that meeta visual inspection may not necessarily provide all the SBAinformation sizean standard.)attacher Additionally,might baseddesire. This supports requiring disclosure of pole inspection reports.) We also agree with Dominion/Xcel, however, that the information contained in general survey or pole inspection reports can be useful to prospective attachers in some cases. Therefore, although we decline at this time to impose broader duties on Commissionutilities datato collect and provide more expansive pole-related information for every attachment application, we will require utilities to furnish already available information in pole inspection reports concerning specific poles upon request at the 2022time Universalan Serviceattachment Monitoringapplication Report,is assubmitted. (Some commenters support the balance struck in this new rule. Electric Utilities, on the other hand, request that any consideration of Decembera 31,rule 2021,to thererequire weredisclosure 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wirelesspole services.inspection Ofreports these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considereddeferred small entities. 35. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to Part 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a businessfurther notice of proposed rulemaking.) 28. While we do not at this time codify a requirement for utilities to provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting a pole attachment application, as smallrequested ifby itsome hascommenters, 1,500we orunderstand fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that often utilities share pole information with attachers prior to the application process, particularly information not easily attained through visual inspection. We strongly encourage this pre-application collaboration and cooperation because there wereis 2,893value firms that operated in this industry for both utilities and attachers in having the entirebest year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S.pole Censusinformation Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 36. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCSinform involvedeployment eligibilityforecasts for bidding credits and installmentattachment paymentsrequests. inAlthough we recognize that some potential attachers could benefit from obtaining pole-related information prior to submitting an application, we decline to impose this requirement on utilities given that the auctionunderlying requests for information would be for preliminary build-out plans that may substantially change. Furthermore, establishing a pre-application duty for utilities would require the Commission to create a new process and timeline prior to the codified make-ready process, which has always been triggered by the filing of licensesan forapplication. Finally, given that prospective attachers also have the variousability frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to severalgather typesinformation about poles on prospective routes through pre-application surveys and visual inspection of smallpoles businesseson baseda averageprospective grossroute, revenueswe (small,find verythat smallimposing an additional pre-application requirement on utilities is not justified at this time. (Through such visual inspection, an attacher typically can learn the age of a pole, whether it has been red tagged, when the most recent inspection occurred, and entrepreneur)a pursuantpole's load and potential suitability for more attachments. As noted above, however, we also recognize that visual inspection alone may not always provide all the information an attacher may desire, thus supporting the new requirement that utilities provide attachers with cyclical and periodic pole inspection reports. For example, with regard to utility tags on poles, Crown Castle asserts that “not all poles are appropriately tagged or inspection tags may be missing, damaged, or unable to be interpreted without additional information from the competitivepole biddingowner.”) rules29. adoptedWe reject requests at this time that we mandate a variety of other disclosure requirements on utilities. (Several attachers requested that utilities be required to provide any relevant requested information about their poles that they retain in conjunction with the requirementsordinary course of business, which would go beyond pole inspection reports. While we encourage parties to voluntarily share information, we find that codifying a broad disclosure requirement for all information collected in the auctionordinary and/orcourse as identified in the designated entities section in Part 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The “Designated entities” sections in subparts D-Q each contain the small business sizecould standardsforce adoptedutilities for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 37. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction,expend significant resources to gather such information and could lead to additional disputes and complaints related to information sharing.) We agree with utilities that the Commissionmost notesrelevant information for purposes of an attachment request is whether the poles at issue are available or due for replacement. (Some utilities suspect that as a general matter, the numberpurpose of winningmany bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the numberattachers' ofrequests smallis businessesonly currentlyto inprovide service.ammunition Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licenseesrate providingdisputes these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with activeutilities, licensesnot that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 38. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to theseimprove services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entireattachment year.process.) OfFor thisexample, number,some 2,837attacher firmscommenters employedask fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 39. According to Commissionrequire utilities to create accessible databases (or establish a single database for all utilities) with information on things like pole age, condition, repair/replacement schedules, location, number of attachments, standard rate structure, and applicable engineering standards. They also ask that utilities be required to provide data asfrom the owners' periodic load analyses for poles; the age, height, class, and condition of Novemberpoles; 2021,and theredata were three active licenses in this service. (Based on ancurrent FCCattachments Universaland Licensingpending Systemattachment searchrequests onfor Novemberrelevant 8,poles. 2021,And searchACA parameters:Connects Serviceasks Group = All, “Match only the followingCommission radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to require utilities to provide more details in their make-ready cost estimates to support those costs. For the numberreasons ofdiscussed licensees.below, Awe licenseedecline can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675adopt MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services.requirements. ForWith licensesrespect into thecertain 1670-1675financial MHzinformation servicerequested band,by some commenters regarding pole rates, we do not adopt new disclosure requirements, but make clear that some financial information is already required to be disclosed under our rules. 30. Before addressing these specific proposals, however, we note some attachers express concern that, by adopting a “smallrequirement business”to isprovide definedpole asinspection reports but not codifying additional mandates, we may be inadvertently discouraging utilities from voluntarily providing pole-related information before receiving an entityattachment that,application, togetherwhich at least some utilities do today. We stress that our actions in this final rule should not be understood to undermine or disincentivize such voluntary sharing. To the contrary, voluntary sharing of pole-related information is consistent with itslongstanding affiliatesCommission policy favoring transparency in the pole attachment context, and controllingwe interests,strongly hasencourage averageboth grossutilities revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and aattachers “veryto smallcollaborate business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controllingvoluntarily interests,share hasinformation hadwith averageeach annualother grosswhenever revenuessuch notinformation exceedingis $15reasonably millionavailable forand obtained in the precedingnormal threecourse years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 40. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winningbusiness. bidders(We reject claims that qualifyour actions here are inconsistent with the policy of promoting transparency, as smallCrown businessesCastle atasserts. To the closecontrary, ofthis Order increases transparency by adopting a new disclosure requirement.) Voluntary sharing can be helpful to both attachers and utilities to promote more efficient buildouts by informing deployment forecasts, allowing more accurate applications, and decreasing disputes or delays after an auctionapplication doesis notsubmitted. necessarily(Such representvoluntary sharing also is helpful because “not all pole owners conduct these denominated inspections,” yet attachers still could benefit from receiving the numberkind of smallinformation businessesthat currentlywould have been included in service.such Further,inspections had they occurred.) Having better and more accurate information prior to attachment applications will likely reduce make-ready costs, the Commissionfrequency doesand notseverity generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignmentsdisputes, orand transfers,improve unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commissionefficiency does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the numberattachment process—benefiting both attachers and utilities. We will continue to monitor the record in this proceeding and will take further action if it becomes clear that voluntary information sharing arrangements are insufficiently promoting broadband deployment. 31. Database(s) of licenseesPole Information. We decline (1) to require that each utility create an accessible database with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 41. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBAarray smallof business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data on all its poles, or (2) to establish a single pole-information database for 2017all showutilities. The Commission rejected previous calls for a similar database requirement in 2011, in part based on the large burden outweighing potential benefits. We find that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire2011 year.reasoning Ofremains thisvalid. number,In 2,837particular, firmswe employedfind fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBArecord sizecontinues standard.)to Additionally,demonstrate based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provisionburdens and costs of cellular,creating personalsuch communicationsa services,database (if a utility does not already have one) would be very large given the number of poles many utilities own or jointly own and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commissionscope estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of thesepole providersdata canattachers seek, and that the alleged benefits of requiring such a database would be consideredreduced smallby entities. 42. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910new requirement we adopt in this final rule that utilities provide information from their pole inspection reports. Commenters contend that requiring such a pole-related database would help speed deployment by helping attachers plan better and 1930-1990avoid MHzintermediate bands.steps The closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for thisboth industryattachers classifiesand utilities. Utilities, however, assert that due to the very large number of poles they own or co-own and the ever-changing nature of pole networks, maintaining a businessfully asup-to-date smalldatabase ifwould itbe hasalmost 1,500impossible, orand fewerso employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entireinformation year.for Ofany thisgiven number,group 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of poles in a database could easily be out of date when the numberattacher needs it. One utility also submits that granting access to such voluminous pole information could result in the submission of firmsincorrect applications. We find that meet the SBAbenefits size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 43. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on a FCCdatabase Universalrequirement Licensingremain Systemspeculative searchat onbest Novembergiven 16,how 2021,difficult searchit parameters:would Servicebe Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to keep such a large database up-to-date. 32. While some commenters argue that circumstances have changed since 2011, with some state utility commissions adopting database requirements for pole-related information, the numberstates cited by these commenters are limited and, in any event, all regulate pole attachments at the state level pursuant to section 224(c) of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auctionAct. ofAs licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “veryresult, smallcompliance business” as an entity that, together with itspre-existing affiliatesstate-specific anddatabase controllingrequirements interests,would haslikely hadoffer averagelittle, annualif grossany, revenuesrelief not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C,complying D,with E, and F Blocks. 44. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a generalnewly matter,imposed Federal database requirement. To the numberextent any utilities may have developed pole-related databases in states that do not regulate pole attachments, the record indicates that attachers are interested in specific types of winningdata, bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarilymerely representaccess theto numberexisting databases, which would require utilities to absorb additional, and potentially substantial, costs of smalleither businessesadding currentlyspecific types of new data or searching databases for specific data of interest to attachers. (ACA Connects asserts that many utilities have developed pole-related databases since 2011, but it does not identify utilities that have done so in service.states Further,that do not regulate pole attachments.) Again, we agree with the Commissionutilities doesthat not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the contextvalue of assignmentssuch ordatabase transfers,information unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimateattachers is highly unlikely to outweigh those burdens, as the numberinformation may well be out of licenseesdate withby active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA'stime smallan businessattacher sizesubmits standard.an 45.attachment Specializedrequest. MobileMoreover, Radioany Licenses.added Specialbenefit Mobilewould Radiolikely (SMR)be licensesminimal allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in light of the 800new MHzinformation-sharing requirement we adopt in this final rule. 33. Loading Studies. According to NCTA, some utilities provide and 900allow MHzattachers spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to servicesrely usedon forloading voicestudies andincluded datain communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under Part 90 of the Commission'sutilities' rules.cyclical Wirelesspole Telecommunicationsinspection Carriersreports (exceptrather Satellite)than ismaking the closestattacher industrydo withits own loading study, but other utilities do not. NCTA asserts that “[w]here such studies have been conducted, pole owners should be required to use that existing analysis rather than forcing a SBAnew smallattacher business size standard applicable to theseincur services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entireexpense year.and Ofdelay of performing a duplicative and redundant study.” We decline to adopt this number,proposal. 2,837To firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberextent pole inspection reports include loading studies, attachers will have access to such information under the new rule we adopt in this final rule. (In cases where the loading study is not part of firms that meet the SBAinspection sizereport, standard.)we Additionally,decline, basedat on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number,time, theto Commissioncodify estimatesa thatrequirement all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 46. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on a FCCutility Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to provide an attacher with a loading study as NCTA requests, but strongly encourage utilities to provide such loading studies when reasonably requested and readily available.) We will not, however, dictate when a utility can require a loading study, as NCTA seems to request, as we continue to believe, consistent with the number2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, that such studies “can be important tools to address safety, reliability, and engineering concerns.” (NCTA also asserts that a utility should have to bear the cost of licensees.a Aloading licenseeanalysis where none has been performed but the utility believes a study is necessary before allowing an attachment, and that utilities can haveinstead onerecover or more licenses.) However, since the Commissioncosts does not collect data on the number of employeessuch forloading licenseesstudies providingthrough SMRannual services,attachment atrental thisfees. timeAs that issue relates to cost recovery rather than transparency, we aredo not ableaddress it here.) 34. Age, Height, Class, and Condition of Poles. We reject attachers' request to estimaterequire utilities to provide data on the numberage, height, class, and condition of licenseestheir poles, or the last date the pole was inspected, make-ready was conducted, or a pre-existing violation on the pole was fixed. The utilities state that they either routinely provide this type of data with activemake-ready licensesestimates, that would qualify as small under the SBA'sinformation smallis businessaccessible sizeto standard.attachers Nevertheless,through fortheir purposesown ofpre-application surveys or when the attacher accompanies the utility on a make-ready survey, or that they do not track this analysisdata. To the Commissionextent estimatesutilities' pole inspection reports include such data, that information would be covered by the majoritynew oftransparency SMRrequirement licenseeswe adopt in this final rule and available to attachers upon request after an application is filed. Given that attachers can beoften consideredobtain smallthis entitiesinformation usingeither from the SBA'sutility smallor businessthrough sizetheir standard.own 47.survey Loweror 700inspection, MHzwe Bandreject Licenses.any Theadditional lowerrequirement 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private,pole internalcondition radioinformation needs,beyond two-waythat interactive,which cellular,we have already outlined, but we strongly encourage utilities to share this information when it is readily available and mobilecollected television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entirenormal year.course Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of business. 35. Existing Attachments and Pending Attachment Requests. We also decline to require that utilities provide data on the number of firmsattachments or pending attachment applications for each pole covered by an attachment request. As the utilities explain, pole networks are dynamic and pole conditions frequently change. We find that meet the SBArecord sizesufficiently standard.)demonstrates Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that attempting to keep a majorityfully up-to-date list of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 48. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of activeattachments licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or morepending licenses.)applications Theon Commission'severy smallpole businesswould sizebe standardsa with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very smalltime-consuming business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controllingexpensive interests,proposition. has(Some averageattachers annualalso grosssought revenuesto require pole owners to produce information on utility transformers or voltage on a pole or the total attachment load on the pole, but utilities either deny the usefulness of such information or state that they do not exceedingtrack $15it.) millionEven forif some utilities track this information, requiring them to compile the precedinginformation three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controllingsend interests,it hasacross averagea grossvast revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and anshifting entrepreneurlandscape wasof definedattachers as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controllingpoles—and interests,to haskeep averagethat grossinformation revenuesupdated—would notbe exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a smallconsiderable businessburden. classificationAlthough wonattachers 329assert licenses,there twenty-sixwould winningbe bidderssome claimingvalue in having this kind of data earlier, even if it is old, we find that, as with the proposed pole attachment database discussed above, any purported benefit is outweighed by the potentially considerable cost utilities would have to bear in complying with such a smallrequirement. business36. classificationData wonSupporting 214Make-Ready licenses,Estimates. andWith threeregard winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 49. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commissionrequest notes that asutilities abe generalrequired matter,to provide more detailed supporting data in their make-ready estimates, particularly regarding the numberutility's ofcosts, winningwe biddersagain thatdecline qualifyto asadopt smallany businessesnew atrequirement. Current rules already require utilities to provide supporting cost details in their make-ready cost estimates. If utilities are not complying with those rules, attachers remain free to invoke the closecomplaint process or seek mediation. 37. Financial Records Regarding Poles. We decline attachers' requests to create new obligations requiring utilities to provide additional financial data regarding poles and attachment rates, including outside plant records (also called continuing property records) as part of an auction does not necessarily represent the numberrules being adopted at this time. (Continuing Property Records are “[o]utside plant records relevant to poles,” typically “including a detailed accounting of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commissionunits doesassociated not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with activeaccounts licensesused to report pole plant investment such as vintage height, class, etc.” Several attachers repeated these requests in later submissions, asking that wouldutilities qualifybe asrequired smallto underdisclose a range of information related to rates, rather than only the SBA'sinformation small business size standard. 50. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806utility MHzrelied bands.on Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in thesecomputing bandsrates, includeto flexibleenable fixed,attachers mobile,to, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private,example, internalevaluate radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closestvalidity industryof withutilities' reliance on presumptions in the pole attachment rate formula.) Attachers argue that such a SBAduty small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for thisutilities industryto classifiesprovide information will reduce rate disputes or make them easier to resolve. Our focus here, however, is on deployment rather than rate disputes. Further, § 1.1404(e) and (f) of the Commission's rules—which we do not alter here—already require that pole owners, upon request of a businesscable asoperator small if it has 1,500 or fewertelecommunications employees.carrier, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberinformation they have relied on in calculating rates, and information an attacher seeks to rely on in establishing that a rate, term, or condition is not just and reasonable. The Commission has explained that “it is critical that attaching entities have this information well in advance of firmsexecutive-level discussions to ensure that meetthose pre-complaint negotiations have a chance of success.” (NCTA contends the SBAformer sizelanguage standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this§ industry1.1404(g) canwas beinadvertently consideredremoved small.in 51. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCCprior Universalrule Licensingrevision. System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We notedisagree. The Commission sought to “streamline the rules in [§ ] 1.1404” by removing the long list of information specified in that section but did not narrow the numberscope of activeinformation licensesutilities doesmust notprovide equateattachers. In light of these existing rules and the policy stated by the Commission in 2018, to the numberextent of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entityattacher that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “veryspecific smalldispute business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 52. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wirelessutility, serviceit inalready whichcan licenseesseek are authorized to offer and provideobtain radiocertain telecommunicationsfinancial servicedata forfrom hirethe utility, prior to subscribersfiling ina aircraft.complaint, Aunder licenseecurrent mayrules.) provideWe anytherefore typedecline of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraftimpose ofa anynew, type,broader duty to disclose additional financial records related to poles. (USTelecom, whose members include both pole owners and serveattachers, anyargues that imposing a duty beyond current law “would not accelerate broadband deployment or allreduce aviationits marketscosts, (commercial,but government,would andlikely general).have A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800opposite MHzeffect air-groundby spectrum.diverting 53.broadband providers' capital away from their own broadband deployment to subsidize their competitors' builds.”) IV. Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis 38. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) was incorporated into the Second FNPRM. The closestCommission industrysought withwritten anpublic SBAcomment smallon businessthe sizeproposals standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entireSecond year.FNPRM, Ofincluding thiscomment number,on 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberIRFA. ofNo firmscomments that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 54. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximatelyfiled fouraddressing licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-GroundIRFA. RadiotelephoneThis Service.present (BasedFinal onRegulatory aFlexibility FCCAnalysis Universal(FRFA) Licensingconforms System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the numberRFA. ofA. licensees.Need Afor, licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installmentObjectives paymentsof, in the auctionFourth ofReport licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controllingOrder interests,39. has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auctionFourth ofReport Air-Groundand RadiotelephoneOrder, Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 55. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notesadopts rules and policy changes that aswill amake general matter, the numberpole attachment process faster and cheaper, particularly when poles have to be replaced during broadband buildouts. In the last five years, the Commission took significant steps in setting standards for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of winningattaching biddersbroadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that qualifyimpede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing telecommunications companies with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as smallthey businessesmap atout their broadband builds. B. Summary of Significant Issues Raised by Public Comments in Response to the closeIRFA 40. There were no comments raised that specifically addressed the proposed rules and policies presented in the Second FNPRM IRFA. Nonetheless, the Commission considered the potential impact of an auction does not necessarily represent the numberrules proposed in the IRFA on small entities and took steps where appropriate and feasible to reduce the compliance burden for small entities in order to reduce the economic impact of small businesses currently in service. Further, the rules enacted herein on such entities. C. Response to Comments by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration 41. Pursuant to the Small Business Jobs Act of 2010, which amended the RFA, the Commission doesis required to respond to any comments filed by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA), and to provide a detailed statement of any change made to the proposed rules as a result of those comments. The Chief Counsel did not generallyfile trackany subsequentcomments business size unless, in response to the contextproposed rules in this proceeding. D. Description and Estimate of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the CommissionNumber does not collect data on the number of employeesSmall forEntities licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to Which Rules Will Apply 42. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small entities that may be affected by the rules adopted herein. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small-business concern” under the SBA'sSmall Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business sizeapplies standard.unless 56.an 3650-3700agency, MHzafter Band.consultation Wirelesswith broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700Office MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrialAdvocacy operations,of utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650Small MHzBusiness bandAdministration (and i.e.,after 3650-3700opportunity MHz).for Licenseespublic comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are permittedappropriate to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700activities MHzof band fall in the Wirelessagency Telecommunicationsand Carrierspublishes (such exceptdefinition(s) Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entireFederal year.Register Of.) thisA number,“small-business 2,837concern” firmsis employedone fewerwhich: than(1) 250is employees.independently (Theowned availableand U.S.operated; Census(2) Bureauis data does not providedominant a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in thisits industryfield can be considered small. 57. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licenseesoperation; inand this(3) servicesatisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA. 43. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small internetentities Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that could be directly affected herein. First, while there wereare 902industry activespecific licensessize standards for small businesses that are used in the 3650-3700regulatory MHzflexibility band.analysis, (Basedaccording on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to data from the numberSBA's Office of licensees.Advocacy, Ain licenseegeneral cana have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 58. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governedan byindependent partbusiness 74having fewer than 500 employees. These types of Titlesmall 47businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the Commission'sUnited Rules.States, Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relaytranslates signals from a remote location back to 33.2 million businesses. 44. Next, the studio.)type Theyof alsosmall includeentity thedescribed Upperas Microwavea Flexible“small Useorganization” is generally any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field. The Internal Revenue Service (UMFUS),(IRS) Millimeteruses Wavea Servicerevenue (70/80/90benchmark GHz),of Local$50,000 Multipointor Distributionless Serviceto (LMDS),delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the Digitalpopulation Electronicof Messageless Servicethan (DEMS),50,000 24benchmark GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some5 bandsU.S.C. licensees601(5) canthat choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the closestIRS industrybenchmark with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or fewerdominant employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in thisits industryfield.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Censusreporting Bureaurevenues data does not provide a more precise estimate of $50,000 or less according to the numberregistration and tax data for exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of firmsthis description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that meetincludes the SBAcontinental sizeU.S., standard.)Alaska, Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 59. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installmentHawaii. paymentsThis indata does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 45. Finally, the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businessesentity baseddescribed average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 60. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand. U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general matter,purpose governments and special purpose governments in the numberUnited States. (The Census of winningGovernments bidderssurvey thatis qualifyconducted asevery smallfive businesses(5) atyears thecompiling close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licenseesyears providingending these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active“2” licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 61. Broadband Radio Service and Educational“7”.) Broadband(Local Service.governmental Broadbandjurisdictions Radioare Servicemade systems,up previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of thegeneral Broadbandpurpose Radiogovernments Service(county, (BRS)municipal, and Educationaltown Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatorytownship) purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and otherspecial multichannelpurpose videogovernments programming(special distributors.districts Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBSindependent channelsschool todistricts).) numerousOf receiversthis number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (2,105 county, 18,729 municipal, and 16,097 town and township governments) with antennas,populations such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments (independent school districts) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the transmissionspecial dependspurpose upongovernments category also includes local special district governments, the transmitter2017 power,Census the type of receivingGovernments antennadata anddoes not provide data aggregated based on population size for the existencespecial purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of aGovernments line-of-sightdata, pathwe betweenestimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the transmittercategory or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 62. In light of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the usesum of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closestnumber industryof general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with apopulations SBAof smallless businessthan size50,000 standard(36,931) applicableand to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firmsspecial thatpurpose meetgovernments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the SBA2017 sizeCensus standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licenseesGovernments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 46. Wired Broadband internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in this industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the followingscope radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the numberInternet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of licensees.wired Abroadband licenseeinternet canaccess haveservice include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more licenses.)precise Theestimate Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auctionnumber of BRSfirms licenses,that meet the SBA size standard.) 47. Additionally, according to Commission adopteddata criteriaon forinternet threeaccess groupsservices as of smallJune businesses.30, A2019, verynationwide smallthere businesswere isapproximately an2,747 entityproviders that,of togetherconnections withover its200 affiliateskbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include asymmetric and controllingsymmetric interests,digital hassubscriber averageline annual(aDSL gross revenues exceed $3 million and didsDSL) not(collectively exceedxDSL), $15Other millionWireline, forCable Modem, and fiber to the precedingpremises three(FTTP).) years,Other awireline smallincludes: businessall iscopper-wire anbased entitytechnologies that,other togetherthan withxDSL its(such affiliatesas Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and controllingT3/DS-1) interests,as haswell averageas grosspower revenuesline exceedtechnologies $15which millionare andincluded didin this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not exceedcollect $40data millionon for the precedingnumber threeof years,employees and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the precedingnumber three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of providers that would qualify as small under the winningSBA's bidders claiming a small business statussize classificationstandard. However, in light of the BRSgeneral licensedata auctionon hasfixed antechnology activeservice licenseproviders in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 48. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as voice over internet protocol (VoIP) service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of DecemberAll 2021.Other (WeTelecommunications. note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 64. The Commission'sSBA small business size standardsstandard for EBSthis defineindustry aclassifies smallfirms business as an entity that, together with itsannual affiliates,receipts its controlling interests and the affiliates of its$35 controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the precedingentire fiveyear. (5)Of years,those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a verymajority small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of itsfirms controllingin interests,this hasindustry averagecan grossbe revenuesconsidered small. 2. Wireline Providers 49. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that arethey notown moreand/or thanlease $20 million for the precedingtransmission five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winningvoice, biddersdata, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that qualifythey operate to provide a variety of services, such as smallwired businessestelephony atservices, theincluding closeVoIP ofservices, anwired auction(cable) doesaudio notand necessarilyvideo representprogramming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the numberfollowing types of smallproviders: businessesIncumbent currentlyLocal inExchange service.Carriers Further,(ILECs), theCompetitive CommissionAccess doesProviders (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not generallyincluded track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this timeindustry.) we50. areThe notSBA able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard.standard 4.for SatelliteWired ServiceTelecommunications ProvidersCarriers 65.classifies Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms “primarilyhaving engaged1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications.” Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2422,964 firms hadoperated revenuewith fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.standard.) We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 654,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellitefixed telecommunicationslocal services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately4,146 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 51. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a littlesize morestandard thanfor half of these providers can be considered small entities.businesses 66.specifically Allapplicable Otherto Telecommunications.local Thisexchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with onean SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or morefixed terrestriallocal systemsservice providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and capableCompetitive ofLocal transmittingExchange telecommunicationsCarriers to,(CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and receivingOther telecommunicationsLocal from,Service satelliteProviders.) systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g. dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of thosethis firms,number, 1,0392,964 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.standard.) WeAdditionally, alsobased note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the majoritySBA's small business size standard, most of “Allthese Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 67. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers maycan notbe provideconsidered telephonesmall service.entities. Accordingly,52. weIncumbent describeLocal belowExchange otherCarriers types( ofIncumbent LECs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that maythere were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 68. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscriptionmore orprecise feeestimate basis.of Thethe broadcastnumber programmingof isfirms typicallythat narrowcastmeet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in naturethe (2022 e.g.,Universal limitedService format,Monitoring suchReport, as news,of sports,December education,31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or youth-oriented).fewer Theseemployees. establishmentsConsequently, produceusing programmingthe inSBA's their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 53. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for thissmall industrybusinesses classifiesspecifically firmsapplicable with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoidlocal disclosingexchange dataservices. forProviders individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of lessthese thanservices $25include millionseveral atypes year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25competitive millionlocal orexchange more.service (Theproviders. available(Competitive U.S.Local CensusExchange BureauService dataProviders doesinclude not provide a more precise estimate of the numberfollowing types of firmsproviders: thatCompetitive meetAccess Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. WeThe noteSBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data fordoes individualnot companiesprovide (seea Cellmore Notesprecise forestimate of the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standardstandard.) wouldAdditionally, bebased higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 54. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a majority of firms in this industry are small. 69. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the purposeclosest of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data,with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there arewere about3,054 420firms cablethat companiesoperated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. OfCensus these,Bureau onlydata sevendoes havenot provide a more thanprecise 400,000estimate subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 70. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is “a cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregatenumber fewer than one percent of allfirms subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000.” For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definitionSBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of aDecember 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small cablebusiness operator.size (Instandard, the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determinedestimates that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cableproviders systemin operators are small under this industry can be considered small entities. 55. Operator Service Providers ( OSPs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard.standard Wespecifically notefor however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appealsservice providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a localbusiness franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cableif operatorit pursuanthas to1,500 §or 76.901(e)fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cablefirms system operators that wouldmeet qualify as small cable operators under the definitionSBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the Communications2022 Act.Universal 6.Service AllMonitoring OtherReport, Telecommunications 71. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of “establishments,December primarily31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the followingprovision activities:of (1)operator operateservices. generationOf facilitiesthese providers, the Commission estimates that produceall electric20 energy;providers (2)have operate1,500 transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or fewer employees. Consequently, using the transmissionSBA's systemsmall business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 56. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the finalcategories consumer.”of Thisinterexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry groupwith isan categorizedSBA basedsmall onbusiness fuelsize sourcestandard. and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control and Electric Power Distribution. 72. The SBA has established a small business size standard for eachWired ofTelecommunications theseCarriers groupsclassifies based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,5522,964 firms hadoperated lesswith fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) BasedAdditionally, based on thisCommission data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. D. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements for Small Entities 73. In the FNPRM,2022 weUniversal seekService commentMonitoring onReport, waysas to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment. Some of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these proposalsproviders, may impose new or additional reporting or recordkeeping and/or other compliance obligations on small entities. Specifically, we seek comment on a proposal that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility'sCommission polesestimates inthat a87 state.providers Wehave also1,500 seek comment on whether NCTA's proposal to add additional time to the existing application timelines for larger orders and prohibit utilities from limiting the size of an application or fewer employees. Consequently, using the numberSBA's small business size standard, most of poles included in an application, to avoid these timelines,providers willcan facilitatebe considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 57. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the poleapproximately attachment800 processmembers of the Wireless internet Service Providers Association (WISPA), including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for such orders. Additionally, we seek comment on whether the Commissionpurposes should create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of polesthis FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles. We also consider whether to require that a utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the surveyextent within the requiredwireless 45-dayservices period,listed makingbelow self-helpare availableused by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the estimateactions process,may whichhave isan impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not contemplatednecessarily underrepresent current Commission rules. We also seek comment on whether attachers face any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke self-help options, which allows attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utilitynumber fails to meet the Commission's deadlines. This information will help to inform whether potential rule changes are necessary. At this time, the Commission cannot quantify the cost of compliance for small entitiesbusinesses withcurrently in service. Also, the approaches discussed in the FNPRM, or whether any compliance requirements will require small entities to hire professionals; however, the Commission requestsdoes informationnot ongenerally track subsequent business size unless, in the costscontext of assignments and benefitstransfers ofor reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 58. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) . This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the approachesairwaves. discussed,Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the availabilityentire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of qualified contractors and other workforce constraints that may impact the speednumber and cost of deploymentfirms for utilities and attachers. E. Steps Taken To Minimize the Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 74. The RFA requires an agency to describe any significant, specifically small business, alternatives that itmeet has considered in reaching its proposed approach, which may include the followingSBA foursize alternativesstandard.) (amongAdditionally, others):based “(1)on Commission data in the establishment2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of differingDecember compliance31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or reportingfewer requirementsemployees. orConsequently, timetablesusing that take into account the resourcesSBA's available to small entities;business (2)size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 59. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the clarification,provision consolidation, or simplification of compliancewireless andcommunications reportingservices requirementsin underseveral frequency bands subject to part 27 of the ruleCommission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for suchthis industry classifies a business as small entities;if (3)it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the useentire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of performance rather than design standards; and (4) an exemption from coverage of the rule,number orof anyfirms part thereof, for such small entities.” 75. The FNPRM seeks comment on whether the Commission should revise its rules to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment, including a tentative conclusion that utilitiesmeet should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility'sSBA polessize standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in a state. The Commission's objective in requesting this informationindustry is to determine whether it can be considered small. 60. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and shouldinstallment establishpayments clear standards for when and how attachers and utilities must share the costs of a pole replacement precipitated by a new attachment request. Among the alternatives considered in the FNPRMauction isof whetherlicenses for the Commissionvarious shouldfrequency allowbands additionalincluded time for the existing larger order timelines where our current rules require that utilities negotiate timing in goodWCS. faith.When Webidding seekcredits commentare onadopted whether requiring that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period would allow the attacher to elect self-help for the surveyauction sooner. In the alternative, we inquire whether such expansion of timelicenses isin reasonableWCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for utilities if numerous permits are submitted around the sameauction timeand/or oras contractoridentified workloadin is heavy. We also consider whether attachers are choosing to find their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when utilities fail to meet the designated entities section in part 27 of the Commission's deadlines.rules Similarly,for we request information on whether or not utilities designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher. We also seek comment on how the specific WCS frequency bands. (The Designated entities sections in subparts D through Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 61. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission cannotes helpthat resolveas situationsa wheregeneral labormatter, shortages may hinder utilities from meeting deadlines to respond to attachers. The Commission also seeks comment on and will consider the relativenumber costs and benefits of anywinning suchbidders revisions to its rules. Information submitted in response to these requests for comment will enable the Commission to evaluate the impact that revisingqualify itsas polesmall attachmentbusinesses rulesat would have on smaller entities. F. Federal Rules That May Duplicate, Overlap, or Conflict With the Proposedclose Rules 76. None. V. Procedural Matters 77. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act, the Commission has prepared an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of an auction does not necessarily represent the possiblenumber significant economic impact on small entities of small businesses currently in service. Further, the policiesCommission anddoes rulesnot addressedgenerally track subsequent business size unless, in this FNPRM. Written public comments are requested on the IRFA.context Comments must be filed by the deadlines for comments on the FNPRM indicated on the first page of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this documenttime we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 62. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mustmobile haveuses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a separatebusiness and distinct heading designating them as responsessmall toif it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the IRFA.entire Theyear. Commission'sOf Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference Information Center, will send a copy of this FNPRM,number, including2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the IRFA,number to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of firms that meet the SBA.SBA 78.size Paperworkstandard.) ReductionThus, Act.under The FNPRM contains proposed new information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the generalSBA publicsize andstandard, OMB to comment on the informationCommission collectionestimates requirementsthat containeda majority of licensees in this document,industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995,November Public2021, Lawthere 104-13.were Inthree addition,active pursuantlicenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the Smallnumber Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002,licensees. PublicA Lawlicensee 107-198,can seehave 44one U.S.C.or 3506(c)(4),more welicenses.) seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. 79. Ex Parte Presentations—Permit-But-Disclose. The proceeding this FNPRM initiates shall be treated as a “permit-but-disclose” proceeding in accordance with the Commission's exsmall parte rules. Persons making ex parte presentations must file a copy of any written presentation or a memorandum summarizing any oral presentation within two business dayssize afterstandards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the presentationauction (unlessof licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a different“small deadlinebusiness” applicableis todefined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the Sunshinepreceding periodthree applies).years, Persons making oral ex parte presentations are reminded that memoranda summarizing the presentation must (1) list all persons attending or otherwise participating in the meeting at which the ex parte presentation was made, and (2)a summarize“very allsmall databusiness” presentedis defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and argumentscontrolling madeinterests, duringhas had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the presentation.preceding Ifthree years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 64. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the presentationCommission consistednotes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in wholeservice. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or intransfers, partunjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the presentationnumber of datalicensees orwith argumentsactive alreadylicenses reflectedthat inwould qualify as small under the presenter'sSBA's writtensmall comments,business memorandasize orstandard. other65. filingsWireless inTelephony. theWireless proceeding,telephony theincludes presentercellular, maypersonal providecommunications citationsservices, toand suchspecialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data orfor arguments2017 inshow histhat orthere herwere prior2,893 comments,firms memoranda,that oroperated otherfor filings (specifying the relevantentire pageyear. and/orOf paragraphthis numbersnumber, where2,837 suchfirms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data ordoes argumentsnot canprovide bea found)more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in lieu of summarizing them in the memorandum.2022 DocumentsUniversal shownService Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or givenfewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to Commissionthese staffservices duringis exWireless parteTelecommunications meetingsCarriers are(except deemedSatellite). toThe beSBA writtensmall exbusiness partesize presentationsstandard and must be filed consistent with § 1.1206(b) of the Commission's rules. In proceedings governed by § 1.49(f) of the Commission's rules or for whichthis industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission hasestimates made available a method of electronic filing, written ex parte presentations and memoranda summarizing oral ex parte presentations, and all attachments thereto, must be filed through the electronic comment filing system available for that proceeding,a andmajority must be filed in their native format ( e.g., .doc, .xml, .ppt, searchable .pdf). Participants in this proceeding should familiarize themselves with the Commission's ex parte rules. VI. Ordering Clauses 80. Accordingly, it is ordered , pursuant to sections 4(i), 4(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), and 403 of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 67. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the CommunicationsBroadband ActPCS service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of 1934,active aslicenses amended,does 47not U.S.C.equate 154(i),to 154(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), 403, that this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking is adopted . 81. It is further ordered that the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's Consumersmall business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and Governmentalinstallment Affairspayments Bureau, Reference information Center, shall send a copy of this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, including the Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA), to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Katura Jackson, Federal Register Liaison Officer. Proposed Rules The Federal Communications Commission proposes to amend part 1 of Title 47 of the Codeauction of Federallicenses Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for partthese 1services. continuesIn toauctions read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Amend § 1.1411 by revising paragraph (g)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for accessthese tolicenses, utility poles. (g) * * * (4) A utility may add 90 days to the make-readyCommission periodsdefined described“small inbusiness” paragraphas (e)an ofentity thisthat, sectiontogether towith allits requestsaffiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for attachment larger than the lesserpreceding ofthree 3000years, poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. [List of Subjects] List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure.a [Initial Paperwork“very Reductionsmall Actbusiness” of 1995 Analysis] This document may contain proposed information collection requirements. The Commission, as partan ofentity that, together with its continuingaffiliates effortand controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 68. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to reduceauction, paperwork burdens, invites the Commission notes that as a general publicmatter, to comment on the informationnumber collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995,winning Publicbidders Lawthat 104-13.qualify Commentsas shouldsmall address:businesses (a)at whether the proposedclose collection of informationan isauction necessarydoes not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the propernumber performance of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the functionsSBA's ofsmall business size standard. 69. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the Commission,800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including whetherbut not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under part 90 of the information shall have practical utility; (b) the accuracy of the Commission's burdenrules. estimates;Wireless (c)Telecommunications waysCarriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to enhancethese services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the quality,entire utility,year. andOf claritythis number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the informationnumber collected; (d) ways to minimize the burden of firms that meet the collectionSBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of informationDecember on31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the respondents,Commission includingestimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the useSBA's of automated collection techniques or other forms of information technology; and (e) way to further reduce the information collection burden on small business concernssize withstandard, fewerthese than119 25SMR employees.licensees Incan addition,be pursuantconsidered to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small businessentities. concerns(We withnote fewerthat thanthere 25were employees.also [Comment PeriodSMR andproviders Filingreporting Procedures]in Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's“Cellular/PCS/SMR” rules,classification, 47therefore CFRthere 1.415,are 1.419,maybe interestedadditional partiesSMR mayproviders filethat commentshave andnot replybeen commentsaccounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 70. Based on orCommission beforedata as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the datesnumber indicated on the first page of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this document.time Commentswe mayare not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be filedconsidered small entities using the Commission'sSBA's Electronicsmall Commentbusiness Filingsize Systemstandard. (ECFS)71. orLower by700 paper.MHz CommentersBand shouldLicenses. referThe tolower WC700 DocketMHz No.band 21-341encompasses whenspectrum filing in responsethe to698-746 thisMHz FNPRM.frequency bands. ElectronicPermissible Filers:operations Commentsin maythese bebands filedinclude electronicallyflexible byfixed, accessingmobile, ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to file by paper must file an original and onebroadcast copyuses, ofincluding eachmobile filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and untilother furtherdigital notice,new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including frequency division duplex (FDD)- and time division duplex (TDD)-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the Commissionclosest noindustry longerwith acceptsan anySBA handsmall business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or messengerfewer deliveredemployees. filings. • Commercial overnight mail (other than U.S. PostalCensus ServiceBureau Expressdata Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050 Junction Drive, Annapolis Junction, MD 20701. U.S. Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority Mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. People with Disabilities: To request materials in accessible formats for people2017 withshow disabilitiesthat (braille,there largewere print,2,893 electronicfirms files,that audiooperated format),in sendthis anindustry email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at 202-418-0530 (voice), 202-418-0432 (TTY). [I. Introduction] 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission remainsestimates committedthat a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 72. According to ensuringCommission consumersdata across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever federal investment in broadband, as wellof asDecember other2021, federalthere andwere stateapproximately broadband2,824 deploymentactive programs,Lower more700 fundingMHz thanBand everlicenses. is(Based availableon an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to build the necessarynumber infrastructureof licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to bringLower much-needed700 broadbandMHz servicesBand tolicensees unservedinvolve eligibility for bidding credits and underservedinstallment areaspayments in the Unitedauction States.of Keylicenses. toFor theseauctions broadbandof projectsLower are700 MHz Band licenses the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has takenaverage significantannual stepsgross inrevenues settingnot exceeding $15 million for the “rulespreceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the road”preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the discussionspreceding betweenthree utilitiesyears. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and telecommunicationsthree companieswinning aboutbidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 73. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdictionnotes those pole attachments in states that haveas electeda togeneral regulatematter, pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the Districtnumber of Columbiawinning havebidders optedthat outqualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission regulationdoes not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of poleassignments attachmentsor intransfers, theirunjust jurisdictions.enrichment Theissues Commission'sare poleimplicated. attachmentAdditionally, rulessince currently only apply to cable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission'sCommission poledoes attachmentnot rulescollect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to broadband-onlyestimate internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the polenumber attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of polelicensees attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with informationactive aboutlicenses that would qualify as small under the statusSBA's ofsmall business size standard. 74. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the utility746-806 polesMHz theybands. planUpper to700 useMHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as theywell map out their broadband builds. Additionally, as afixed follow-onand tomobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the poleclosest replacementindustry clarificationwith issuedan SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the 2021entire Poleyear. ReplacementOf Declaratory Ruling, in the Declaratory Ruling below we provide further clarification regarding cost causation when a pole must be replaced for any reason other than lacking capacity to support a new attachment. Specifically, we clarify that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a “redmore tagged”precise poleestimate is one that the utility has identified as needing replacement for any reason other than the pole's lack of capacity, and we provide additional examples of when a pole replacement is not “necessitated solely” as a result of a third party's attachment or modification request— i.e., when a pole already requires replacement at the timenumber of firms that meet the newSBA attachersize makesstandard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a request.majority We also clarify the obligation to share easement information and the applicable timelines for the processing of attachmentlicensees requests for 3,000 or more poles. Finally, we seek comment in this industry can be considered small. 75. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the FNPRMfollowing onradio waysservice(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to further facilitate the processingnumber of polelicensees. attachmentA applicationslicensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and make-readyinstallment topayments enable faster broadband deployment. [II. Background] 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the pole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act,auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission determineddefined that when a modification,“small suchbusiness” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a pole“very replacement,small isbusiness” undertakenan entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the benefitpreceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the benefitingtwelve partyavailable mustlicenses. assume76. theAir-Ground costRadiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the modification.800 (SectionMHz 224(h)air-ground statesspectrum. 77. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that “[w]heneverthere were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the ownerentire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the ownernumber shall provide written notification of suchfirms action to any entity that hasmeet obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the costsSBA incurredsize bystandard.) Thus, under the ownerSBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in makingthis suchindustry pole,can duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible.” Section 224(i) states that “[a]n entity that obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be requiredconsidered tosmall. bear78. anyBased on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the costsAir-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of rearrangingactive licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or replacingmore licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its attachment,affiliates ifand suchcontrolling rearrangementinterests, orhas replacementaverage isgross requiredrevenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (includingthat, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the ownerpreceding three years. In the auction of suchAir-Ground pole,Radiotelephone duct,Service conduit,licenses orin right-of-way).”) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification,800 MHz band, neither of the utilitytwo mustwinning bearbidders claimed small business status. 79. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the full cost of the new pole. The Commission furthernotes adoptedthat as a costgeneral sharingmatter, principlethe fornumber whenof winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an existingauction attacherdoes usesnot anecessarily modificationrepresent by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018number Wireline Infrastructure Order, the Commission reiterated that application of small businesses currently in service. Further, the cost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the Internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to clarifyestimate its rules in the contextnumber of polelicensees replacements.with Specifically,active NCTAlicenses askedthat would qualify as small under the CommissionSBA's small business size standard. 80. 3650-3700 MHz band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to declareprovide that:services (1) utilities must share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, section 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the Accelerated3650-3700 DocketMHz underband §fall 1.736in of the Commission'sWireless rules;Telecommunications andCarriers (3)(except §Satellite) 1.1407(b)industry of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with polean replacementsSBA willsmall inhibitbusiness attacherssize fromstandard deploying broadband services to Americans in unserved areas. 5. In the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “itclassifies is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking,business whichas providessmall if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission withestimates greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 81. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the recordlicenses developed in response to the NCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are notsmall solelyinternet causedAccess byService Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the new3650-3700 attacherMHz and,band. thus,(Based may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice (87 FR 25181; Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the universefollowing radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of situationsactive wherelicenses does not equate to the requestingnumber attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of alicensees. poleA replacementlicensee andcan have one or more licenses.) However, since the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that this Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second Further Notice, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission soughtdoes comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not causedcollect (necessitateddata solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the costs of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extentnumber of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to whichestimate utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costsnumber of polelicensees upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second Further Notice also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potentialactive attacherslicenses concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that maywould helpqualify avoidas orsmall expediteunder the resolutionSBA's small business size standard. 82. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of disputestitle 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the parties,studio.) includingThey whetheralso toinclude expand use of the Commission'sUpper AcceleratedMicrowave DocketFlexible forUse poleService attachment(UMFUS), complaintsMillimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the specificclosest criteriaindustry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that Commissionthere staffwere should2,893 usefirms that operated in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. [III. Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking] 7. We recognize that Congress has undertaken a number of initiatives allocating funding to further the deployment of broadband to unserved and underserved areas of the United States. In connection with this funding,industry broadband providers will have to deploy extensive facilities. This, in turn will require that they file significant numbers of applications seeking to attach these facilities to large numbers of poles. To that end, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for polethe attachmententire applicationsyear. andOf make-readythis tonumber, enable2,837 speedierfirms broadbandemployed deployment.fewer Inthan seeking250 commentemployees. on(The theseavailable areas,U.S. weCensus emphasizeBureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that evenmeet whenthe thereSBA issize notstandard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a specificmajority Commission rule or policy that governs a particular situation, it is our expectation that parties negotiate in good faith to resolve issues that may arise. 8. Large Orders. We tentatively conclude that we should adopt a defined make-ready timeline for orders that exceed 3,000 poles or 5 percent of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 83. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the utility'sauction poles in a state in order to facilitate the processing of polelicenses attachmentfor applications that are submitted in large numbers. We seek comment on this tentative conclusion. Our current make-ready rule requires make-ready in the communicationsvarious spacefrequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to beseveral completedtypes within 30 days after the utility sends a notification to all existing attachers on a pole. (The rule provides 90 days from attachments above the communications space.) The 30-day timeframe applies for communications space make-ready requests up to the lesser of 300small polesbusinesses orbased 0.5average percentgross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the utility's poles in a state. This make-ready timeframe is extended 45 extra days for requests up to the lesser of 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. For requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in the state, the Commission's rules requirefor that a utility shall negotiate the timingspecific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 84. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the make-readyclose of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in goodservice. faith.Further, (As we clarify in the DeclaratoryCommission Rulingdoes accompanyingnot generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this FNPRM,time we are not able to estimate the firstnumber 3,000 poles of theselicensees largewith ordersactive arelicenses subject to the timeline set forth in § 1.1411(g)(3).) We tentatively conclude that utilitieswould shouldqualify haveas ansmall additionalunder 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility'sSBA's polessmall inbusiness asize statestandard. 85. Broadband Radio Service and seekEducational commentBroadband onService. thisBroadband tentativeRadio conclusion.Service 9.systems, NCTApreviously assertsreferred thatto ouras rulesMultipoint doDistribution notService at(MDS) present sufficiently address the needs of attachers with these larger requests in the latter category. For example, NCTA asserts that its members have faced situations where the utilities have imposed limits on (1) the number of poles that may be included in any one application, and (2)Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the numbermicrowave frequencies of applications an attacher may submit at a time. NCTA states that these limitations “create problematic delays and jeopardize operators' ability to meet broadband build-out commitments.” At the sameBroadband time,Radio USTelecomService notes(BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the difficultiesInstructional presentedTelevision byFixed theseService very(ITFS)). large(The orders,use notingof the term “wireless cable” does not imply that “make-readyit requestsconstitutes involvingcable moretelevision than 3,000 poles require flexibility that make-ready timelines cannot provide, given the many outside factors that impact the time required for make-readystatutory foror suchregulatory largepurposes.) orders,Wireless includingcable permittingoperators delays,that workforceuse shortagesspectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and staffing issues, and the coordination required among all the attachers to the poles.” Given these factors, would 90 additional days over the timeline set forth in § 1.411(e) be sufficient for processing these larger orders? Would some other amountmultichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of timecoaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be reasonabledescribed inas alla circumstances,microwave orstation shouldtransmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the Commissiontransmission createdepends additionalupon make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles? If the Commissiontransmitter werepower, to adopt additional make-ready timeline tiers, what would be an appropriate cut off number of poles for each tier? For instance, should the Commissiontype add an additional number of daysreceiving forantenna applicationand processing per 3,000 poles? Does the abilityexistence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 86. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to deviatethese fromservices is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the timelinesentire specifiedyear. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in §this 1.1411industry providecan utilities with enough flexibility such that imposing a 90 additional day limit would be reasonable?considered 10.small. We87. alsoAccording seek comment on NCTA's proposal that the Commission revise its rules to prohibitCommission utilitiesdata from limiting “the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application so as toDecember avoid2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the timelines.”following Howradio prevalentservice(s)”, areRadio situationsService = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the typenumber described by NCTA? Are the reasons underlying utilities' imposition of suchlicensees. limitationsA aslicensee laidcan outhave byone USTelecom valid, and do other reasons exist for these limitations? Would prohibiting utilities from imposing such limitations in fact speed up the attachment process, or wouldmore licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the sameauction delays still exist for other reasons ( e.g., lack of qualifiedlicenses workers, shortages in materials, etc.) or even, as USTelecom alleges, “ultimately slow—rather than—accelerate deployment”? Specifically, NCTA proposes adding additional time to the existing timelines for these “larger”services. orders, for which our rules require that utilities negotiate the timing in good faith. Would NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders? Utilities have raised multiple concerns with such requirements. For example, they assert that compliance with expanded timelines may not be possible “if many permit applications by multiple attachers are submitted at approximately the sameauction time,of orBRS iflicenses, the contractor'sCommission workloadadopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is already heavy.” They also assert that given constraints on workforce availability, utilities would be forced to “choose between providing safe, reliable and affordable power to electric customers (which is mandated by the states), and performing requested pole replacements in an unreasonableentity that, together with its affiliates and likelycontrolling unattainableinterests, amounthas ofaverage time.”annual Aregross theserevenues concernsexceed valid?$3 Aremillion there any other reasons why NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders would not work? What are the respective costs and benefitsdid ofnot suchexceed potential$15 requirements?million What other steps could we take to facilitate the pole attachment process for larger orders? 11. Self-Help and Use of Contractors. Should the Commissionpreceding considerthree modifyingyears, a small business is an entity that, together with its self-helpaffiliates rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly? NCTA also asserts that it has faced issues with utilities failing to process attachment applications in a timely manner. NCTA therefore proposes that utilities notify attachers in advance of survey and make-readycontrolling deadlinesinterests, ifhas average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the utilitypreceding willthree beyears, unableand to complete a portion of the process. For instance, NCTA proposes that the utility notify an attacherentrepreneur 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period so that the attacher can elect self-help for the survey sooner. NCTA also proposes making self-help available for the estimate process, which is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not contemplatedexceeding under$3 currentmillion Commissionfor rules. We seek comment on NCTA's proposal. (We decline NCTA's request to adopt rules in the Fourthpreceding Reportthree years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and Ordertwo regardingbidders self-helpclaiming andentrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the usewinning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of contractors.December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We findnote that these issues would be better addressed after a more comprehensive record is developed.) How prevalent is the issuenumber cited by NCTA? Can utilities feasibly be required to inform attachers within 15 business days of receivingactive licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 88. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a completedsmall applicationbusiness as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that they will be unable to conduct a survey, estimate, or make-ready within the required time period? Do sufficient contractors exist that meet the minimum qualification requirements set forth in our rules such that adoption of NCTA's proposal would have the desired effect of speeding broadband deployment? What are not more than $55 million for the respectivepreceding costsfive (5) years, and benefitsa very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of adoptingits NCTA'scontrolling proposal?interests, Arehas thereaverage othergross waysrevenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to assistauction, utilities in processing the largerCommission notes that as a general matter, the number of applicationswinning theybidders willthat likelyqualify receiveas small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the comingCommission monthsdoes andnot yearsgenerally basedtrack subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the fundingnumber initiatives in place for accelerating broadband deployment to unserved and underserved areas? 12. We also seek comment on the impact of contractoremployees availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready for surveyslicensees andproviding make-readythese work.services, Specifically,at dothis time we need to amend the Commission's rules to make it easier for attachers to use their own contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready surveys and make-ready work when there are nonot contractorsable available from a utility list? Utility commenters point out the labor constraints in the contractor workforce; given such constraints, do our current rules provide adequate relief to attachersestimate to timely identify and use qualified contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready work? If not, what can the Commissionnumber doof licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 89. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to changeother establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications. Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this dynamic?industry 13.classifies Pursuanta tobusiness ourwith rules,$35 anmillion attacher can do its own work when (1) completing surveys and make-ready work when the utility misses the deadlines for these activities, or (2)less electingin toannual usereceipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the one-touchentire make-readyyear. process.Of (Notethis number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there arewere no65 attacherproviders self-help remedies for pole replacements.) When conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready work, the attacher must use a utility-approved contractor. For self-help surveys and make-ready work that isreported complexthey were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 90. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is abovecomprised the communications space on a pole, our rules require that a utility make available and keep up to date a reasonably sufficient list of contractorsestablishments thatprimarily itengaged authorizesin toproviding performspecialized telecommunications services, such work. (The term “complex make-ready” means transfers and work within the communications space on a pole that would be reasonably likely to cause a service outage(s) or facility damage, including work such as splicingsatellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of anytransmitting communicationtelecommunications attachmentto, or relocation of existing wireless attachments. Any and allreceiving wirelesstelecommunications activities,from, includingsatellite thosesystems. involvingProviders mobile,of fixed, and point-to-point wireless communications and wireless internet serviceservices providers,( e.g., dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are toalso beincluded considered complex.) Attachers can request to add contactors to the utility's list—provided the contractor meets the minimum qualifications in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the Commission'sentire rules—andyear. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the utilitynumber cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. Further, a utility may, but is not required to, keep up-to-date a reasonably sufficient list of contractorsfirms it authorizes to perform surveys and simple make-ready. If a utility provides such a list, then the new attacher must choose a contractor from the list to perform the work. Again, attachers may request the addition to the list of any contractor that meetsmeet the minimumSBA qualificationssize instandard. We also note that according to the Commission'sU.S. rules,Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the utilityCommission cannotestimates unreasonablythat withhold its consent. However, if the utilitymajority does not provide a list of approved“All contractorsOther forTelecommunications” surveysfirms orcan simple make-ready work or no utility-approved contractor is available within a reasonable time period, then the new attacher may choose its own qualified contractor who meets the Commission's minimum requirements. Utilities retain the right to disqualify such contractor, but disqualification must be basedconsidered onsmall. reasonable5. safetyCable orService reliabilityProviders concerns91. relatedBecause section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the contractor'sdeployment failure to meet any of thebroadband Commission'susing minimumany qualificationstechnology, orwe toanticipate meet the utility's publicly available and commercially reasonable safety or reliability standards. The utility must provide notice of this objection to the attacher and must identify at least one available qualified contractor that thesome attacherbroadband canservice useproviders insteadmay tonot performprovide simpletelephone surveysservice. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and make-readyutilities, work.among 14.others. Given92. thatCable our current rules allow for attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for self-help when the utilitybroadcasting fails to meet the Commission's deadlines (provided such contractors meet the minimum qualifications set forth in our rules), we seek comment on whether attachers are availing themselves of thisprograms option.on Have attachers faced any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke this option? While a utilitysubscription cannotor befee blamedbasis. forThe broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a lackthird ofparty, availablesuch contractorsas cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in anthis areaindustry dueduring that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to workforceavoid constraints,disclosing aredata utilities seeking to use their discretion set forth in the rules to disqualify otherwise-qualified contractors whom attachers may seek to bring in from outside of an area? We note that, at least for surveysindividual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and simple44 make-readyfirms work,operated ourwith currentrevenue rulesof already$25 requiremillion or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the utilitynumber of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to designateavoid andisclosing availabledata contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher—is this not being done? If not, is it due to labor constraints for whichindividual companies (see Cell Notes for the utilitysales/value should not be held responsible? In the instance where no qualified contractors are available for a project, how could the Commission help to solve that problem? [IV. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis] 15. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980,shipments/revenue as amended (RFA), the Commission has prepared this Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities by the policies and rules proposed in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this FNPRM.data, The Commission requests written public comments on this IRFA. Comments must be identified as responses to the IRFA and must be filed by the deadlines for comments provided on the first page of the FNPRM. The Commission willestimates sendthat a copymajority of firms in this industry are small. 93. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the FNPRM,purpose including this IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of cable rate regulation. Under the Small Business Administration (SBA). In addition, the FNPRM and IRFA (or summaries thereof) will be published in the Federal Register . A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Proposed Rules 16. In order to continue the Commission's workrules, combating illegal calls, this FNPRM proposes to impose several obligations on gateway providers. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to require gateway providers to authenticate and employ robocall mitigation techniques on all SIP calls that they allow into the United States from abroad that display a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. numberOf these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the callerU.S. IDOf field.these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 94. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The FNPRMCommunications alsoAct proposesof that1934, gatewayas providersamended, shouldcontains engage in robocall mitigation by (1) responding to all traceback requests from the Commission, law enforcement, and the industry traceback consortium within 24 hours; (2) complying with mandatory call blocking requirements; (3) complying with enhanced know-your-customer obligations; (4) complying with a generalsize dutystandard to mitigate illegal robocalls; and (5) filing a certification in the Robocall Mitigation Database. The Commission also proposes one blocking requirement for intermediate and terminating providers immediately downstream from the gateway provider, which would require those providers to block all traffic from a gateway“small providercable thatoperator,” fails to block or effectively mitigate illegal traffic when notified of such traffic by the Commission. B. Legal Basis 17. The FNPRM proposes to find authority largely under those provisions through which itis hasa previouslycable adoptedoperator rules to stem the tide of robocalls in its Call Blocking and Call Authentication Orders. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to find authority under sections 201(a) and (b), 202(a), 251(e), the Truth in Caller ID Act, the TRACED Act and, where appropriate, ancillary authority. The FNPRM also proposes to conclude that, todirectly or through an affiliate, serves in the extentaggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000. For purposes of the rulesTelecom weAct seekStandard, to adopt have an effect on foreign service providers, that effect is only indirect and therefore consistent with the Commission'sCommission authority.determined The FNPRM solicits comment on these proposals. C. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which the Proposed Rules Will Apply 18. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that maya becable affectedsystem byoperator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the proposeddefinition rules,of ifa adopted.small Thecable RFAoperator. generally(In defines the term2023 “smallSubscriber entity”Threshold asPublic havingNotice, the sameCommission meaningdetermined asthat there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the termsUnited “smallStates business,”at “smallthat organization,”time andusing “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the termmost “smallreliable business”source haspublicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the sameCommission meaningissues as the term “small business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small businessunder appliesthis “unlesssize anstandard. agency,We afternote consultationhowever, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the Officeoperator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of Advocacy of the SmallCommission's Businessrules.) AdministrationTherefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 95. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and afterDistributors. opportunityThe forU.S. publicCensus comment,Bureau establishesdefines one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activitiesutilities sector industry as comprised of establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the agencyfollowing activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .”) A “small business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfiesoperate anydistribution additionalsystems criteria established by the SBA. 19. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that areconvey notelectric easilypower received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer. This industry group is categorized atbased present.on Wefuel thereforesource describe,and atincludes theHydroelectric outset,Power threeGeneration, broadFossil groupsFuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control, and Electric Power Distribution. 96. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of smallthese entitiesgroups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatoryElectric flexibilityPower analysis,Generation, accordingTransmission, toand Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data fromdoes not provide a more precise estimate of the Smallnumber Business Administration's (SBA) Office of Advocacy,firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in generalthis industry can be considered small entities. E. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements 97. In the Fourth Report and Order, we (1) establish a smallnew businessprocess isfor an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the UnitedCommission's States,review which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 20. Next, the type of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally “any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operatedassessment and is not dominant in its field.” The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000pole attachment disputes that impede or lessdelay broadband deployment in order to delineateexpedite itsresolution annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the population of lesssuch thandisputes, 50,000and benchmark(2) adopt a new requirement that utilities retain copies of their cyclical pole inspection reports and, upon request, provide prospective pole attachers with the information included in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRSmost benchmarkrecent hasreport beenregarding used to estimate the numberpoles ofaffected smallby organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a smallprospective exemptattacher's organizationsubmitted isattachment independentlyapplication. ownedOur new requirements are minimally burdensome as they merely require (1) parties seeking to have complaints placed on the Accelerated Docket to submit a form to the newly-established Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT) that will elicit information relevant to the scope and operatednature or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less according to the registrationdispute and taxto datawhether the dispute is appropriate for exemptexpedited organizationsmediation availableand/or fromplacement on the IRS.Accelerated (TheDocket, IRSand Exempt(2) Organizationutilities Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000provide information they already collect in the normal course of business for Regioncyclical 1—Northeastpole Areainspection (58,577),reports. Region98. 2—Mid-AtlanticParties seeking both RBAT review and Greatassessment Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 21. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as “governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a populationdispute that a party contends is impeding or delaying deployment of lessbroadband thanfacilities, fifty thousand.” U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and specialinclusion purpose governments in the United States. (The Census of Governmentsa surveyproceeding isrelating conductedto everybroadband fivefacilities (5)deployment yearson compilingthe dataAccelerated forDocket, yearsthe endingparty withmust “2”first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and “7”.)in (Localwriting. governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (county, (there were 2,105 county governments with populations less than 50,000. This categoryinitial doesnotification notby includephone subcounty (municipal and township)in governments)writing municipal,would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and townwould constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b). Additionally, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or townshipmediation (thereunder were§ 18,7291.737 municipalas anda 16,097condition townfor andincluding townshipa governmentsmatter withon populations less than 50,000)) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments—independent school districts (there were 12,040 independent school districts with enrollment populations less than 50,000) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the specialAccelerated purposeDocket. governmentsWe categoryamend alsoour includespole localattachment specialmake-ready districtrules governments,to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the 2017information Censuscontained of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the specialnext purposecyclical governmentsinspection, category.)for Accordingly, based on the 2017poles U.S.covered Censusby a submitted attachment application, including whether any of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the categoryaffected ofpoles “smallhave governmentalbeen jurisdictions.”“red (Thistagged” totalby is derived from the sumutility offor replacement, and the numberscheduled ofreplacement generaldate purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township)timeframe. The record indicates that utilities already prepare such reports, making this new transparency requirement consistent with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the numberexisting ofpractices. specialFor purposethese governments—independentreasons, schoolwe districtsbelieve that small and other utilities will not have an issue complying with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017new Censusobligation. 99. The Commission does not have sufficient information on the record to determine whether small entities will be required to hire professionals to comply with its decisions, or to quantify the cost of Governments—Organizationscompliance tbls.for 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 22. Wired Broadband Internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entityentities industrywith descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the endFourth userReport and Order. While some small entities may have some unique burdens, the Commission anticipates the requirements for pole attachment disputes and data collection by utility companies will have minimal cost implications because many of these obligations are consistent with existing Commission regulations to receivefile informationdisputes, fromand and/orexisting sendpractices informationby utilities to prepare pole inspection reports. F. Steps Taken To Minimize Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 100. The RFA requires an agency to provide a description of the internetsteps at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission'sagency rules.has Wiredtaken broadbandto internetminimize services fall in the Wiredsignificant Telecommunicationseconomic Carriersimpact industry.on The SBA small businessentities sizeincluding standarda statement of the factual, policy, and legal reasons for thisselecting industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entirealternative year.adopted Ofin this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberfinal rule and why each one of firms that meet the SBAother sizesignificant standard.)alternatives 23. Additionally, according to the rule considered by the agency which affect the impact on small entities was rejected. 101. The Commission datatook steps to minimize significant economic impact on internetsmall accessentities services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include aDSL, sDSL, Other Wireline, Cable Modem and FTTP).considered Otheralternatives wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintainnew rules and processes adopted in the confidentialityFourth Report and Order that may impact small entities. By establishing the RBAT, we addressed commenters' request that we expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes, the providers.)delay The Commission does not collect data on the number of employeeswhich formay providersimpose ofgreater theseharm services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities.providers. 24.In Internetconsidering Servicealternatives Providersto (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as VoIP service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industryrules, classificationwe ofdeclined Allto Otheradopt Telecommunications.certain Theproposals SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that thereare wereburdensome, 1,079unnecessary, firmsor would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. For example, we agreed with utilities that they should not be required to gather and provide pole-related data for matters they do not track in this industry that operated for the entirenormal year.course Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of lessbusiness thanthrough $25their million.inspections. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also notedeclined to require that accordingsmall to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenuesother areutilities usedprovide interchangeably.)new Consequently,attachers underwith information about poles prior to the SBAattacher sizesubmitting standardan application because this data would be speculative and the build-out may never occur. Additionally, we declined to establish a majoritysingle pole-information database or require each utility to create a database of firmsall its poles. Similar to our prior decisions on this matter, the record demonstrates that the burdens and costs of creating such a database are considerable given that many utilities own or jointly own poles. Further, the scope of pole data attachers seek exists in information from pole inspection reports we require small and other utility companies to provide in the Fourth Report and Order. We considered and declined to require small and other utilities to provide financial data regarding poles and attachment rates because this industrywould can be overly burdensome for the utilities. We also considered small.but 2.declined Wireline Providers 25. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmissionrequire facilitiessmall and infrastructureother thatutilities they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide ainformation varietyon the age or condition of services,the suchpoles, as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixednumber local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers:current Incumbentor Localpending Exchangeattachment Carriersapplications (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for theseeach providerspole isbecause notit includedcould be burdensome, unnecessary, or unfeasible in thissome industry.)cases, 26.and Thewould SBAimpose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. Finally, we declined to require small businessand sizeother standardutilities forto Wiredprovide Telecommunicationsmore Carriersdetailed classifiessupporting firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in their make ready estimates because the current complaint process should be sufficient to address a potential dispute on this industrymatter. forG. Report to Congress 102. The Commission will send a copy of the entireFourth year.Report Ofand thisOrder, number,including 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberFRFA, of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in a report to be sent to Congress and the 2022Government UniversalAccountability ServiceOffice Monitoringpursuant Report,to as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provisionCongressional Review Act. In addition, the Commission will send a copy of fixed local services. Of these providers, the CommissionFourth estimatesReport thatand 4,146Order providersand haveDeclaratory 1,500Ruling, orincluding fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA'sFRFA, small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 27. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closestChief industryCounsel withfor Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. A copy of the Fourth Report and Order (or summaries thereof) will also be published in the Federal Register . V. Procedural Matters 103. Regulatory Flexibility Act. The Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), requires that an SBAagency prepare a regulatory flexibility analysis for notice and comment rulemakings, unless the agency certifies that the rule will not, if promulgated, have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small businessentities. sizeAccordingly, standard.we Wiredhave Telecommunicationsprepared Carriersa areFinal alsoRegulatory referredFlexibility Analysis (FRFA) concerning the possible impact of the rule changes contained in the Fourth Report and Order on small entities. The FRFA is set forth herein. 104. Congressional Review Act. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order to asCongress wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitivethe LocalGovernment ExchangeAccountability CarriersOffice (CLECs),pursuant Cable/Coaxto CLECs,5 InterconnectedU.S.C. VOIP801(a)(1)(A). Providers,105. Non-InterconnectedPaperwork VOIPReduction Providers,Act. SharedThis Tenantdocument Servicemay Providers,contain Audioproposed Bridgenew Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewermodified employeesinformation ascollection small.requirements U.S.subject Censusto Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entirePaperwork year.Reduction OfAct this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of 1995 (PRA), Public Law 104-13. Specifically, the numberrules adopted in 47 CFR 1.1411, 1.1415, and 1.1416 may require new or modified information collections. All such new or modified information collection requirements will be submitted to the Office of firmsManagement and Budget (OMB) for review under Section 3507(d) of the PRA. OMB, the general public, and other Federal agencies will be invited to comment on the new or modified information collection requirements contained in this proceeding. In addition, we note that meetpursuant to the SBASmall sizeBusiness standard.)Paperwork Additionally,Relief basedAct on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December2002, 31,Public 2021,Law there107-198, weresee 4,59044 providersU.S.C. that3506(c)(4), reportedwe theypreviously weresought fixedspecific localcomment exchangeon servicehow providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimatesmight further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In this document, we describe several steps we have taken to minimize the information collection burdens on small entities. VI. Ordering Clauses 106. Accordingly, it is ordered that 4,146pursuant providersto havesections 1,5001-4, or201, fewer202, employees.224, Consequently,and using303(r) of the SBA'sCommunications smallAct business size standard, most of these1934, providersas canamended, be47 consideredU.S.C. small151-54, entities.201, 28.202, Incumbent224, Localand Exchange303(r), Carriers (Incumbent LECs). Neither the CommissionFourth norReport and Order and Declaratory Ruling hereby is adopted and part 1 of the SBACommission's haveRules, developed47 aCFR smallpart business1, size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is amended as set forth in Appendix A of the closestFourth industryReport withand anOrder. SBA107. smallIt businessis sizefurther standard.ordered The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entireFourth year.Report Ofand thisOrder number,shall 2,964become firmseffective operated30 withdays fewerafter thanpublication 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022Federal UniversalRegister Service, Monitoringexcept Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commissionamendments estimatesto § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415, 47 CFR 1.1411(c)(4), 1.1415, which may contain new or modified information collection requirements, will not become effective until the Office of Management and Budget completes review of any information collection requirements that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA'sWireline smallCompetition businessBureau sizedetermines standard,is required under the Paperwork Reduction Act. The Commission estimatesdirects that the majorityWireline Competition Bureau to announce the effective date for § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415 by subsequent Public Notice. 108. It is further ordered that, pursuant to 47 CFR 1.4(b)(1), the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 29. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the CommissionFourth norReport and Order will commence on the SBAdate hasthat developed a sizesummary standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the followingFourth typesReport of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and CompetitiveOrder Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is published in the closestFederal industryRegister with, anand SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entireperiod year.for Offiling thispetitions number,for 2,964reconsideration firmsor operatedpetitions withfor fewerjudicial thanreview 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberDeclaratory Ruling will commence upon release of firms that meet the SBADeclaratory sizeRuling. standard.)109. Additionally,It basedis onfurther Commissionordered data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the CommissionCommission's estimatesOffice that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 30. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the CommissionSecretary, norshall send a copy of the SBAFourth hasReport developedand Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis and Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. 110. It is further ordered that the Office of the Managing Director, Performance Evaluation and Records Management, shall send a smallcopy businessof size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closestFourth industryReport withand anOrder SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a morereport preciseto estimatebe sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act, see 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Marlene Dortch, Secretary. Final Rules The Federal Communications Commission amends part 1 of title 47 of the numberCode of firmsFederal thatRegulations meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as offollows: DecemberPART 31,1—PRACTICE 2021,AND therePROCEDURE were1. 127The providersauthority thatcitation reportedfor theypart were1 engagedcontinues into theread provisionas offollows: interexchangeAuthority: services.47 OfU.S.C. thesechs. providers,2, the5, Commission9, estimates13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Delayed indefinitely, amend § 1.1411 by adding paragraph (c)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (c) * * * (4) Information from cyclical pole inspection reports. (i) Upon submitting its attachment application, a new attacher may request in writing that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA'sutility smallprovide, as to the poles covered by such attachment application, the information regarding those poles contained in the utility's most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or, if available, any more recent pole inspection report. The utility shall provide the new attacher with this information within ten (10) business sizedays standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 31. Operator Service Providers (OSPs). Neither the Commissionnew norattacher's written request. (ii) Utilities shall retain copies of their pole inspection reports, in the SBAform hasthey developedare created, until a smallsuperseding report covering the poles included in the attachment application is completed. (iii) For purposes of this section, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that theresets wereforth 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entireresults year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of a routine inspection of its poles during the numberutility's ofnormal firmspole inspection cycle. (iv) After requesting and receiving pole inspection information from a utility related to poles covered by its application, a new attacher may amend an attachment application at any time until the utility grants or denies the original application. (A) A utility that meetreceives such an amended attachment application may, at its option, restart the SBA45-day sizeperiod standard.)(or Additionally,60-day basedperiod onfor Commissionlarger dataorders) infor responding to the 2022application Universaland Serviceconducting Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provisionsurvey. (B) A utility electing to restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) shall notify the attacher of operatorits services.intent Ofto thesedo providers,so within five (5) business days of receipt of the Commissionamended estimatesapplication that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewerby employees. Consequently, using the SBA's45th smallday business(or size60th standard,day, allif ofapplicable) theseafter providers can be considered small entities. 32. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commissionoriginal norapplication the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is considered complete, whichever is earlier. § 1.1415 [Redesignated as § 1.1416] 3. Redesignate § 1.1415 as § 1.1416. 4. Delayed indefinitely, add a new § 1.1415 to read as follows: § 1.1415 Dispute resolution procedures for pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment; functions of the closestRapid industryBroadband withAssessment anTeam. SBA(a) smallAn businessinter-bureau sizeteam, standard.to be known as the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT), shall be established to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that are alleged to impede or delay the deployment of broadband facilities and to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. The SBARBAT smallshall businessconsist sizeof standardone for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precisestaff estimatefrom of the numberEnforcement Bureau and one or more staff from the Wireline Competition Bureau. Senior staff in the Enforcement Bureau and the Wireline Competition Bureau shall designate individuals from their respective bureaus to serve on the RBAT. (b) The RBAT shall prioritize the resolution of firmsa pole attachment dispute that meeta party seeking RBAT review has alleged is impeding or delaying an active broadband deployment project, including where the SBAparty sizeis standard.)also Additionally,seeking basedplacement of the dispute on Commission data in the 2022Accelerated UniversalDocket Servicepursuant Monitoringto Report,§ as1.736. The RBAT shall gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and shall have discretion to decide the most appropriate process for resolving the dispute, including recommending an RBAT-supervised mediation process pursuant to § 1.737, use of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provisionAccelerated Docket, and/or other appropriate action. Although RBAT-supervised mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. The RBAT may recommend to the parties use of other toll services. Of these providers, the CommissionAccelerated estimatesDocket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined in paragraph (e) of this section, that 87a providerscomplaint, have 1,500 or fewera employees.portion Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of thesea providerscomplaint, canis besuitable consideredfor smallinclusion entities.on 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 33. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximatelyAccelerated 800Docket. members(c) A party to a pole attachment dispute, prior to filing a formal complaint, may request RBAT review and assessment of WISPA,such includingdispute thoseif entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impactparty tobelieves these entities for the purposesdispute is impeding or delaying the deployment of thisa FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internetfacilities accessproject. service,The party seeking RBAT review and assessment shall first notify the actionsChief may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the closeEnforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) by phone and in writing of an auction does not necessarily represent the numberrequest. The MDRD Chief shall direct the requesting party to the location of smalla businessesform currentlyon in service. Also, the CommissionMDRD doeswebsite—FCC-5653, notRequest generallyfor trackRBAT subsequentReview business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfersAssessment—and or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 34. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provideinstructions communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for thiscompleting industryand classifieselectronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. (d) Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT shall schedule a businessmeeting, through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as smallsoon ifas itpracticable. hasThe 1,500RBAT may request a written response from the other party or fewerparties employees.to U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entiredispute year.with Ofrespect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberparty seeking RBAT review or any other party or parties to the dispute provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. In the initial meeting, or shortly thereafter, the RBAT shall provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of firmsresolving thattheir meetdispute, including RBAT-supervised mediation pursuant to § 1.737; use of the SBAAccelerated sizeDocket; standard.)and/or Additionally,any basedother onappropriate Commissionaction. dataIf in the 2022parties Universalseek ServiceRBAT-supervised Monitoringmediation, Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provisionMDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, may waive the procedures or requirements of wireless§ services.1.737 Ofas theseappropriate providers,in this context, or as needed in light of the Commissionfacts estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewercircumstances employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 35. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a varietyparticular case. (e) The RBAT shall have discretion to decide whether a complaint, or a portion of fixed,a mobile,complaint, radiolocation,involving anda digitaldispute audiothat broadcastinga satelliteparty services.alleges Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to Partbe 27impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities is suitable for inclusion on the Commission'sAccelerated rules.Docket Wirelesspursuant Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these§ services.1.736. TheIn SBAdetermining smallwhether businessto sizeaccept standard for this industry classifies a businesscomplaint, as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a moreportion precise estimate of a complaint, on the numberAccelerated Docket, the RBAT shall base its decision on a totality of firms that meet the SBAfactors sizefrom standard.) Thus under the SBAfollowing sizelist: standard,(1) Whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act, or a Commission estimatesrule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; (2) Whether the expedited resolution of a majorityparticular dispute or category of licenseesdisputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities or services, especially in thisan industryunserved canor beunderserved consideredarea; small.(3) 36.Whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; (4) The Commission'snumber small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installmentcomplexity payments in the auction of licenses for the variousissues frequency bands included in WCS.dispute; When(5) biddingWhether credits are adopted for the auctiondispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adoptedor inpolicies; conjunction(6) withThe likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; (7) The likely need for expert testimony; (8) The ability of the requirementsparties forto stipulate to facts; (9) Whether the auctionparties and/orhave already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; (10) Willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and (11) Such other factors as identified in the designatedRBAT, entitieswithin sectionits discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding. [List of Subjects] List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 271 Administrative practice and procedure. [I. Introduction] 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's rulesuniversal forservice fund, the specificInfrastructure WCSInvestment frequencyand bands.Jobs (TheAct, “Designatedwhich entities”included sections in subparts D-Q each contain the smalllargest businessever sizeFederal standardsinvestment adoptedin forbroadband, as well as other Federal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the auctionnecessary ofinfrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved and underserved areas in the frequencyUnited bandStates. coveredKey by that subpart.) 37. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction,these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission noteshas thattaken assignificant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a generalrobust matter,complaint process when parties cannot agree on the numberrates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the closeCommunications Act of an1934, auctionas doesamended not(the necessarilyAct), representexempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in states that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the numberDistrict of smallColumbia businesseshave opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently inonly service.apply Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimatecable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the numberCommission's pole attachment rules to broadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of licenseespole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with activeinformation licensesabout that would qualify as small under the SBA'sstatus smallof business size standard. 38. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closestutility industrypoles withthey anplan SBA small business size standard applicable to theseuse services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as smallthey ifmap itout hastheir 1,500broadband orbuilds. [II. fewerBackground] 3. employees.In U.S.1996, Censusas Bureaupart data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of its implementation of the numberpole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of firms that meet the SBAAct, size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimatesdetermined that when a majoritymodification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of licenseesa inparticular thisparty, industrythen canunder becost consideredcausation small.principles, 39. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the followingbenefiting radioparty service(s)”,must Radioassume Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the numbercost of active licenses does not equate to the numbermodification. (Section 224(h) states that whenever the owner of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “smallpole, business”duct, isconduit, definedor asright-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity that,may togetherhave with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “veryreasonable smallopportunity business”to isadd defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 40. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction,or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the Commissioncosts notesincurred by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible. Section 224(i) states that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auctionentity doesthat obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not necessarilybe representrequired to bear any of the numbercosts of smallrearranging businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers,replacing unjustits enrichmentattachment, issuesif aresuch implicated.rearrangement Additionally,or sincereplacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including the owner of such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).) The Commission doesalso notfound collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that wouldwhen qualifya utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 41. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBAopportunity smallto businessadd sizeto standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewermodify employees.its Forown attachments and applied this industry,principle U.S.to Censusutilities Bureauand dataother forattachers 2017seeking showto use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order (83 FR 31659-02, July 9, 2018), the Commission reiterated that thereapplication were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numbercost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of firmspole thatreplacements. meetSpecifically, NCTA asked the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission datato declare that: (1) utilities must share in the 2022cost Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of Decemberpole 31,replacements 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the provisionAct, § 1.1408(b) of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission's rules, and Commission estimatesprecedent; that(2) 255pole providersattachment havecomplaints 1,500arising or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 42. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the 1850-1910Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and 1930-1990(3) MHz§ bands.1.1407(b) Theof closestthe industryCommission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with apole SBAreplacements smallwill businessinhibit sizeattachers standardfrom applicabledeploying broadband services to theseAmericans services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in thisunserved industryareas. for5. In the entire2021 year.Pole OfReplacement thisDeclaratory number,Ruling, 2,837although firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberWireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of firmspole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that meet the SBArecord sizedeveloped standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in thisresponse industryto can be considered small. 43. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the BroadbandNCTA PCSPetition service.revealed (Basedinconsistent onpractices aby FCCutilities Universalwith Licensingregard System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the numberBureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auctionCommission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of licensespole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for thesepole services.replacement Incosts auctionsby forpostponing thesereplacements licenses,until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission definedissued “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “verySecond smallFurther business”Notice asof anProposed entityRulemaking that,( togetherSecond withFNPRM its) affiliates(87 FR 25181-01, Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the precedingproper threeallocation years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 44. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winningcosts biddersamong utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that qualify as small businesses at the closeFourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of ancost auctioncausation doesand cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not necessarilycaused represent(necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the numbercosts of smalla businessespole currentlyreplacement. inThe service. Further, the Commission doesalso notsought generallycomment track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the numberextent of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimatewhich utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the numbercosts of licenseespole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second FNPRM also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with activepotential licensesattachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that wouldmay qualifyhelp asavoid smallor underexpedite the SBA'sresolution smallof businessdisputes sizebetween standard. 45. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800parties, MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including butwhether not limited to servicesexpand useduse of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for voicepole attachment complaints and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under Part 90 of the Commission'sspecific rules.criteria Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission datastaff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the 2022Accelerated UniversalDocket. Service(To Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commissionextent estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA'sFourth smallReport businessand sizeOrder standard,does these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not beenexpressly accountedaddress for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 46. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on a FCCtopic Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that was subject to comment in the numberSecond FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) [III. Report and Order] 7. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt measures to expedite resolution of activepole licensesattachment doesdisputes not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that wouldimpede qualifyor asdelay smallbroadband underdeployment. Specifically, we (1) establish an agency-wide rapid response team to provide coordinated review and assessment of such pole attachment disputes and to recommend effective dispute resolution procedures, and (2) adopt specific criteria to guide that team when considering whether a complaint (or portion thereof) should be included on the SBA'sEnforcement smallBureau's businessAccelerated sizeDocket. standard.We Nevertheless,also forrequire purposesutilities to provide information regarding pole conditions and scheduled replacements to the extent that information is contained in cyclical pole inspection reports that utilities already create and maintain in the ordinary course of thistheir analysisbusiness, or in pole inspection reports created between cyclical reports. (Both pole attachers and utilities made several other proposals, not addressed herein, regarding the Commissionprocess estimatesfor pole attachments and replacements and ways they believe the process could be improved to reduce disputes and promote broadband deployment.) A. Accelerating Resolution of Pole Attachment Disputes That Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment 8. We amend our rules to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment by establishing a Commission intra-agency rapid response team—called the majorityRapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT)—to provide coordinated review and assessment of SMRsuch licenseesdisputes. can(We becodify considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 47. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bandsamendments includein flexiblepart fixed,1, mobile,subpart J, of the Commission's rules ( i.e., Pole Attachment Complaint Procedures) by redesignating current § 1.1415 as § 1.1416 and broadcastadding uses,a including mobile and other digital new broadcast§ operation;1.1415. fixedThese rule amendments apply only to disputes involving pole attachments of a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service and mobiledo wirelessnot commercialapply services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licensesdisputes providinginvolving servicespole attachments of a broadband-only internet service provider. They also do not apply to disputes involving poles that are owned or controlled by a railroad, the Federal Government, a state (including a political subdivision thereof such as a municipality), or a cooperative association, or where the poles at issue are located in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a businessstate, as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entireDistrict year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of Columbia, that has certified to the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that it regulates the rates, terms, and conditions of pole attachments in that state or jurisdiction pursuant to 47 U.S.C. 224(c). Should we adopt the proposal set forth in the Open internet NPRM (88 FR 76048-01, Nov. 3, 2023) to reclassify broadband-only internet service as a majoritytelecommunications service, section 224 would once again apply to broadband-only internet service providers deployments.) At the outset, we emphasize that we expect all parties to comply with the Commission's pole attachment rules and to negotiate in good faith to craft solutions that suit the needs of licenseesattachers and utilities to facilitate deployment projects. We recognize, however, that in thissome industryinstances disagreements arise as to the conduct of one or multiple parties, and we encourage parties in those instances to avail themselves of the Commission's dispute resolution processes to both facilitate the resolution of disputes and, when necessary, use the formal adjudication process to develop precedent upon which parties can rely to settle future potential disputes. In this document, we amend our rules to create the RBAT in an effort to make the Commission's pole attachment dispute resolution process more responsive and adaptable with the goal of facilitating deployment. 9. The RBAT will be consideredcharged small.with 48.expediting According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the followingresolution radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of activethese licensesdisputes doesby notswiftly equateengaging key stakeholders, gathering relevant information, distilling issues in dispute, and recommending to the numberparties, where appropriate, an abbreviated mediation process, placement of licensees.a Acomplaint licensee(or canportion have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a smallcomplaint) businesson was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the precedingAccelerated threeDocket years,based on consideration of specified criteria, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. (The Schools, Health &amp; Libraries Broadband (SHLB) Coalition suggests that creation of the RBAT may result in a needless administrative step and anassociated entrepreneurdelay, was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controllingsuggests interests,that has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the precedingRBAT, threeif years.created, Inbe auctionsvested with authority to resolve disputes without going through the additional step of a complaint process. We decline to adopt this approach. The RBAT is designed to assist parties in resolving their dispute expeditiously without need for Lowerlitigation. 700But MHzif Bandparties licensesare seventy-twounable winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 49. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction,reach the Commission notes that as a generalresolution, matter,either through mediation or other means, our existing complaint procedures, including the numberAccelerated Docket, ensure a means of winningadjudicating bidders that qualify as small businesses at the closedispute of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service.accordance Further,with due process.) 10. In the Second FNPRM, the Commission doessought notcomment generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on NCTA's proposed adoption of policies “favoring the numberplacement of employeespole forattachment licenseescomplaints providingarising these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 50. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in unserved areas on the 746-806[Commission's] MHzAccelerated bands.Docket[,]” Uppera 700mechanism MHzthat Drequires Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763Commission MHzto quickly resolve disputes between parties within 60 days. (Under § 1.736(a), complaint proceedings on the Accelerated Docket must be concluded within 60 days, and 788-793are MHztherefore bands.subject Permissibleto operationsshorter inpleading thesedeadlines bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digitalmodifications newto broadcastthe operation;procedural fixedrules that govern formal complaint proceedings.) It also sought comment on measures that would expedite the resolution of “pole replacement[ ]” disputes and mobileon wirelesscriteria commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private,determining internalmore radiogenerally needs,“when two-waypole interactive,attachment cellular,complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” Based on broad record support among attachers for further streamlining our processes as applied to disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we conclude that the targeted measures outlined below are warranted and mobilewill advance the Commission's goal of timely broadband deployment. 11. As the Commission observed in the Second FNPRM, our current rules provide a 180-day deadline (or shot clock) for final action on pole access complaints where a cable television broadcastingsystem services.operator (Weor noteprovider of telecommunications service claims that init Auctionhas 73,been Upperdenied 700access MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a businesspole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way owned or controlled by a utility. (For purposes of this subsection, the Commission has defined a “pole access complaint” as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a morecomplaint precise“filed estimateby a cable television system or a provider of thetelecommunications numberservice of firms that meetalleges the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majoritycomplete denial of licenseesaccess in this industry can be considered small. 51. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCCutility Universalpole[,]” Licensingand Systemclarified search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the“[the] numberterm [pole access complaint] does not encompass a complaint alleging that a utility is imposing unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions that amount to a denial of activepole licensesaccess.”) doesIn notaddition, equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small270-day business”shot asclock ancurrently entityapplies that,to togetherfinal withaction itson affiliatesall andother controllingpole principals,attachment hascomplaints average( grossi.e., revenuesthose notalleging exceedingunjust $40or millionunreasonable rates, terms, or conditions of attachment). Several commenters assert that these timeframes are commercially unreasonable for attachers seeking to deploy broadband networks, particularly in rural or unserved areas. (Charter asserts that the preceding“[m]ere threeexistence years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of a path allowing more routine use of the twelveAccelerated availableDocket licenses.“could 52.help Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet,providers data,resolve etc.)disagreements towithout aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800need MHz air-ground spectrum. 53. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for thisCommission industryintervention” classifiesby “provid[ing] attachers facing government-imposed construction deadlines with a businessmore ascredible smalloption ifof itseeking relief, thereby reducing the one-sided leverage held by pole owners today.”) NCTA submits that the need for expedited procedures has 1,500gained orgreater fewerurgency employees.recently U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017“providers show. . . receiving government funds to build out broadband under deadlines that thereafford wereno 2,893time firms that operated in this industry for a lengthy complaint process.” A number of commenters therefore propose more routine use of the entireAccelerated year.Docket, Ofwith thisits number,60-day 2,837shot firmsclock, employedespecially fewerfor thanpole 250attachment employees.disputes (Theinvolving availabletime-sensitive U.S.deployments Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in thisunserved industryareas. canSeveral becommenters consideredalso small.contend 54.that Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Groundcurrent RadiotelephoneAccelerated Service.Docket (Basedrule does not sufficiently motivate utilities to comply with their obligation to allow pole access because it is unclear when Commission staff, in the exercise of their discretion under § 1.736(d) of our rules, will include a matter on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the followingAccelerated radioDocket. service(s)”,Crown RadioCastle Serviceasserts = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that “without certainty that the numbercomplaint will be promptly resolved, the decision to bring a formal complaint to the Commission involves business decisions about whether the resolution will be too late to meaningfully assist the deployment.” On the other hand, other commenters argue that sweeping or widespread imposition of active licenses does not equate to the numberAccelerated Docket rule, with its highly compressed timeframes, could raise potential fairness and due process concerns given the complexity of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auctionissues raised in most pole attachment cases. (Other commenters question the necessity of licenses.new Forrules purposes(1) due to the relative infrequency of auctions,requests for Accelerated Docket treatment, see, e.g., Edison Electric Institute Comments at 54 (challenging the Commissionneed definedto “smallfurther business”expedite as“denial anof entityaccess” that,complaints togetherbased withon its“[t]he affiliatescomplete andabsence controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground[such] Radiotelephonecomplaints Servicebefore licenses in the 800Commission”), MHzor band,(2) neitherdue to the lack of evidence of instances where dilatory actions of utilities have caused broadband grant recipients to lose access to such funding.) After considering these competing concerns, we find that the twoadoption winning bidders claimed small business status. 55. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winningtargeted biddersdispute resolution reforms, as set forth below, will address the expressed need for quicker resolution of pole attachment disputes that qualifymay asimpede small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers,delay unjustbroadband enrichmentdeployment issueswhile areensuring implicated.sufficient Additionally,fairness and due process for all involved parties. 12. Disputes Subject to RBAT Review and Assessment Procedures. The Commission asked in the CommissionSecond doesFNPRM whether any new dispute resolution procedures should be “limited to complaints that raise only discrete pole access issues” and do not collectrequire dataconsideration on the number of employees“whether a rate, term, or condition of attachment is unjust or unreasonable.” To address the need for licenseestimely providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 56. 3650-3700 MHz Band. Wireless broadband servicedeployment, licensingparticularly in unserved or underserved areas, we apply the 3650-3700new MHzprocedures banddiscussed providesbelow for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities. To provide servicesgreater clarity regarding when such a dispute would be eligible for placement on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700Accelerated MHzDocket, bandwe fallalso adopt below specific criteria that will guide the RBAT in determining when a dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition. In light of the Wirelessstrict Telecommunicationstime Carriersconstraints (of except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entireAccelerated year.Docket, Ofdisputes thisraising number,relatively 2,837straightforward firmslegal employedand fewerevidentiary thanissues, 250as employees.determined (Thebased availableon U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberRBAT's review of firmsthese criteria, are more likely to be considered appropriate for placement on the Accelerated Docket. 13. Although the record reflects differing views regarding which disputes should be subject to new dispute resolution procedures, a significant proportion of commenters seeking such reforms ask that meetwe limit the SBAfocus size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licenseesany innew procedures to disputes that are interfering with active broadband deployment plans or projects. We adopt this industrysuggestion canbased be considered small. 57. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on our conclusion that focusing on pole attachment disputes that impede or delay a provider's ability to deploy new broadband facilities will align with, and advance most directly, the licensesgoal of timely broadband deployment. (Several utilities argue that haveacross-the-board beenapplication granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licenseesdispute resolution reforms to an entire category of disputes would fail to account for complexities in thisindividual servicecases. areBut smallsuch internetcomments Accessassume Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that thereAccelerated wereDocket 902treatment activewould licensesautomatically inapply to all disputes within the 3650-3700identified MHzcategory. band.In (Basedfact, under the reforms we adopt herein, such disputes will receive individualized assessment and review (by the RBAT) based on a totality of factors analysis.) 14. RBAT Review and Assessment of Disputes that Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment. To expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licensesbroadband doesdeployment notproject, equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we areamend notour ablerules to estimateestablish the numberRBAT, which will be comprised of licenseesEnforcement Bureau and Wireline Competition Bureau staff with activeexpertise licensesin that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 58. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of Title 47 of the Commission's Rules.pole Availableattachment torules licensees of broadcast stations and toorders. broadcastWe andcharge cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studioRBAT towith prioritizing the transmitter,resolution of any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or betweendelaying two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.)deployment Theyof broadband facilities (including where the party is also includeseeking placement of the Uppermatter Microwaveon Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the DigitalAccelerated ElectronicDocket Messageunder Service§ (DEMS),1.736). 24In GHzperforming Service,this Multiplerole, Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closestRBAT industrywill withgather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and provide guidance and advice on the most effective means of resolving the parties' dispute. Where appropriate, the RBAT will recommend to the parties an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a SBAcomplaint, small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewerportion employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of a complaint, on the numberAccelerated Docket, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. The RBAT will recommend use of firms that meet the SBAAccelerated sizeDocket standard.)where Thusit underdetermines, based upon a totality of the SBAcriteria sizeoutlined standard,below, the Commission estimates that a majoritycomplaint, or portion thereof, is suitable for accelerated disposition. (The RBAT may recommend placement of fixeda microwavedispute serviceon licensees can be considered small. 59. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auctionAccelerated Docket in the exercise of licenses for the variousdiscretion frequencyafforded bandsCommission includedstaff in“to fixeddecide microwavewhether services.a Whencomplaint, biddingor creditsportion are adopted for the auction of licensesa complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket.” A prospective complainant may accept the recommendation, with or without the consent of the other party or parties to the dispute, by moving forward with the agreed upon schedule and process established by Commission staff in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitivecase.) biddingTo rulesrequest adoptedRBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party to the dispute contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in conjunctionwriting. with(The theRBAT requirementsreview forand assessment process will be available only to attachers and pole owners that are direct parties to such dispute (including any legal counsel retained to represent a party in that specific dispute). For parties seeking both RBAT review and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the auctionAccelerated and/orDocket, asthis identifiedinitial notification by phone and in partwriting 101would ofneed to be made prior to filing the Commission'sformal rulescomplaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b).) The MDRD Chief will direct the party to a streamlined form on the MDRD website—Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the specificform fixed microwave services frequency bands. 60. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the CommissionRBAT. notesThe thatform aswill elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute, and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket. (The form will require a generalsubmitting matter,party to provide: information identifying the numberparties and the services they offer; the section(s) of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the closeAct or Commission rule or order alleged to have been violated; a brief description of an auction does not necessarily represent the numberparties' dispute (including how it relates to broadband deployment plans or projects, whether such plans or projects are subject to a deadline under a government funded broadband program, whether the dispute arises in an unserved or underserved area, what harm is occurring or is likely to occur as a result of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commissionsituation, doesand notwhat generallyaspects track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commissiondispute doesrequire notimmediate collectredress); data on the numberspecific relief sought; whether the parties have entered into a non-disclosure agreement; the steps the party has taken to resolve the matter with other parties to the dispute; a statement as to whether the parties are amenable to mediation; and a statement indicating whether the party intends to seek inclusion of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the matter on the Accelerated Docket. The form also will elicit information relevant to whether the dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition including, for example, the number of licenseespoles within activequestion, licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA'snumber small business size standard. 61. Broadband Radio Service and Educationalcomplexity Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of claims at issue, and the Broadbandlikely Radioneed Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutorydiscovery or regulatoryexpert purposes.)affidavits. WirelessThe cableRBAT operatorsmay thatrequest useadditional spectruminformation in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS,submitting provideparty if more information is necessary to determine a competitivecourse alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxialaction.) cable,15. wirelessUpon cablereceipt uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmissioncompleted dependsRequest uponfor RBAT Review and Assessment, the transmitterRBAT power,will schedule a meeting through a manner of the typeRBAT's ofchoosing, receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 62. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a SBAwritten smallresponse businessfrom sizethe standardother applicableparty or parties to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entiredispute year.with Ofrespect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that one or both parties provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. (NCTA suggests that we specify the information the respondent will be required to provide. We find this number,approach 2,837impracticable, firmsas employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberinformation ofrequired firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in thisa industryresponse canwill bedepend considered small. 63. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the followingcomplainant's radioallegations. service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We noteemploy a more flexible approach that enables the numberRBAT of active licenses does not equate to request relevant information and documentation from either party, as appropriate.) In the numberinitial meeting, or in a meeting shortly thereafter, the RBAT will provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of licensees.resolving Atheir licenseedispute, canincluding havestaff-supervised onemediation, oruse more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auctionAccelerated Docket, and/or other action. (Because mediation will be a prominent feature of BRS licenses, the CommissionRBAT adoptedreview, criteriawe decline to adopt INCOMPAS's proposal that the 180-day deadline for threeresolution groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a smallpole businessaccess iscomplaint anbe entitytriggered that,by together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the precedingsubmission threeof years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the precedingrequest three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRSRBAT licenses,Review two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and twoAssessment. biddersIf claimingmediation entrepreneursucceeds, statusthere wonwill sixbe licenses.no Oneneed for a complaint. If it does not, the filing of the winning bidders claiming a smallcomplaint businesswill statuscommence classificationreview period deadlines under the relevant Commission rules.) To that end, the RBAT will attempt to distill the issues in dispute and identify issues that are most impacting a party's broadband deployment plans. For example, the BRSRBAT licensemay auctionencourage hasparties an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to focus on the numberresolution of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.)threshold Weissues, note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or morewhat licenses.appears 64.to Thebe Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliatesmost urgent issue(s), if it finds that doing so may help the parties to narrow their dispute. Likewise, the RBAT may encourage parties, where appropriate, to streamline the proceeding by agreeing to focus on “test cases”— i.e., disputes over specific poles that the parties agree are representative of itsdisputes controllingover interests,multiple haspoles. averageIn grossthis revenuesway, deciding the issue as to the test case will have broader impact. 16. Should the RBAT recommend staff-supervised mediation, it shall be conducted pursuant to § 1.737 of the Commission's rules. Because § 1.737 generally contemplates that aremediations notwill morebe thanconducted $55by millionMDRD staff, we delegate authority to the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, to modify or waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (Waiver is appropriate for “good cause,” and is warranted only if both: (1) special circumstances warrant a deviation from the precedinggeneral fiverule, (5) years, and (2) such deviation will serve the public interest.) The strict confidentiality requirements will apply to all written and oral communications prepared or made for purposes of a verymediation smallpursuant business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction,§ 1.737(f), including mediation submissions, offers of compromise, and staff and party comments made during the Commissioncourse notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the closemediation (Mediation Communications). Through mediation, the RBAT will make every effort to settle or narrow the issues in dispute as expeditiously as possible. 17. In the event that the parties are unable to settle their dispute, and a prospective complainant seeks placement of anits auctioncomplaint does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the numberAccelerated Docket, the RBAT will decide whether the complaint or a portion of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the numbercomplaint is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA'scriteria smallset businessforth sizebelow. standard.Because 4. Satellite Service Providers 65. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms “primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellitesthe orvery resellingshort satellitedeadlines telecommunications.” Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275apply firms in thisAccelerated industryDocket operatedproceedings, Commission staff historically have carefully evaluated whether a particular dispute is appropriate for expedited disposition, resulting in the entireplacement year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of lessrelatively thanfew $25cases million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022Accelerated UniversalDocket. ServiceIn Monitoringevaluating Report,whether a matter is suitable for expedited disposition, the RBAT must similarly be mindful of the due process concerns raised by commenters, such as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provisionPennsylvania ofPUC, satelliteregarding telecommunicationsaffording services.parties Of“the theseopportunity providers,to be heard at a meaningful time and in a meaningful manner.” In addition, although mediation is generally voluntary, the CommissionRBAT estimatesmay require that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA'sparties smallparticipate, businessif sizeappropriate, standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providingpre-filing specializedsettlement telecommunicationsnegotiations services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or moremediation terrestrialunder systemsrule and1.737 capableas ofa transmittingcondition telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g. dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for thisincluding industrya classifiesmatter firmson with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entireAccelerated year.Docket. OfFinally, thoseif firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberRBAT ofdetermines firms that meeta matter is suitable for inclusion on the SBAAccelerated sizeDocket, standard. We also note that according to the U.S.RBAT Censusis Bureauauthorized glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 67. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitorsend appropriate matters to the deploymentCommission's Administrative Law Judge (ALJ) for an expedited “minitrial” ( i.e., trial-type hearing) as contemplated by § 1.736(h). 18. Criteria for Placement on the Accelerated Docket. The Commission sought comment in the Second FNPRM on the adoption of broadbandspecific usingcriteria anyto technology,guide weCommission anticipatestaff thaton some“when broadbandpole serviceattachment providerscomplaints mayshould notbe provideplaced telephoneon service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 68. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcastingAccelerated Docket.” (For example, the Commission asked if its policy should “take into account the number and complexity of programsthe claims, need for discovery, need for expert affidavits, and ability of the parties to stipulate to facts.”) Based on athe subscriptionrequests of several commenters for greater predictability surrounding Accelerated Docket placement decisions with respect to pole attachment disputes that impede or feedelay basis.broadband Thedeployment, broadcastwe programmingestablish iscriteria typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to aid the RBAT in making determinations regarding the placement of such matters on the Accelerated Docket. 19. In light of the strict time constraints that apply in Accelerated Docket cases, we decline to adopt a third“presumption,” party, such as cablesuggested systemsby orsome direct-to-homecommenters, satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year.all (Thepole U.S.access Censusdisputes Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for active deployments be placed on the entireAccelerated yearDocket and, instead, entrust the RBAT with this decision based on the criteria specified below. (There is no basis for us to avoidconclude disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a yeardispute andwill 44be firmssuitable operatedfor the Accelerated Docket simply based on the number of poles at issue as INCOMPAS's proposal suggests.) We agree with revenueDominion/Xcel that a “one-size-fits-all policy” would not adequately take into account the complexity of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the numberissues in particular complaint proceedings. We also agree with the Coalition of firmsConcerned Utilities that meet the SBA60-day sizetimeframe standard.will Webe note“too short” to resolve certain pole attachment disputes, and thus “blanket imposition” of the Accelerated Docket requirements would be unreasonable and “raise due process concerns” for utilities. Although Charter argues that the U.S.presumption Censuscould Bureausimply withheldbe publicationrebutted if a particular complaint raises unusually complex issues, we reject this argument based on our experience with formal complaints. In particular, when parties oppose the operation of a presumption in a particular proceeding, these rebuttal efforts often lead to significant additional argumentation attendant to resolving the numberspecific question of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/valuepresumption, thus unnecessarily complicating resolution of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the numberunderlying issues in dispute. To avoid the potential for unnecessary rounds of firmsargumentation with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenuesto ensure that complaints accepted onto the Accelerated Docket are usedsuitable interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 69. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for decision under the purposerelevant time constraints, we reject proposals to create a presumption that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket. 20. After careful consideration of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission'srecord rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industrythis data,issue, therewe aredirect about 420 cable companies in the U.S.RBAT Ofto these,consider only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission'sfactors rules,below in determining whether to accept onto the Accelerated Docket a “smallpole system”attachment dispute that is allegedly impeding or delaying a cablebroadband systemfacilities servingdeployment 15,000plan or fewerproject. subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 70. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The CommunicationsRBAT shall determine eligibility for placement on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of these factors: • whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; • whether the expedited resolution of 1934, as amended, contains a sizeparticular standarddispute for a “small cable operator,” which is “a cable operator that, directly or throughcategory an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities, especially in an unserved or underserved area; • whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all subscribersreasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; • the number and complexity of the issues in dispute; • whether the Uniteddispute Statesraises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; • the likely need for, and iscomplexity notof, affiliateddiscovery; with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregatelikely exceedneed $250,000,000.”for Forexpert purposestestimony; • the ability of the Telecomparties Actto Standard,stipulate to facts; • whether the Commissionparties determinedhave thatalready assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; • the willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a cableruling systemon operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a smallsubset cableof operator.claims (Inor issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and • such other factors as the 2023RBAT, Subscriberwithin Thresholdits Publicdiscretion, Notice,may deem appropriate and conducive to the Commissionprompt determinedand fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding. The first three of these criteria will help the RBAT to ensure appropriate use of the Commission's processes in support of the goal of timely broadband deployment and ensure that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the Unitedparties States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have moremade thana 498,000sufficient subscribers.effort Accordingly,to resolve or, at a minimum, identify and narrow the Commissiondisputed estimatesissues thatprior to filing a complaint. The remaining criteria will help the majorityRBAT to determine if a dispute is suitable for decision under the strict time constraints of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the CommissionAccelerated neitherDocket, requestsand noralso collectsrequire it to consider whether including a matter on the Accelerated Docket would ensure the prompt and fair adjudication of the dispute. (A responding party's refusal to stipulate to facts or cooperate in the exchange of relevant information bearing on whetherdisputed cablefacts systemwill operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualifyitself asdefeat a smallrequest cablefor operatoracceptance pursuant to § 76.901(e) of a pole attachment dispute on the Commission'sAccelerated rules.)Docket.) Therefore,By specifying the criteria that the RBAT must consider in making its determination, we arehope unable at this time to estimatemake with greater precision the numberAccelerated Docket a more useful tool in the resolution of cableeligible systempole operatorsattachment disputes and provide prospective complainants with greater certainty regarding which complaints will be deemed suitable for expedited resolution. 21. We will closely monitor the impact of the dispute resolution procedures adopted here and consider additional streamlining measures should we observe ongoing delay tactics or other unreasonable practices that wouldhinder qualify as small cable operators under the definitionability in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 71. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of “establishments,broadband primarilyproviders engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to deploy new services or facilities. (Two commenters suggest narrowing the distributionlist system;of criteria to avoid delay tactics by utilities. We find that eliminating criteria is unnecessary, however, as these criteria are holistic in nature, and (3)no operatesingle distributionone systemswill thatbe conveydispositive. electricMoreover, power received from the generationRBAT facility or the transmission system to the final consumer.” This industry group is categorizednot basedrequired onto fuelcredulously sourceaccept andassertions includesfrom Hydroelectriceither Powerparty.) Generation,B. FossilIncreasing FuelTransparency Electricby PowerProviding Generation,Attachers NuclearWith ElectricUtility PowerPole Generation,Inspection SolarInformation Electric22. PowerWe Generation,next Windamend Electricour Powerpole Generation,attachment Geothermalmake-ready Electricrules Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control and Electric Power Distribution. 72. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to havingrequire fewerutilities thanto 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a moresubmitted preciseattachment estimateapplication, including whether any of the numberaffected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe (if any). (The record demonstrates that utilities conduct inspections of firmstheir thatpoles meet the SBA size standard.) Based on thisa datamulti-year andcycle, either as part of normal network management or as required by state law.) In the associatedSecond SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. D. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements for Small Entities 73. In the FNPRM, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approvalCommission processsought for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment. Some of these proposals may impose new or additional reporting or recordkeeping and/or other compliance obligations on small entities. Specifically, we seek comment on arequiring proposal that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. We also seek comment on whether NCTA's proposal to addprovide additionalmore timeinformation about their poles to prospective attachers, in order to reduce disputes. (Utilities did not challenge the existingCommission's applicationgeneral timelinesjurisdiction for larger orders and prohibit utilities from limiting the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application, to avoidrequire thesethem timelines, will facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders. Additionally, we seek comment on whether the Commission should create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiateprovide betweenrelevant attachmentinformation applications that could range from requesting access to thousandsprospective ofattachers, polesand toACA tensConnects asserted the Commission has such authority.) Several attaching entities indicated pole inspection information would be helpful in planning deployments. (This requirement applies only in the states that have not certified that they regulate pole attachments themselves. To the extent such reports may include sensitive or evenconfidential hundredsnetwork or financial information, we rely upon utilities and attachers to address the issue through redactions or non-disclosure agreements.) We believe this new requirement strikes a reasonable balance between additional transparency for prospective attachers and ensuring the utilities' expenditure of thousandsresources is no greater than necessary. As discussed below, however, we also strongly encourage utilities to voluntarily share pole-related information that is reasonably available and that they track in the normal course of poles.business, Weboth alsobefore considerand whether to require that a utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving attachment applications, and we intend to continue to monitor the record in this proceeding to determine if additional information sharing mandates may be required. 23. For the purposes of the new transparency requirement, a completecyclical applicationpole inspection report is any report that ita cannotutility conductcreates in the surveynormal withincourse of its business that sets forth the requiredresults 45-dayof period, making self-help available for the estimateroutine process,inspection whichof its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle, while a periodic pole inspection report is not contemplated under current Commission rules. We also seek comment on whether attachers face any obstaclesreport fromthat a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the inspection of any of its poles outside the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (Electric Utilities request that the new rule not require utilities when seeking to invokeprovide self-helpperiodic options,pole whichinspection allowsreports, attachersarguing tothat choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the requirement will create confusion and invite disputes. We find that the definition of “periodic inspection report” is sufficiently clear and note that no other utility failscommenters toclaimed meet the Commission'sdefinition deadlines.was Thisvague information will help to inform whether potential rule changes are necessary. At this time, the Commission cannot quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the approaches discussed in the FNPRM, or whetherotherwise anyproblematic. complianceWe further find that this requirement is an important aspect of the rule. Cyclical pole inspections typically occur several years apart, sometimes by ten or more years, and periodic inspection reports will contain more recent inspection information. We also decline the Electric Utilities' request to seek further comment on transparency requirements willin requirelieu small entities to hire professionals; however, the Commission requests information on the costs and benefits of adopting a rule on report sharing. We find that the approachesrecord discussed,is suchsufficient as the availability of qualified contractors and other workforce constraints that may impact the speed and cost of deployment for utilities and attachers. E. Steps Taken To Minimize the Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 74. The RFA requires an agency to describeadopt anyan significant,information specificallysharing smallrule business,at alternativesthis time and the rule we adopt strikes an appropriate balance between providing attachers with additional helpful information while not being overly resource-intensive for utilities. Indeed, several utility parties are supportive of the new transparency requirement.) We note that itthis hasnew consideredtransparency inrequirement reachingis consistent with the existing practices of certain utilities to prepare such reports. When asking for information about the status of a utility's poles for a planned buildout, the attacher must submit its proposedinformation approach,request whichno mayearlier includethan contemporaneously with an attachment application. The utility will have ten business days to respond to the followingrequest. four(The alternativesutility (amonghas others): “(1) the establishmentsame amount of differingtime compliance or reporting requirements or timetables that take into account the resources available to smalldetermine entities;whether (2) the clarification,application consolidation,is complete.) This should allow sufficient time before the make-ready survey for the attacher to revise or simplificationamend its application as may be appropriate based on the information it receives. (“The term make-ready means the modification or replacement of compliancea utility pole, or of the lines or equipment on the utility pole, to accommodate additional facilities on the utility pole.” After receiving a complete attachment application, a utility conducts a make-ready survey and reportingprovides requirementsa undermake-ready cost estimate to the ruleattacher. forDuring such small entities; (3) the usesurvey ofstage, performance“the rather than design standards; and (4) an exemption from coverage of the rule, or any part thereof, for such small entities.” 75. The FNPRM seeks comment on whether the Commission should revise its rules to further facilitate the approval process for pole owner conducts an engineering study to determine whether and where attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment, including a tentative conclusion that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. The Commission's objective in requesting this information is feasible, and what make-ready is required.”) 24. We recognize that in some situations, the information provided by utilities in their pole inspection reports may lead new attachers to determineamend whethertheir it can and should establish clear standards for when and how attachers and utilities must share the costs of a pole replacement precipitated by a new attachment request.applications. AmongIn order to ensure that utilities have enough time to review such applications, in situations when the alternatives considered in the FNPRM is whether the Commission should allow additional time for the existing larger order timelines where our current rules require that utilities negotiate timing in good faith. We seek comment on whether requiring that the utility notifyreceives an attacheramended 15attachment days after receiving a complete application prior to granting or denying the original application, we will allow a utility the option to restart the 45-day period for responding to the application on the merits and conducting the survey. (The option to restart the time period also applies to larger orders that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period would allow the attacher to elect self-help for the survey sooner. In the alternative, we inquire whether such expansion of time is reasonable for utilities if numerous permits are submittedsubject around the same time or contractor workload is heavy. We also consider whether attachers are choosing to finda their60-day owntimeframe.) contractorsUtilities forelecting one-touch make-ready and for self-help when utilities fail to meetrestart the Commission's45-day deadlines.application Similarly,review weand requestsurvey informationperiod in this manner must notify the attacher within 5 business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. (For example, if an amended application was filed on whether or not utilities designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher. We also seek comment on how the Commission42nd canday helpfollowing resolve situations where labor shortages may hinder utilities from meeting deadlines to respond to attachers. The Commission also seeks comment on and will consider the relativeutility's costsdetermination and benefits of any such revisions to its rules. Information submitted in response to these requests for comment will enable the Commission to evaluate the impact that revising its pole attachment rules would have on smaller entities. F. Federal Rules That May Duplicate, Overlap, or Conflict With the Proposedoriginal Rulesapplication 76.was None.complete, [V. Procedural Matters] 77. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis. As required by the Regulatoryutility Flexibilitywould Act,only have three days, not five business days, to notify the Commissionattacher hasthat prepared an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the utility is restarting the 45-day application review and survey.) To avoid unnecessary delays and costs, we strongly encourage attachers to notify utilities of their intent to file, and to file, amended applications as quickly as possible significantafter economicreceiving impact on small entities of the policies and rules addressed in this FNPRM. Written public comments are requested on the IRFA. Comments must be filed by the deadlines for comments on the FNPRM indicated on the first page of this document and must have a separatepole inspection report from the utility. We also encourage utilities to exercise their right to restart this 45-day period judiciously and distinct heading designating them as responses to review amended applications as quickly as possible even when electing to restart the IRFA.45-day Theapplication Commission'sreview Consumer and Governmentalsurvey Affairsperiod. Bureau,(Several Referenceparties Informationasked Center,that willwe sendrequire an automatic restart of the 45-day response period or start the application process over in such instances by requiring an attacher to file a copy of this FNPRM, including the IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the SBA. 78. Paperwork Reduction Act. The FNPRM contains proposed new informationapplication collectionrather requirements.than Thean Commission,amended asapplication. partWe decline these requests and find that the procedures we adopt are sufficiently tailored to account for the needs of itsutilities continuing effort to reducereview paperworkamended burdens,applications inviteswhile not needlessly slowing deployment. Under the generalnew publicrule, andutilities OMBwill always have the option of electing to commentrestart on the information45-day collectionreview requirementsperiod; containedbut ingiven thisthat document,there asmay requiredbe byinstances where an amendment is minor or otherwise will not require a restart of the Paperwork45-day Reductionperiod, Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seekfind it reasonable to require utilities to actually review an amended application to determine whether a restart is necessary given the specific commentcircumstances.) onRegardless howof wewhether might further reduce the informationutility collectionelects burdento restart the 45-day response period, any additional survey costs necessitated by the amended application, such as a second survey after a survey for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. 79. Ex Parte Presentations—Permit-But-Disclose. The proceeding this FNPRM initiates shall be treated as a “permit-but-disclose” proceeding in accordance with the Commission'soriginal exapplication partehas rules.been Personscompleted, makingwill exbe parteborne presentationsby must file a copy of any written presentation or a memorandum summarizing any oral presentation within two business days after the presentationnew (unlessattacher aconsistent differentwith deadline applicable to the Sunshinenew periodattacher's applies).obligation Personsto makingpay oralfor exmake-ready partecosts presentationsassociated arewith remindedits thatapplication. memoranda25. summarizingIn connection with the presentationnew musttransparency (1)requirement listwe alladopt persons attending or otherwise participating in this final rule, we also require utilities to retain copies, in whatever form they were created, of any such cyclical or periodic pole inspection reports they conduct in the meetingnormal atcourse which the ex parte presentation was made, and (2) summarize all data presented and arguments made during the presentation. If the presentation consisted in whole or in part of business, until such time as the presentationutility completes a superseding cyclical pole inspection report covering the poles included in the attachment application. In creating these obligations, we reiterate that utilities are required to provide only the information they already possess and track in the normal course of dataconducting pole inspections at the time of the attacher's request for data. The new rule does not require utilities to collect or argumentscreate alreadynew reflectedinformation infor the presenter'ssole writtenpurpose comments, memoranda or other filings in the proceeding, the presenter may provide citations to such data or arguments in his or her prior comments, memoranda, or other filings (specifying the relevant page and/or paragraph numbers where such data or arguments can be found) in lieu of summarizingresponding them in the memorandum. Documents shown or given to Commissionsuch staffrequests during ex parte meetings are deemed to be written ex parte presentations and must be filed consistent with § 1.1206(b) of the Commission's rules. In proceedings governed by § 1.49(f) of the Commission's rules or forto whichprovide all information they may possess on the Commissionaffected haspoles madeoutside available a method of electronic filing, written ex parte presentations and memoranda summarizing oral ex parte presentations, and all attachments thereto, must be filed through the electronic comment filing system available for that proceeding, and must be filed in their nativepole formatinspection (reports. e.g.,(Edison .doc,Electric .xml,Institute .ppt,contends searchablethat .pdf).“access Participants in this proceeding should familiarize themselves with the Commission's ex parte rules. [VI. Ordering Clauses] 80. Accordingly, it is ordered , pursuant to sectionscritical 4(i),infrastructure 4(j),by 201,non-electric 202,company 217,personnel 227,presents 227b,serious 251(e),safety, 303(r),reliability, and 403homeland security hazards,” and that “existing law bars electric companies from releasing some information about system infrastructure.” It does not directly assert, however, that utilities would be barred from disclosing information contained in a pole inspection report. And it notes that most of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 154(i), 154(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), 403, that this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking is adopted . 81. It is further ordered that the Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference information Center,is shall“already sendavailable” and an attacher “can readily learn the condition” of poles by driving a copyproposed route. Although we do not know exactly what information utilities may include in their pole inspection reports, we anticipate that legal constraints on disclosure of thiscritical Thirdinfrastructure Furtherinformation Noticecan be addressed, to the extent that they arise, by the parties involved via appropriate redactions or use of Proposeda Rulemaking,non-disclosure includingagreement. We do not intend our new rule to override laws precluding disclosure of certain information, but expect utilities to work in good faith to provide potential attachers with the Initialinformation Regulatorythey Flexibilitycan Analysisfrom (IRFA),their pole inspection reports.) We find this new limited requirement achieves a balance between a potential attacher's need for more information about the poles that it plans to use as part of a broadband buildout and the Chiefutility's Counselinterest for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. List of Subjects in 47minimizing CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Katura Jackson, Federal Register Liaison Officer. [Proposed Rules] The Federal Communications Commission proposes to amend part 1 of Title 47 of the Codeburden of Federalmandatory Regulationsdisclosures. as26. follows:We PARTconclude 1—PRACTICEthat ANDrequiring PROCEDUREutilities 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to readprovide asinformation follows:about Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Amend § 1.1411 by revising paragraph (g)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (g) * * * (4) A utility may add 90 days to the make-readystate periods described in paragraph (e) of thistheir section to all requests for attachment larger than the lesser of 3000 poles orto 5attachers percentwill help improve the attachment process and potentially reduce disputes. In particular, having such information early in the process will help attachers evaluate whether they want to adjust their plans in light of the utility'spoles' polesconditions. At the same time, we recognize the potential burdens on utilities that would result from imposing a mandate to compile extensive information for every pole attachment application the utility receives. We seek to strike a balance by (1) requiring utilities to provide such information as they already collect in athe state.normal course of inspections done as part of managing their network and poles (which the record indicates include which poles have been identified as needing replacement), rather than having to gather information solely for attachers or from many disparate sources, and (2) tying requests for such information to poles contained in submitted attachment applications. 27. In striking this balance, we agree with utilities that they should not be required by rule to gather and provide extensive pole-related data for every pole attachment application about matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. The record shows that many utilities do not create specific maintenance or replacement schedules for poles. It also shows that some utilities provide a range of pole-related information—including whether any poles are red-tagged or otherwise identified for replacement—when responding to an attachment application after conducting a make-ready survey. We agree with the commenters asserting that a pre-application survey conducted by the attacher, or a make-ready survey conducted by a utility in response to a specific attachment application, are often the best ways to ensure the potential attacher and utility have up-to- date, accurate information on the current state of poles. (We recognize that a visual inspection may not necessarily provide all the information an attacher might desire. This supports requiring disclosure of pole inspection reports.) We also agree with Dominion/Xcel, however, that the information contained in general survey or pole inspection reports can be useful to prospective attachers in some cases. Therefore, although we decline at this time to impose broader duties on utilities to collect and provide more expansive pole-related information for every attachment application, we will require utilities to furnish already available information in pole inspection reports concerning specific poles upon request at the time an attachment application is submitted. (Some commenters support the balance struck in this new rule. Electric Utilities, on the other hand, request that any consideration of a rule to require disclosure of pole inspection reports be deferred to a further notice of proposed rulemaking.) 28. While we do not at this time codify a requirement for utilities to provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting a pole attachment application, as requested by some commenters, we understand that often utilities share pole information with attachers prior to the application process, particularly information not easily attained through visual inspection. We strongly encourage this pre-application collaboration and cooperation because there is value for both utilities and attachers in having the best available pole information to inform deployment forecasts and attachment requests. Although we recognize that some potential attachers could benefit from obtaining pole-related information prior to submitting an application, we decline to impose this requirement on utilities given that the underlying requests for information would be for preliminary build-out plans that may substantially change. Furthermore, establishing a pre-application duty for utilities would require the Commission to create a new process and timeline prior to the codified make-ready process, which has always been triggered by the filing of an application. Finally, given that prospective attachers also have the ability to gather information about poles on prospective routes through pre-application surveys and visual inspection of poles on a prospective route, we find that imposing an additional pre-application requirement on utilities is not justified at this time. (Through such visual inspection, an attacher typically can learn the age of a pole, whether it has been red tagged, when the most recent inspection occurred, and a pole's load and potential suitability for more attachments. As noted above, however, we also recognize that visual inspection alone may not always provide all the information an attacher may desire, thus supporting the new requirement that utilities provide attachers with cyclical and periodic pole inspection reports. For example, with regard to utility tags on poles, Crown Castle asserts that “not all poles are appropriately tagged or inspection tags may be missing, damaged, or unable to be interpreted without additional information from the pole owner.”) 29. We reject requests at this time that we mandate a variety of other disclosure requirements on utilities. (Several attachers requested that utilities be required to provide any relevant requested information about their poles that they retain in the ordinary course of business, which would go beyond pole inspection reports. While we encourage parties to voluntarily share information, we find that codifying a broad disclosure requirement for all information collected in the ordinary course of business could force utilities to expend significant resources to gather such information and could lead to additional disputes and complaints related to information sharing.) We agree with utilities that the most relevant information for purposes of an attachment request is whether the poles at issue are available or due for replacement. (Some utilities suspect that the purpose of many of the attachers' requests is only to provide ammunition for rate disputes with utilities, not to improve the attachment process.) For example, some attacher commenters ask the Commission to require utilities to create accessible databases (or establish a single database for all utilities) with information on things like pole age, condition, repair/replacement schedules, location, number of attachments, standard rate structure, and applicable engineering standards. They also ask that utilities be required to provide data from the owners' periodic load analyses for poles; the age, height, class, and condition of poles; and data on current attachments and pending attachment requests for relevant poles. And ACA Connects asks the Commission to require utilities to provide more details in their make-ready cost estimates to support those costs. For the reasons discussed below, we decline to adopt these requirements. With respect to certain financial information requested by some commenters regarding pole rates, we do not adopt new disclosure requirements, but make clear that some financial information is already required to be disclosed under our rules. 30. Before addressing these specific proposals, however, we note some attachers express concern that, by adopting a requirement to provide pole inspection reports but not codifying additional mandates, we may be inadvertently discouraging utilities from voluntarily providing pole-related information before receiving an attachment application, which at least some utilities do today. We stress that our actions in this final rule should not be understood to undermine or disincentivize such voluntary sharing. To the contrary, voluntary sharing of pole-related information is consistent with longstanding Commission policy favoring transparency in the pole attachment context, and we strongly encourage both utilities and attachers to collaborate and voluntarily share information with each other whenever such information is reasonably available and obtained in the normal course of business. (We reject claims that our actions here are inconsistent with the policy of promoting transparency, as Crown Castle asserts. To the contrary, this Order increases transparency by adopting a new disclosure requirement.) Voluntary sharing can be helpful to both attachers and utilities to promote more efficient buildouts by informing deployment forecasts, allowing more accurate applications, and decreasing disputes or delays after an application is submitted. (Such voluntary sharing also is helpful because “not all pole owners conduct these denominated inspections,” yet attachers still could benefit from receiving the kind of information that would have been included in such inspections had they occurred.) Having better and more accurate information prior to attachment applications will likely reduce make-ready costs, the frequency and severity of disputes, and improve the efficiency of the attachment process—benefiting both attachers and utilities. We will continue to monitor the record in this proceeding and will take further action if it becomes clear that voluntary information sharing arrangements are insufficiently promoting broadband deployment. 31. Database(s) of Pole Information. We decline (1) to require that each utility create an accessible database with an array of data on all its poles, or (2) to establish a single pole-information database for all utilities. The Commission rejected previous calls for a similar database requirement in 2011, in part based on the large burden outweighing potential benefits. We find that the 2011 reasoning remains valid. In particular, we find that the record continues to demonstrate that the burdens and costs of creating such a database (if a utility does not already have one) would be very large given the number of poles many utilities own or jointly own and the scope of pole data attachers seek, and that the alleged benefits of requiring such a database would be reduced by the new requirement we adopt in this final rule that utilities provide information from their pole inspection reports. Commenters contend that requiring such a pole-related database would help speed deployment by helping attachers plan better and avoid intermediate steps for both attachers and utilities. Utilities, however, assert that due to the very large number of poles they own or co-own and the ever-changing nature of pole networks, maintaining a fully up-to-date database would be almost impossible, and so the information for any given group of poles in a database could easily be out of date when the attacher needs it. One utility also submits that granting access to such voluminous pole information could result in the submission of incorrect applications. We find that the benefits of a database requirement remain speculative at best given how difficult it would be to keep such a large database up-to-date. 32. While some commenters argue that circumstances have changed since 2011, with some state utility commissions adopting database requirements for pole-related information, the states cited by these commenters are limited and, in any event, all regulate pole attachments at the state level pursuant to section 224(c) of the Act. As a result, compliance with pre-existing state-specific database requirements would likely offer little, if any, relief in complying with a newly imposed Federal database requirement. To the extent any utilities may have developed pole-related databases in states that do not regulate pole attachments, the record indicates that attachers are interested in specific types of data, not merely access to existing databases, which would require utilities to absorb additional, and potentially substantial, costs of either adding specific types of new data or searching databases for specific data of interest to attachers. (ACA Connects asserts that many utilities have developed pole-related databases since 2011, but it does not identify utilities that have done so in states that do not regulate pole attachments.) Again, we agree with the utilities that the value of such database information to attachers is highly unlikely to outweigh those burdens, as the information may well be out of date by the time an attacher submits an attachment request. Moreover, any added benefit would likely be minimal in light of the new information-sharing requirement we adopt in this final rule. 33. Loading Studies. According to NCTA, some utilities provide and allow attachers to rely on loading studies included in the utilities' cyclical pole inspection reports rather than making the attacher do its own loading study, but other utilities do not. NCTA asserts that “[w]here such studies have been conducted, pole owners should be required to use that existing analysis rather than forcing a new attacher to incur the expense and delay of performing a duplicative and redundant study.” We decline to adopt this proposal. To the extent pole inspection reports include loading studies, attachers will have access to such information under the new rule we adopt in this final rule. (In cases where the loading study is not part of the inspection report, we decline, at this time, to codify a requirement for a utility to provide an attacher with a loading study as NCTA requests, but strongly encourage utilities to provide such loading studies when reasonably requested and readily available.) We will not, however, dictate when a utility can require a loading study, as NCTA seems to request, as we continue to believe, consistent with the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, that such studies “can be important tools to address safety, reliability, and engineering concerns.” (NCTA also asserts that a utility should have to bear the cost of a loading analysis where none has been performed but the utility believes a study is necessary before allowing an attachment, and that utilities can instead recover the costs of such loading studies through annual attachment rental fees. As that issue relates to cost recovery rather than transparency, we do not address it here.) 34. Age, Height, Class, and Condition of Poles. We reject attachers' request to require utilities to provide data on the age, height, class, and condition of their poles, or the last date the pole was inspected, make-ready was conducted, or a pre-existing violation on the pole was fixed. The utilities state that they either routinely provide this type of data with make-ready estimates, that the information is accessible to attachers through their own pre-application surveys or when the attacher accompanies the utility on a make-ready survey, or that they do not track this data. To the extent utilities' pole inspection reports include such data, that information would be covered by the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule and available to attachers upon request after an application is filed. Given that attachers can often obtain this information either from the utility or through their own survey or inspection, we reject any additional requirement for pole condition information beyond that which we have already outlined, but we strongly encourage utilities to share this information when it is readily available and collected in the normal course of business. 35. Existing Attachments and Pending Attachment Requests. We also decline to require that utilities provide data on the number of attachments or pending attachment applications for each pole covered by an attachment request. As the utilities explain, pole networks are dynamic and pole conditions frequently change. We find that the record sufficiently demonstrates that attempting to keep a fully up-to-date list of the number of attachments or pending applications on every pole would be a very time-consuming and expensive proposition. (Some attachers also sought to require pole owners to produce information on utility transformers or voltage on a pole or the total attachment load on the pole, but utilities either deny the usefulness of such information or state that they do not track it.) Even if some utilities track this information, requiring them to compile the information and send it across a vast and shifting landscape of attachers and poles—and to keep that information updated—would be a considerable burden. Although attachers assert there would be some value in having this kind of data earlier, even if it is old, we find that, as with the proposed pole attachment database discussed above, any purported benefit is outweighed by the potentially considerable cost utilities would have to bear in complying with such a requirement. 36. Data Supporting Make-Ready Estimates. With regard to the request that utilities be required to provide more detailed supporting data in their make-ready estimates, particularly regarding the utility's costs, we again decline to adopt any new requirement. Current rules already require utilities to provide supporting cost details in their make-ready cost estimates. If utilities are not complying with those rules, attachers remain free to invoke the complaint process or seek mediation. 37. Financial Records Regarding Poles. We decline attachers' requests to create new obligations requiring utilities to provide additional financial data regarding poles and attachment rates, including outside plant records (also called continuing property records) as part of the rules being adopted at this time. (Continuing Property Records are “[o]utside plant records relevant to poles,” typically “including a detailed accounting of the units associated with accounts used to report pole plant investment such as vintage height, class, etc.” Several attachers repeated these requests in later submissions, asking that utilities be required to disclose a range of information related to rates, rather than only the information the utility relied on in computing rates, to enable attachers to, for example, evaluate the validity of utilities' reliance on presumptions in the pole attachment rate formula.) Attachers argue that such a duty for utilities to provide information will reduce rate disputes or make them easier to resolve. Our focus here, however, is on deployment rather than rate disputes. Further, § 1.1404(e) and (f) of the Commission's rules—which we do not alter here—already require that pole owners, upon request of a cable operator or telecommunications carrier, provide the information they have relied on in calculating rates, and information an attacher seeks to rely on in establishing that a rate, term, or condition is not just and reasonable. The Commission has explained that “it is critical that attaching entities have this information well in advance of executive-level discussions to ensure that those pre-complaint negotiations have a chance of success.” (NCTA contends the former language in § 1.1404(g) was inadvertently removed in a prior rule revision. We disagree. The Commission sought to “streamline the rules in [§ ] 1.1404” by removing the long list of information specified in that section but did not narrow the scope of information utilities must provide attachers. In light of these existing rules and the policy stated by the Commission in 2018, to the extent an attacher has a specific dispute with a utility, it already can seek and obtain certain financial data from the utility, prior to filing a complaint, under current rules.) We therefore decline to impose a new, broader duty to disclose additional financial records related to poles. (USTelecom, whose members include both pole owners and attachers, argues that imposing a duty beyond current law “would not accelerate broadband deployment or reduce its costs, but would likely have the opposite effect by diverting broadband providers' capital away from their own broadband deployment to subsidize their competitors' builds.”) [IV. Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis] 38. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) was incorporated into the Second FNPRM. The Commission sought written public comment on the proposals in the Second FNPRM, including comment on the IRFA. No comments were filed addressing the IRFA. This present Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) conforms to the RFA. A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Fourth Report and Order 39. In the Fourth Report and Order, the Commission adopts rules and policy changes that will make the pole attachment process faster and cheaper, particularly when poles have to be replaced during broadband buildouts. In the last five years, the Commission took significant steps in setting standards for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing telecommunications companies with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. B. Summary of Significant Issues Raised by Public Comments in Response to the IRFA 40. There were no comments raised that specifically addressed the proposed rules and policies presented in the Second FNPRM IRFA. Nonetheless, the Commission considered the potential impact of the rules proposed in the IRFA on small entities and took steps where appropriate and feasible to reduce the compliance burden for small entities in order to reduce the economic impact of the rules enacted herein on such entities. C. Response to Comments by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration 41. Pursuant to the Small Business Jobs Act of 2010, which amended the RFA, the Commission is required to respond to any comments filed by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA), and to provide a detailed statement of any change made to the proposed rules as a result of those comments. The Chief Counsel did not file any comments in response to the proposed rules in this proceeding. D. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which Rules Will Apply 42. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that may be affected by the rules adopted herein. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small-business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business applies unless an agency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activities of the agency and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .) A “small-business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA. 43. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small entities that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatory flexibility analysis, according to data from the SBA's Office of Advocacy, in general a small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 44. Next, the type of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the population of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less according to the registration and tax data for exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 45. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand. U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the United States. (The Census of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal, and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (2,105 county, 18,729 municipal, and 16,097 town and township governments) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments (independent school districts) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the special purpose governments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the number of special purpose governments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 46. Wired Broadband internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 47. Additionally, according to Commission data on internet access services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include asymmetric and symmetric digital subscriber line (aDSL and sDSL) (collectively xDSL), Other Wireline, Cable Modem, and fiber to the premises (FTTP).) Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 48. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as voice over internet protocol (VoIP) service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of All Other Telecommunications. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firms in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 49. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide a variety of services, such as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not included in this industry.) 50. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 51. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 52. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers ( Incumbent LECs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 53. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 54. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 55. Operator Service Providers ( OSPs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of operator services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 56. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 57. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of the Wireless internet Service Providers Association (WISPA), including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfers or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 58. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) . This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 59. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to part 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 60. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in the designated entities section in part 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The Designated entities sections in subparts D through Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 61. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 62. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 64. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 65. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 67. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 68. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 69. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under part 90 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commission estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 70. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 71. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including frequency division duplex (FDD)- and time division duplex (TDD)-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 72. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 73. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 74. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806 MHz bands. Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 75. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 76. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800 MHz air-ground spectrum. 77. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 78. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 79. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 80. 3650-3700 MHz band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700 MHz band fall in the Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 81. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are small internet Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the 3650-3700 MHz band. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 82. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of title 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.) They also include the Upper Microwave Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 83. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 84. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 85. Broadband Radio Service and Educational Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of the Broadband Radio Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatory purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmission depends upon the transmitter power, the type of receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 86. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 87. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auction of BRS licenses, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the winning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 88. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million for the preceding five (5) years, and a very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 89. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications. Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 90. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of transmitting telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 91. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers may not provide telephone service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 92. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscription or fee basis. The broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 93. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the purpose of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. Of these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 94. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is a cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000. For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a small cable operator. (In the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determined that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 95. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer. This industry group is categorized based on fuel source and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control, and Electric Power Distribution. 96. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. E. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements 97. In the Fourth Report and Order, we (1) establish a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) adopt a new requirement that utilities retain copies of their cyclical pole inspection reports and, upon request, provide prospective pole attachers with the information included in the most recent report regarding the poles affected by a prospective attacher's submitted attachment application. Our new requirements are minimally burdensome as they merely require (1) parties seeking to have complaints placed on the Accelerated Docket to submit a form to the newly-established Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT) that will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket, and (2) utilities to provide information they already collect in the normal course of business for cyclical pole inspection reports. 98. Parties seeking both RBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. This initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b). Additionally, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. We amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe. The record indicates that utilities already prepare such reports, making this new transparency requirement consistent with the existing practices. For these reasons, we believe that small and other utilities will not have an issue complying with the new obligation. 99. The Commission does not have sufficient information on the record to determine whether small entities will be required to hire professionals to comply with its decisions, or to quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the Fourth Report and Order. While some small entities may have some unique burdens, the Commission anticipates the requirements for pole attachment disputes and data collection by utility companies will have minimal cost implications because many of these obligations are consistent with existing Commission regulations to file disputes, and existing practices by utilities to prepare pole inspection reports. F. Steps Taken To Minimize Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 100. The RFA requires an agency to provide a description of the steps the agency has taken to minimize the significant economic impact on small entities including a statement of the factual, policy, and legal reasons for selecting the alternative adopted in the final rule and why each one of the other significant alternatives to the rule considered by the agency which affect the impact on small entities was rejected. 101. The Commission took steps to minimize significant economic impact on small entities and considered alternatives to new rules and processes adopted in the Fourth Report and Order that may impact small entities. By establishing the RBAT, we addressed commenters' request that we expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes, the delay of which may impose greater harm on small providers. In considering alternatives to the rules, we declined to adopt certain proposals that are burdensome, unnecessary, or would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. For example, we agreed with utilities that they should not be required to gather and provide pole-related data for matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. We also declined to require that small and other utilities provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting an application because this data would be speculative and the build-out may never occur. Additionally, we declined to establish a single pole-information database or require each utility to create a database of all its poles. Similar to our prior decisions on this matter, the record demonstrates that the burdens and costs of creating such a database are considerable given that many utilities own or jointly own poles. Further, the scope of pole data attachers seek exists in information from pole inspection reports we require small and other utility companies to provide in the Fourth Report and Order. We considered and declined to require small and other utilities to provide financial data regarding poles and attachment rates because this would be overly burdensome for the utilities. We also considered but declined to require small and other utilities to provide information on the age or condition of the poles, or number of current or pending attachment applications for each pole because it could be burdensome, unnecessary, or unfeasible in some cases, and would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. Finally, we declined to require small and other utilities to provide more detailed supporting data in their make ready estimates because the current complaint process should be sufficient to address a potential dispute on this matter. G. Report to Congress 102. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order, including the FRFA, in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act. In addition, the Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the FRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. A copy of the Fourth Report and Order (or summaries thereof) will also be published in the Federal Register . [V. Procedural Matters] 103. Regulatory Flexibility Act. The Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), requires that an agency prepare a regulatory flexibility analysis for notice and comment rulemakings, unless the agency certifies that the rule will not, if promulgated, have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small entities. Accordingly, we have prepared a Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) concerning the possible impact of the rule changes contained in the Fourth Report and Order on small entities. The FRFA is set forth herein. 104. Congressional Review Act. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). 105. Paperwork Reduction Act. This document may contain proposed new or modified information collection requirements subject to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (PRA), Public Law 104-13. Specifically, the rules adopted in 47 CFR 1.1411, 1.1415, and 1.1416 may require new or modified information collections. All such new or modified information collection requirements will be submitted to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) for review under Section 3507(d) of the PRA. OMB, the general public, and other Federal agencies will be invited to comment on the new or modified information collection requirements contained in this proceeding. In addition, we note that pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we previously sought specific comment on how the Commission might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In this document, we describe several steps we have taken to minimize the information collection burdens on small entities. [VI. Ordering Clauses] 106. Accordingly, it is ordered that pursuant to sections 1-4, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 151-54, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r), the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling hereby is adopted and part 1 of the Commission's Rules, 47 CFR part 1, is amended as set forth in Appendix A of the Fourth Report and Order. 107. It is further ordered that the Fourth Report and Order shall become effective 30 days after publication in the Federal Register , except that the amendments to § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415, 47 CFR 1.1411(c)(4), 1.1415, which may contain new or modified information collection requirements, will not become effective until the Office of Management and Budget completes review of any information collection requirements that the Wireline Competition Bureau determines is required under the Paperwork Reduction Act. The Commission directs the Wireline Competition Bureau to announce the effective date for § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415 by subsequent Public Notice. 108. It is further ordered that, pursuant to 47 CFR 1.4(b)(1), the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Fourth Report and Order will commence on the date that a summary of the Fourth Report and Order is published in the Federal Register , and the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Declaratory Ruling will commence upon release of the Declaratory Ruling. 109. It is further ordered that the Commission's Office of the Secretary, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis and Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. 110. It is further ordered that the Office of the Managing Director, Performance Evaluation and Records Management, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act, see 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Marlene Dortch, Secretary. [Final Rules] The Federal Communications Commission amends part 1 of title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Delayed indefinitely, amend § 1.1411 by adding paragraph (c)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (c) * * * (4) Information from cyclical pole inspection reports. (i) Upon submitting its attachment application, a new attacher may request in writing that the utility provide, as to the poles covered by such attachment application, the information regarding those poles contained in the utility's most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or, if available, any more recent pole inspection report. The utility shall provide the new attacher with this information within ten (10) business days of the new attacher's written request. (ii) Utilities shall retain copies of their pole inspection reports, in the form they are created, until a superseding report covering the poles included in the attachment application is completed. (iii) For purposes of this section, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of a routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (iv) After requesting and receiving pole inspection information from a utility related to poles covered by its application, a new attacher may amend an attachment application at any time until the utility grants or denies the original application. (A) A utility that receives such an amended attachment application may, at its option, restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) for responding to the application and conducting the survey. (B) A utility electing to restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) shall notify the attacher of its intent to do so within five (5) business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day (or 60th day, if applicable) after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. § 1.1415 [Redesignated as § 1.1416] 3. Redesignate § 1.1415 as § 1.1416. 4. Delayed indefinitely, add a new § 1.1415 to read as follows: § 1.1415 Dispute resolution procedures for pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment; functions of the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team. (a) An inter-bureau team, to be known as the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT), shall be established to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that are alleged to impede or delay the deployment of broadband facilities and to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. The RBAT shall consist of one or more staff from the Enforcement Bureau and one or more staff from the Wireline Competition Bureau. Senior staff in the Enforcement Bureau and the Wireline Competition Bureau shall designate individuals from their respective bureaus to serve on the RBAT. (b) The RBAT shall prioritize the resolution of a pole attachment dispute that a party seeking RBAT review has alleged is impeding or delaying an active broadband deployment project, including where the party is also seeking placement of the dispute on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. The RBAT shall gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and shall have discretion to decide the most appropriate process for resolving the dispute, including recommending an RBAT-supervised mediation process pursuant to § 1.737, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other appropriate action. Although RBAT-supervised mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. The RBAT may recommend to the parties use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined in paragraph (e) of this section, that a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket. (c) A party to a pole attachment dispute, prior to filing a formal complaint, may request RBAT review and assessment of such dispute if the party believes the dispute is impeding or delaying the deployment of a broadband facilities project. The party seeking RBAT review and assessment shall first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) by phone and in writing of the request. The MDRD Chief shall direct the requesting party to the location of a form on the MDRD website—FCC-5653, Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. (d) Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT shall schedule a meeting, through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that the party seeking RBAT review or any other party or parties to the dispute provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. In the initial meeting, or shortly thereafter, the RBAT shall provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including RBAT-supervised mediation pursuant to § 1.737; use of the Accelerated Docket; and/or any other appropriate action. If the parties seek RBAT-supervised mediation, the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, may waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (e) The RBAT shall have discretion to decide whether a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, involving a dispute that a party alleges to be impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. In determining whether to accept a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT shall base its decision on a totality of the factors from the following list: (1) Whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act, or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; (2) Whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities or services, especially in an unserved or underserved area; (3) Whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; (4) The number and complexity of the issues in dispute; (5) Whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; (6) The likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; (7) The likely need for expert testimony; (8) The ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; (9) Whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; (10) Willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and (11) Such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding.
# Proposed Rule # Final Rule
1 [Subject] 1 [Subject]
2 Accelerating Wireline Broadband Deployment by Removing Barriers to Infrastructure Investment 2 Accelerating Wireline Broadband Deployment by Removing Barriers to Infrastructure Investment
3 3
4 [Summary] 4 [Summary]
5 SUMMARY: In this document, the Commission adopted a Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (FNPRM) that tentatively concludes that the Commission should take further action to facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications that are submitted in large numbers. It also seeks comment on whether the Commission should modify its self-help rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly. Finally, it seeks comment on the impact of contractor availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready for surveys and make-ready work. 5 SUMMARY: In this document, the Federal Communications Commission (Commission) establishes rules creating a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband buildouts.
6 6
7 [Effective Dates] 7 [Effective Dates]
8 DATES: Comments are due on or before February 13, 2024, and reply comments are due on or before February 28, 2024. Written comments on the Paperwork Reduction Act proposed information collection requirements must be submitted by the public, Office of Management and Budget (OMB), and other interested parties on or before March 11, 2024. 8 DATES: Effective February 12, 2024, except for §§ 1.1411(c)(4) (amendatory instruction 2) and 1.1415 (amendatory instruction 4), which are delayed indefinitely. The Commission will publish a document in the Federal Register announcing the effective date for those sections.
9 9
10 [Addresses] 10 [Supplementary Information]
11 ADDRESSES: Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's rules, 47 CFR 1.415, 1.419, interested parties may file comments and reply comments on or before the dates indicated in this document. Comments and reply comments may be filed using the Commission's Electronic Comment Filing System (ECFS). See Electronic Filing of Documents in Rulemaking Proceedings, 63 FR 24121 (1998). Interested parties may file comments or reply comments, identified by CG Docket No. 17-59 and WC Docket No. 17-97 by any of the following methods: • Electronic Filers: Comments may be filed electronically by accessing ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs/. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to file by paper must file an original and one copy of each filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and until further notice, the Commission no longer accepts any hand or messenger delivered filings. • Commercial overnight mail (other than U.S. Postal Service Express Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050 Junction Drive, Annapolis Junction, MD 20701. • U.S. Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. In addition to filing comments with the Secretary, a copy of any comments on the Paperwork Reduction Act proposed information collection requirements contained herein should be submitted to the Federal Communications Commission via email to PRA@fcc.gov and to Nicole Ongele, FCC, via email to Nicole.Ongele@fcc.gov. 11 SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: This is a summary of the Commission's Fourth Report and Order in WC Docket No. 17-84, adopted December 13, 2023, and released December 15, 2023. The full text of this document is available for public inspection at the following internet address: https://docs.fcc.gov/public/attachments/FCC-23-109A1.pdf. To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities ( e.g., Braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at (202) 418-0530. Synopsis I. Introduction 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever Federal investment in broadband, as well as other Federal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the necessary infrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved and underserved areas in the United States. Key to these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission has taken significant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in states that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the District of Columbia have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently only apply to cable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission's pole attachment rules to broadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. II. Background 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the pole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act, the Commission determined that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the benefiting party must assume the cost of the modification. (Section 224(h) states that whenever the owner of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the costs incurred by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible. Section 224(i) states that an entity that obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the costs of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including the owner of such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order (83 FR 31659-02, July 9, 2018), the Commission reiterated that application of the cost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of pole replacements. Specifically, NCTA asked the Commission to declare that: (1) utilities must share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with pole replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband services to Americans in unserved areas. 5. In the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that the record developed in response to the NCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking ( Second FNPRM ) (87 FR 25181-01, Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that the Fourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not caused (necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the costs of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extent to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costs of pole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second FNPRM also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potential attachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expand use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachment complaints and the specific criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. (To the extent that the Fourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) III. Report and Order 7. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt measures to expedite resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment. Specifically, we (1) establish an agency-wide rapid response team to provide coordinated review and assessment of such pole attachment disputes and to recommend effective dispute resolution procedures, and (2) adopt specific criteria to guide that team when considering whether a complaint (or portion thereof) should be included on the Enforcement Bureau's Accelerated Docket. We also require utilities to provide information regarding pole conditions and scheduled replacements to the extent that information is contained in cyclical pole inspection reports that utilities already create and maintain in the ordinary course of their business, or in pole inspection reports created between cyclical reports. (Both pole attachers and utilities made several other proposals, not addressed herein, regarding the process for pole attachments and replacements and ways they believe the process could be improved to reduce disputes and promote broadband deployment.) A. Accelerating Resolution of Pole Attachment Disputes That Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment 8. We amend our rules to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment by establishing a Commission intra-agency rapid response team—called the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT)—to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. (We codify these amendments in part 1, subpart J, of the Commission's rules ( i.e., Pole Attachment Complaint Procedures) by redesignating current § 1.1415 as § 1.1416 and adding a new § 1.1415. These rule amendments apply only to disputes involving pole attachments of a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service and do not apply to disputes involving pole attachments of a broadband-only internet service provider. They also do not apply to disputes involving poles that are owned or controlled by a railroad, the Federal Government, a state (including a political subdivision thereof such as a municipality), or a cooperative association, or where the poles at issue are located in a state, or the District of Columbia, that has certified to the Commission that it regulates the rates, terms, and conditions of pole attachments in that state or jurisdiction pursuant to 47 U.S.C. 224(c). Should we adopt the proposal set forth in the Open internet NPRM (88 FR 76048-01, Nov. 3, 2023) to reclassify broadband-only internet service as a telecommunications service, section 224 would once again apply to broadband-only internet service providers deployments.) At the outset, we emphasize that we expect all parties to comply with the Commission's pole attachment rules and to negotiate in good faith to craft solutions that suit the needs of attachers and utilities to facilitate deployment projects. We recognize, however, that in some instances disagreements arise as to the conduct of one or multiple parties, and we encourage parties in those instances to avail themselves of the Commission's dispute resolution processes to both facilitate the resolution of disputes and, when necessary, use the formal adjudication process to develop precedent upon which parties can rely to settle future potential disputes. In this document, we amend our rules to create the RBAT in an effort to make the Commission's pole attachment dispute resolution process more responsive and adaptable with the goal of facilitating deployment. 9. The RBAT will be charged with expediting the resolution of these disputes by swiftly engaging key stakeholders, gathering relevant information, distilling issues in dispute, and recommending to the parties, where appropriate, an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a complaint (or portion of a complaint) on the Accelerated Docket based on consideration of specified criteria, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. (The Schools, Health &amp; Libraries Broadband (SHLB) Coalition suggests that creation of the RBAT may result in a needless administrative step and associated delay, and suggests that the RBAT, if created, be vested with authority to resolve disputes without going through the additional step of a complaint process. We decline to adopt this approach. The RBAT is designed to assist parties in resolving their dispute expeditiously without need for litigation. But if parties are unable to reach a resolution, either through mediation or other means, our existing complaint procedures, including the Accelerated Docket, ensure a means of adjudicating the dispute in accordance with due process.) 10. In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on NCTA's proposed adoption of policies “favoring the placement of pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas on the [Commission's] Accelerated Docket[,]” a mechanism that requires the Commission to quickly resolve disputes between parties within 60 days. (Under § 1.736(a), complaint proceedings on the Accelerated Docket must be concluded within 60 days, and are therefore subject to shorter pleading deadlines and other modifications to the procedural rules that govern formal complaint proceedings.) It also sought comment on measures that would expedite the resolution of “pole replacement[ ]” disputes and on criteria for determining more generally “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” Based on broad record support among attachers for further streamlining our processes as applied to disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we conclude that the targeted measures outlined below are warranted and will advance the Commission's goal of timely broadband deployment. 11. As the Commission observed in the Second FNPRM, our current rules provide a 180-day deadline (or shot clock) for final action on pole access complaints where a cable television system operator or provider of telecommunications service claims that it has been denied access to a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way owned or controlled by a utility. (For purposes of this subsection, the Commission has defined a “pole access complaint” as a complaint “filed by a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service that alleges a complete denial of access to a utility pole[,]” and clarified that “[the] term [pole access complaint] does not encompass a complaint alleging that a utility is imposing unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions that amount to a denial of pole access.”) In addition, a 270-day shot clock currently applies to final action on all other pole attachment complaints ( i.e., those alleging unjust or unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions of attachment). Several commenters assert that these timeframes are commercially unreasonable for attachers seeking to deploy broadband networks, particularly in rural or unserved areas. (Charter asserts that the “[m]ere existence ” of a path allowing more routine use of the Accelerated Docket “could help broadband providers resolve disagreements without the need for Commission intervention” by “provid[ing] attachers facing government-imposed construction deadlines with a more credible option of seeking relief, thereby reducing the one-sided leverage held by pole owners today.”) NCTA submits that the need for expedited procedures has gained greater urgency recently for “providers . . . receiving government funds to build out broadband under deadlines that afford no time for a lengthy complaint process.” A number of commenters therefore propose more routine use of the Accelerated Docket, with its 60-day shot clock, especially for pole attachment disputes involving time-sensitive deployments in unserved areas. Several commenters also contend that the current Accelerated Docket rule does not sufficiently motivate utilities to comply with their obligation to allow pole access because it is unclear when Commission staff, in the exercise of their discretion under § 1.736(d) of our rules, will include a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Crown Castle asserts that “without certainty that the complaint will be promptly resolved, the decision to bring a formal complaint to the Commission involves business decisions about whether the resolution will be too late to meaningfully assist the deployment.” On the other hand, other commenters argue that sweeping or widespread imposition of the Accelerated Docket rule, with its highly compressed timeframes, could raise potential fairness and due process concerns given the complexity of the issues raised in most pole attachment cases. (Other commenters question the necessity of new rules (1) due to the relative infrequency of requests for Accelerated Docket treatment, see, e.g., Edison Electric Institute Comments at 54 (challenging the need to further expedite “denial of access” complaints based on “[t]he complete absence of [such] complaints before the Commission”), or (2) due to the lack of evidence of instances where dilatory actions of utilities have caused broadband grant recipients to lose access to such funding.) After considering these competing concerns, we find that the adoption of targeted dispute resolution reforms, as set forth below, will address the expressed need for quicker resolution of pole attachment disputes that may impede or delay broadband deployment while ensuring sufficient fairness and due process for all involved parties. 12. Disputes Subject to RBAT Review and Assessment Procedures. The Commission asked in the Second FNPRM whether any new dispute resolution procedures should be “limited to complaints that raise only discrete pole access issues” and do not require consideration of “whether a rate, term, or condition of attachment is unjust or unreasonable.” To address the need for timely broadband deployment, particularly in unserved or underserved areas, we apply the new procedures discussed below to any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities. To provide greater clarity regarding when such a dispute would be eligible for placement on the Accelerated Docket, we also adopt below specific criteria that will guide the RBAT in determining when a dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition. In light of the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, disputes raising relatively straightforward legal and evidentiary issues, as determined based on the RBAT's review of these criteria, are more likely to be considered appropriate for placement on the Accelerated Docket. 13. Although the record reflects differing views regarding which disputes should be subject to new dispute resolution procedures, a significant proportion of commenters seeking such reforms ask that we limit the focus of any new procedures to disputes that are interfering with active broadband deployment plans or projects. We adopt this suggestion based on our conclusion that focusing on pole attachment disputes that impede or delay a provider's ability to deploy new broadband facilities will align with, and advance most directly, the goal of timely broadband deployment. (Several utilities argue that across-the-board application of dispute resolution reforms to an entire category of disputes would fail to account for complexities in individual cases. But such comments assume that Accelerated Docket treatment would automatically apply to all disputes within the identified category. In fact, under the reforms we adopt herein, such disputes will receive individualized assessment and review (by the RBAT) based on a totality of factors analysis.) 14. RBAT Review and Assessment of Disputes that Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment. To expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay an active broadband deployment project, we amend our rules to establish the RBAT, which will be comprised of Enforcement Bureau and Wireline Competition Bureau staff with expertise in the Commission's pole attachment rules and orders. We charge the RBAT with prioritizing the resolution of any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities (including where the party is also seeking placement of the matter on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736). In performing this role, the RBAT will gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and provide guidance and advice on the most effective means of resolving the parties' dispute. Where appropriate, the RBAT will recommend to the parties an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a complaint, or portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. The RBAT will recommend use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined below, that a complaint, or portion thereof, is suitable for accelerated disposition. (The RBAT may recommend placement of a dispute on the Accelerated Docket in the exercise of the discretion afforded Commission staff “to decide whether a complaint, or portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket.” A prospective complainant may accept the recommendation, with or without the consent of the other party or parties to the dispute, by moving forward with the agreed upon schedule and process established by Commission staff in the case.) To request RBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party to the dispute contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. (The RBAT review and assessment process will be available only to attachers and pole owners that are direct parties to such dispute (including any legal counsel retained to represent a party in that specific dispute). For parties seeking both RBAT review and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, this initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b).) The MDRD Chief will direct the party to a streamlined form on the MDRD website—Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. The form will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute, and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket. (The form will require a submitting party to provide: information identifying the parties and the services they offer; the section(s) of the Act or Commission rule or order alleged to have been violated; a brief description of the parties' dispute (including how it relates to broadband deployment plans or projects, whether such plans or projects are subject to a deadline under a government funded broadband program, whether the dispute arises in an unserved or underserved area, what harm is occurring or is likely to occur as a result of the situation, and what aspects of the dispute require immediate redress); the specific relief sought; whether the parties have entered into a non-disclosure agreement; the steps the party has taken to resolve the matter with other parties to the dispute; a statement as to whether the parties are amenable to mediation; and a statement indicating whether the party intends to seek inclusion of the matter on the Accelerated Docket. The form also will elicit information relevant to whether the dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition including, for example, the number of poles in question, the number and complexity of claims at issue, and the likely need for discovery or expert affidavits. The RBAT may request additional information from the submitting party if more information is necessary to determine a course of action.) 15. Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT will schedule a meeting through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that one or both parties provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. (NCTA suggests that we specify the information the respondent will be required to provide. We find this approach impracticable, as the information required in a response will depend on the complainant's allegations. We employ a more flexible approach that enables the RBAT to request relevant information and documentation from either party, as appropriate.) In the initial meeting, or in a meeting shortly thereafter, the RBAT will provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including staff-supervised mediation, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other action. (Because mediation will be a prominent feature of the RBAT review, we decline to adopt INCOMPAS's proposal that the 180-day deadline for resolution of a pole access complaint be triggered by the submission of the request for RBAT Review and Assessment. If mediation succeeds, there will be no need for a complaint. If it does not, the filing of a complaint will commence review period deadlines under the relevant Commission rules.) To that end, the RBAT will attempt to distill the issues in dispute and identify issues that are most impacting a party's broadband deployment plans. For example, the RBAT may encourage parties to focus on the resolution of one or more threshold issues, or what appears to be the most urgent issue(s), if it finds that doing so may help the parties to narrow their dispute. Likewise, the RBAT may encourage parties, where appropriate, to streamline the proceeding by agreeing to focus on “test cases”— i.e., disputes over specific poles that the parties agree are representative of disputes over multiple poles. In this way, deciding the issue as to the test case will have broader impact. 16. Should the RBAT recommend staff-supervised mediation, it shall be conducted pursuant to § 1.737 of the Commission's rules. Because § 1.737 generally contemplates that mediations will be conducted by MDRD staff, we delegate authority to the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, to modify or waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (Waiver is appropriate for “good cause,” and is warranted only if both: (1) special circumstances warrant a deviation from the general rule, and (2) such deviation will serve the public interest.) The strict confidentiality requirements will apply to all written and oral communications prepared or made for purposes of a mediation pursuant to § 1.737(f), including mediation submissions, offers of compromise, and staff and party comments made during the course of the mediation (Mediation Communications). Through mediation, the RBAT will make every effort to settle or narrow the issues in dispute as expeditiously as possible. 17. In the event that the parties are unable to settle their dispute, and a prospective complainant seeks placement of its complaint on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT will decide whether the complaint or a portion of the complaint is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of the criteria set forth below. Because of the very short deadlines that apply in Accelerated Docket proceedings, Commission staff historically have carefully evaluated whether a particular dispute is appropriate for expedited disposition, resulting in the placement of relatively few cases on the Accelerated Docket. In evaluating whether a matter is suitable for expedited disposition, the RBAT must similarly be mindful of the due process concerns raised by commenters, such as the Pennsylvania PUC, regarding affording parties “the opportunity to be heard at a meaningful time and in a meaningful manner.” In addition, although mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under rule 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Finally, if the RBAT determines that a matter is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT is authorized to send appropriate matters to the Commission's Administrative Law Judge (ALJ) for an expedited “minitrial” ( i.e., trial-type hearing) as contemplated by § 1.736(h). 18. Criteria for Placement on the Accelerated Docket. The Commission sought comment in the Second FNPRM on the adoption of specific criteria to guide Commission staff on “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” (For example, the Commission asked if its policy should “take into account the number and complexity of the claims, need for discovery, need for expert affidavits, and ability of the parties to stipulate to facts.”) Based on the requests of several commenters for greater predictability surrounding Accelerated Docket placement decisions with respect to pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we establish criteria to aid the RBAT in making determinations regarding the placement of such matters on the Accelerated Docket. 19. In light of the strict time constraints that apply in Accelerated Docket cases, we decline to adopt a “presumption,” as suggested by some commenters, that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket and, instead, entrust the RBAT with this decision based on the criteria specified below. (There is no basis for us to conclude that a dispute will be suitable for the Accelerated Docket simply based on the number of poles at issue as INCOMPAS's proposal suggests.) We agree with Dominion/Xcel that a “one-size-fits-all policy” would not adequately take into account the complexity of the issues in particular complaint proceedings. We also agree with the Coalition of Concerned Utilities that the 60-day timeframe will be “too short” to resolve certain pole attachment disputes, and thus “blanket imposition” of the Accelerated Docket requirements would be unreasonable and “raise due process concerns” for utilities. Although Charter argues that the presumption could simply be rebutted if a particular complaint raises unusually complex issues, we reject this argument based on our experience with formal complaints. In particular, when parties oppose the operation of a presumption in a particular proceeding, these rebuttal efforts often lead to significant additional argumentation attendant to resolving the specific question of the presumption, thus unnecessarily complicating resolution of the underlying issues in dispute. To avoid the potential for unnecessary rounds of argumentation and to ensure that complaints accepted onto the Accelerated Docket are suitable for decision under the relevant time constraints, we reject proposals to create a presumption that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket. 20. After careful consideration of the record on this issue, we direct the RBAT to consider the factors below in determining whether to accept onto the Accelerated Docket a pole attachment dispute that is allegedly impeding or delaying a broadband facilities deployment plan or project. The RBAT shall determine eligibility for placement on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of these factors: • whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; • whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities, especially in an unserved or underserved area; • whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; • the number and complexity of the issues in dispute; • whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; • the likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; • the likely need for expert testimony; • the ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; • whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; • the willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and • such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding. The first three of these criteria will help the RBAT to ensure appropriate use of the Commission's processes in support of the goal of timely broadband deployment and ensure that the parties have made a sufficient effort to resolve or, at a minimum, identify and narrow the disputed issues prior to filing a complaint. The remaining criteria will help the RBAT to determine if a dispute is suitable for decision under the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, and also require it to consider whether including a matter on the Accelerated Docket would ensure the prompt and fair adjudication of the dispute. (A responding party's refusal to stipulate to facts or cooperate in the exchange of relevant information bearing on disputed facts will not itself defeat a request for acceptance of a pole attachment dispute on the Accelerated Docket.) By specifying the criteria that the RBAT must consider in making its determination, we hope to make the Accelerated Docket a more useful tool in the resolution of eligible pole attachment disputes and provide prospective complainants with greater certainty regarding which complaints will be deemed suitable for expedited resolution. 21. We will closely monitor the impact of the dispute resolution procedures adopted here and consider additional streamlining measures should we observe ongoing delay tactics or other unreasonable practices that hinder the ability of broadband providers to deploy new services or facilities. (Two commenters suggest narrowing the list of criteria to avoid delay tactics by utilities. We find that eliminating criteria is unnecessary, however, as these criteria are holistic in nature, and no single one will be dispositive. Moreover, the RBAT is not required to credulously accept assertions from either party.) B. Increasing Transparency by Providing Attachers With Utility Pole Inspection Information 22. We next amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe (if any). (The record demonstrates that utilities conduct inspections of their poles on a multi-year cycle, either as part of normal network management or as required by state law.) In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on requiring utilities to provide more information about their poles to prospective attachers, in order to reduce disputes. (Utilities did not challenge the Commission's general jurisdiction to require them to provide relevant information to prospective attachers, and ACA Connects asserted the Commission has such authority.) Several attaching entities indicated pole inspection information would be helpful in planning deployments. (This requirement applies only in the states that have not certified that they regulate pole attachments themselves. To the extent such reports may include sensitive or confidential network or financial information, we rely upon utilities and attachers to address the issue through redactions or non-disclosure agreements.) We believe this new requirement strikes a reasonable balance between additional transparency for prospective attachers and ensuring the utilities' expenditure of resources is no greater than necessary. As discussed below, however, we also strongly encourage utilities to voluntarily share pole-related information that is reasonably available and that they track in the normal course of business, both before and after receiving attachment applications, and we intend to continue to monitor the record in this proceeding to determine if additional information sharing mandates may be required. 23. For the purposes of the new transparency requirement, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle, while a periodic pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the inspection of any of its poles outside the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (Electric Utilities request that the new rule not require utilities to provide periodic pole inspection reports, arguing that the requirement will create confusion and invite disputes. We find that the definition of “periodic inspection report” is sufficiently clear and note that no other utility commenters claimed the definition was vague or otherwise problematic. We further find that this requirement is an important aspect of the rule. Cyclical pole inspections typically occur several years apart, sometimes by ten or more years, and periodic inspection reports will contain more recent inspection information. We also decline the Electric Utilities' request to seek further comment on transparency requirements in lieu of adopting a rule on report sharing. We find that the record is sufficient to adopt an information sharing rule at this time and the rule we adopt strikes an appropriate balance between providing attachers with additional helpful information while not being overly resource-intensive for utilities. Indeed, several utility parties are supportive of the new transparency requirement.) We note that this new transparency requirement is consistent with the existing practices of certain utilities to prepare such reports. When asking for information about the status of a utility's poles for a planned buildout, the attacher must submit its information request no earlier than contemporaneously with an attachment application. The utility will have ten business days to respond to the request. (The utility has the same amount of time to determine whether the application is complete.) This should allow sufficient time before the make-ready survey for the attacher to revise or amend its application as may be appropriate based on the information it receives. (“The term make-ready means the modification or replacement of a utility pole, or of the lines or equipment on the utility pole, to accommodate additional facilities on the utility pole.” After receiving a complete attachment application, a utility conducts a make-ready survey and provides a make-ready cost estimate to the attacher. During the survey stage, “the pole owner conducts an engineering study to determine whether and where attachment is feasible, and what make-ready is required.”) 24. We recognize that in some situations, the information provided by utilities in their pole inspection reports may lead new attachers to amend their attachment applications. In order to ensure that utilities have enough time to review such applications, in situations when the utility receives an amended attachment application prior to granting or denying the original application, we will allow a utility the option to restart the 45-day period for responding to the application on the merits and conducting the survey. (The option to restart the time period also applies to larger orders that are subject to a 60-day timeframe.) Utilities electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period in this manner must notify the attacher within 5 business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. (For example, if an amended application was filed on the 42nd day following the utility's determination that the original application was complete, the utility would only have three days, not five business days, to notify the attacher that the utility is restarting the 45-day application review and survey.) To avoid unnecessary delays and costs, we strongly encourage attachers to notify utilities of their intent to file, and to file, amended applications as quickly as possible after receiving a pole inspection report from the utility. We also encourage utilities to exercise their right to restart this 45-day period judiciously and to review amended applications as quickly as possible even when electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period. (Several parties asked that we require an automatic restart of the 45-day response period or start the application process over in such instances by requiring an attacher to file a new application rather than an amended application. We decline these requests and find that the procedures we adopt are sufficiently tailored to account for the needs of utilities to review amended applications while not needlessly slowing deployment. Under the new rule, utilities will always have the option of electing to restart the 45-day review period; but given that there may be instances where an amendment is minor or otherwise will not require a restart of the 45-day period, we find it reasonable to require utilities to actually review an amended application to determine whether a restart is necessary given the specific circumstances.) Regardless of whether the utility elects to restart the 45-day response period, any additional survey costs necessitated by the amended application, such as a second survey after a survey for the original application has been completed, will be borne by the new attacher consistent with the new attacher's obligation to pay for make-ready costs associated with its application. 25. In connection with the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule, we also require utilities to retain copies, in whatever form they were created, of any such cyclical or periodic pole inspection reports they conduct in the normal course of business, until such time as the utility completes a superseding cyclical pole inspection report covering the poles included in the attachment application. In creating these obligations, we reiterate that utilities are required to provide only the information they already possess and track in the normal course of conducting pole inspections at the time of the attacher's request for data. The new rule does not require utilities to collect or create new information for the sole purpose of responding to such requests or to provide all information they may possess on the affected poles outside their pole inspection reports. (Edison Electric Institute contends that “access to critical infrastructure by non-electric company personnel presents serious safety, reliability, and homeland security hazards,” and that “existing law bars electric companies from releasing some information about system infrastructure.” It does not directly assert, however, that utilities would be barred from disclosing information contained in a pole inspection report. And it notes that most of the information is “already available” and an attacher “can readily learn the condition” of poles by driving a proposed route. Although we do not know exactly what information utilities may include in their pole inspection reports, we anticipate that legal constraints on disclosure of critical infrastructure information can be addressed, to the extent that they arise, by the parties involved via appropriate redactions or use of a non-disclosure agreement. We do not intend our new rule to override laws precluding disclosure of certain information, but expect utilities to work in good faith to provide potential attachers with the information they can from their pole inspection reports.) We find this new limited requirement achieves a balance between a potential attacher's need for more information about the poles that it plans to use as part of a broadband buildout and the utility's interest in minimizing the burden of mandatory disclosures. 26. We conclude that requiring utilities to provide information about the state of their poles to attachers will help improve the attachment process and potentially reduce disputes. In particular, having such information early in the process will help attachers evaluate whether they want to adjust their plans in light of the poles' conditions. At the same time, we recognize the potential burdens on utilities that would result from imposing a mandate to compile extensive information for every pole attachment application the utility receives. We seek to strike a balance by (1) requiring utilities to provide such information as they already collect in the normal course of inspections done as part of managing their network and poles (which the record indicates include which poles have been identified as needing replacement), rather than having to gather information solely for attachers or from many disparate sources, and (2) tying requests for such information to poles contained in submitted attachment applications. 27. In striking this balance, we agree with utilities that they should not be required by rule to gather and provide extensive pole-related data for every pole attachment application about matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. The record shows that many utilities do not create specific maintenance or replacement schedules for poles. It also shows that some utilities provide a range of pole-related information—including whether any poles are red-tagged or otherwise identified for replacement—when responding to an attachment application after conducting a make-ready survey. We agree with the commenters asserting that a pre-application survey conducted by the attacher, or a make-ready survey conducted by a utility in response to a specific attachment application, are often the best ways to ensure the potential attacher and utility have up-to- date, accurate information on the current state of poles. (We recognize that a visual inspection may not necessarily provide all the information an attacher might desire. This supports requiring disclosure of pole inspection reports.) We also agree with Dominion/Xcel, however, that the information contained in general survey or pole inspection reports can be useful to prospective attachers in some cases. Therefore, although we decline at this time to impose broader duties on utilities to collect and provide more expansive pole-related information for every attachment application, we will require utilities to furnish already available information in pole inspection reports concerning specific poles upon request at the time an attachment application is submitted. (Some commenters support the balance struck in this new rule. Electric Utilities, on the other hand, request that any consideration of a rule to require disclosure of pole inspection reports be deferred to a further notice of proposed rulemaking.) 28. While we do not at this time codify a requirement for utilities to provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting a pole attachment application, as requested by some commenters, we understand that often utilities share pole information with attachers prior to the application process, particularly information not easily attained through visual inspection. We strongly encourage this pre-application collaboration and cooperation because there is value for both utilities and attachers in having the best available pole information to inform deployment forecasts and attachment requests. Although we recognize that some potential attachers could benefit from obtaining pole-related information prior to submitting an application, we decline to impose this requirement on utilities given that the underlying requests for information would be for preliminary build-out plans that may substantially change. Furthermore, establishing a pre-application duty for utilities would require the Commission to create a new process and timeline prior to the codified make-ready process, which has always been triggered by the filing of an application. Finally, given that prospective attachers also have the ability to gather information about poles on prospective routes through pre-application surveys and visual inspection of poles on a prospective route, we find that imposing an additional pre-application requirement on utilities is not justified at this time. (Through such visual inspection, an attacher typically can learn the age of a pole, whether it has been red tagged, when the most recent inspection occurred, and a pole's load and potential suitability for more attachments. As noted above, however, we also recognize that visual inspection alone may not always provide all the information an attacher may desire, thus supporting the new requirement that utilities provide attachers with cyclical and periodic pole inspection reports. For example, with regard to utility tags on poles, Crown Castle asserts that “not all poles are appropriately tagged or inspection tags may be missing, damaged, or unable to be interpreted without additional information from the pole owner.”) 29. We reject requests at this time that we mandate a variety of other disclosure requirements on utilities. (Several attachers requested that utilities be required to provide any relevant requested information about their poles that they retain in the ordinary course of business, which would go beyond pole inspection reports. While we encourage parties to voluntarily share information, we find that codifying a broad disclosure requirement for all information collected in the ordinary course of business could force utilities to expend significant resources to gather such information and could lead to additional disputes and complaints related to information sharing.) We agree with utilities that the most relevant information for purposes of an attachment request is whether the poles at issue are available or due for replacement. (Some utilities suspect that the purpose of many of the attachers' requests is only to provide ammunition for rate disputes with utilities, not to improve the attachment process.) For example, some attacher commenters ask the Commission to require utilities to create accessible databases (or establish a single database for all utilities) with information on things like pole age, condition, repair/replacement schedules, location, number of attachments, standard rate structure, and applicable engineering standards. They also ask that utilities be required to provide data from the owners' periodic load analyses for poles; the age, height, class, and condition of poles; and data on current attachments and pending attachment requests for relevant poles. And ACA Connects asks the Commission to require utilities to provide more details in their make-ready cost estimates to support those costs. For the reasons discussed below, we decline to adopt these requirements. With respect to certain financial information requested by some commenters regarding pole rates, we do not adopt new disclosure requirements, but make clear that some financial information is already required to be disclosed under our rules. 30. Before addressing these specific proposals, however, we note some attachers express concern that, by adopting a requirement to provide pole inspection reports but not codifying additional mandates, we may be inadvertently discouraging utilities from voluntarily providing pole-related information before receiving an attachment application, which at least some utilities do today. We stress that our actions in this final rule should not be understood to undermine or disincentivize such voluntary sharing. To the contrary, voluntary sharing of pole-related information is consistent with longstanding Commission policy favoring transparency in the pole attachment context, and we strongly encourage both utilities and attachers to collaborate and voluntarily share information with each other whenever such information is reasonably available and obtained in the normal course of business. (We reject claims that our actions here are inconsistent with the policy of promoting transparency, as Crown Castle asserts. To the contrary, this Order increases transparency by adopting a new disclosure requirement.) Voluntary sharing can be helpful to both attachers and utilities to promote more efficient buildouts by informing deployment forecasts, allowing more accurate applications, and decreasing disputes or delays after an application is submitted. (Such voluntary sharing also is helpful because “not all pole owners conduct these denominated inspections,” yet attachers still could benefit from receiving the kind of information that would have been included in such inspections had they occurred.) Having better and more accurate information prior to attachment applications will likely reduce make-ready costs, the frequency and severity of disputes, and improve the efficiency of the attachment process—benefiting both attachers and utilities. We will continue to monitor the record in this proceeding and will take further action if it becomes clear that voluntary information sharing arrangements are insufficiently promoting broadband deployment. 31. Database(s) of Pole Information. We decline (1) to require that each utility create an accessible database with an array of data on all its poles, or (2) to establish a single pole-information database for all utilities. The Commission rejected previous calls for a similar database requirement in 2011, in part based on the large burden outweighing potential benefits. We find that the 2011 reasoning remains valid. In particular, we find that the record continues to demonstrate that the burdens and costs of creating such a database (if a utility does not already have one) would be very large given the number of poles many utilities own or jointly own and the scope of pole data attachers seek, and that the alleged benefits of requiring such a database would be reduced by the new requirement we adopt in this final rule that utilities provide information from their pole inspection reports. Commenters contend that requiring such a pole-related database would help speed deployment by helping attachers plan better and avoid intermediate steps for both attachers and utilities. Utilities, however, assert that due to the very large number of poles they own or co-own and the ever-changing nature of pole networks, maintaining a fully up-to-date database would be almost impossible, and so the information for any given group of poles in a database could easily be out of date when the attacher needs it. One utility also submits that granting access to such voluminous pole information could result in the submission of incorrect applications. We find that the benefits of a database requirement remain speculative at best given how difficult it would be to keep such a large database up-to-date. 32. While some commenters argue that circumstances have changed since 2011, with some state utility commissions adopting database requirements for pole-related information, the states cited by these commenters are limited and, in any event, all regulate pole attachments at the state level pursuant to section 224(c) of the Act. As a result, compliance with pre-existing state-specific database requirements would likely offer little, if any, relief in complying with a newly imposed Federal database requirement. To the extent any utilities may have developed pole-related databases in states that do not regulate pole attachments, the record indicates that attachers are interested in specific types of data, not merely access to existing databases, which would require utilities to absorb additional, and potentially substantial, costs of either adding specific types of new data or searching databases for specific data of interest to attachers. (ACA Connects asserts that many utilities have developed pole-related databases since 2011, but it does not identify utilities that have done so in states that do not regulate pole attachments.) Again, we agree with the utilities that the value of such database information to attachers is highly unlikely to outweigh those burdens, as the information may well be out of date by the time an attacher submits an attachment request. Moreover, any added benefit would likely be minimal in light of the new information-sharing requirement we adopt in this final rule. 33. Loading Studies. According to NCTA, some utilities provide and allow attachers to rely on loading studies included in the utilities' cyclical pole inspection reports rather than making the attacher do its own loading study, but other utilities do not. NCTA asserts that “[w]here such studies have been conducted, pole owners should be required to use that existing analysis rather than forcing a new attacher to incur the expense and delay of performing a duplicative and redundant study.” We decline to adopt this proposal. To the extent pole inspection reports include loading studies, attachers will have access to such information under the new rule we adopt in this final rule. (In cases where the loading study is not part of the inspection report, we decline, at this time, to codify a requirement for a utility to provide an attacher with a loading study as NCTA requests, but strongly encourage utilities to provide such loading studies when reasonably requested and readily available.) We will not, however, dictate when a utility can require a loading study, as NCTA seems to request, as we continue to believe, consistent with the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, that such studies “can be important tools to address safety, reliability, and engineering concerns.” (NCTA also asserts that a utility should have to bear the cost of a loading analysis where none has been performed but the utility believes a study is necessary before allowing an attachment, and that utilities can instead recover the costs of such loading studies through annual attachment rental fees. As that issue relates to cost recovery rather than transparency, we do not address it here.) 34. Age, Height, Class, and Condition of Poles. We reject attachers' request to require utilities to provide data on the age, height, class, and condition of their poles, or the last date the pole was inspected, make-ready was conducted, or a pre-existing violation on the pole was fixed. The utilities state that they either routinely provide this type of data with make-ready estimates, that the information is accessible to attachers through their own pre-application surveys or when the attacher accompanies the utility on a make-ready survey, or that they do not track this data. To the extent utilities' pole inspection reports include such data, that information would be covered by the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule and available to attachers upon request after an application is filed. Given that attachers can often obtain this information either from the utility or through their own survey or inspection, we reject any additional requirement for pole condition information beyond that which we have already outlined, but we strongly encourage utilities to share this information when it is readily available and collected in the normal course of business. 35. Existing Attachments and Pending Attachment Requests. We also decline to require that utilities provide data on the number of attachments or pending attachment applications for each pole covered by an attachment request. As the utilities explain, pole networks are dynamic and pole conditions frequently change. We find that the record sufficiently demonstrates that attempting to keep a fully up-to-date list of the number of attachments or pending applications on every pole would be a very time-consuming and expensive proposition. (Some attachers also sought to require pole owners to produce information on utility transformers or voltage on a pole or the total attachment load on the pole, but utilities either deny the usefulness of such information or state that they do not track it.) Even if some utilities track this information, requiring them to compile the information and send it across a vast and shifting landscape of attachers and poles—and to keep that information updated—would be a considerable burden. Although attachers assert there would be some value in having this kind of data earlier, even if it is old, we find that, as with the proposed pole attachment database discussed above, any purported benefit is outweighed by the potentially considerable cost utilities would have to bear in complying with such a requirement. 36. Data Supporting Make-Ready Estimates. With regard to the request that utilities be required to provide more detailed supporting data in their make-ready estimates, particularly regarding the utility's costs, we again decline to adopt any new requirement. Current rules already require utilities to provide supporting cost details in their make-ready cost estimates. If utilities are not complying with those rules, attachers remain free to invoke the complaint process or seek mediation. 37. Financial Records Regarding Poles. We decline attachers' requests to create new obligations requiring utilities to provide additional financial data regarding poles and attachment rates, including outside plant records (also called continuing property records) as part of the rules being adopted at this time. (Continuing Property Records are “[o]utside plant records relevant to poles,” typically “including a detailed accounting of the units associated with accounts used to report pole plant investment such as vintage height, class, etc.” Several attachers repeated these requests in later submissions, asking that utilities be required to disclose a range of information related to rates, rather than only the information the utility relied on in computing rates, to enable attachers to, for example, evaluate the validity of utilities' reliance on presumptions in the pole attachment rate formula.) Attachers argue that such a duty for utilities to provide information will reduce rate disputes or make them easier to resolve. Our focus here, however, is on deployment rather than rate disputes. Further, § 1.1404(e) and (f) of the Commission's rules—which we do not alter here—already require that pole owners, upon request of a cable operator or telecommunications carrier, provide the information they have relied on in calculating rates, and information an attacher seeks to rely on in establishing that a rate, term, or condition is not just and reasonable. The Commission has explained that “it is critical that attaching entities have this information well in advance of executive-level discussions to ensure that those pre-complaint negotiations have a chance of success.” (NCTA contends the former language in § 1.1404(g) was inadvertently removed in a prior rule revision. We disagree. The Commission sought to “streamline the rules in [§ ] 1.1404” by removing the long list of information specified in that section but did not narrow the scope of information utilities must provide attachers. In light of these existing rules and the policy stated by the Commission in 2018, to the extent an attacher has a specific dispute with a utility, it already can seek and obtain certain financial data from the utility, prior to filing a complaint, under current rules.) We therefore decline to impose a new, broader duty to disclose additional financial records related to poles. (USTelecom, whose members include both pole owners and attachers, argues that imposing a duty beyond current law “would not accelerate broadband deployment or reduce its costs, but would likely have the opposite effect by diverting broadband providers' capital away from their own broadband deployment to subsidize their competitors' builds.”) IV. Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis 38. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) was incorporated into the Second FNPRM. The Commission sought written public comment on the proposals in the Second FNPRM, including comment on the IRFA. No comments were filed addressing the IRFA. This present Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) conforms to the RFA. A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Fourth Report and Order 39. In the Fourth Report and Order, the Commission adopts rules and policy changes that will make the pole attachment process faster and cheaper, particularly when poles have to be replaced during broadband buildouts. In the last five years, the Commission took significant steps in setting standards for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing telecommunications companies with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. B. Summary of Significant Issues Raised by Public Comments in Response to the IRFA 40. There were no comments raised that specifically addressed the proposed rules and policies presented in the Second FNPRM IRFA. Nonetheless, the Commission considered the potential impact of the rules proposed in the IRFA on small entities and took steps where appropriate and feasible to reduce the compliance burden for small entities in order to reduce the economic impact of the rules enacted herein on such entities. C. Response to Comments by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration 41. Pursuant to the Small Business Jobs Act of 2010, which amended the RFA, the Commission is required to respond to any comments filed by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA), and to provide a detailed statement of any change made to the proposed rules as a result of those comments. The Chief Counsel did not file any comments in response to the proposed rules in this proceeding. D. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which Rules Will Apply 42. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that may be affected by the rules adopted herein. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small-business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business applies unless an agency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activities of the agency and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .) A “small-business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA. 43. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small entities that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatory flexibility analysis, according to data from the SBA's Office of Advocacy, in general a small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 44. Next, the type of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the population of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less according to the registration and tax data for exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 45. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand. U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the United States. (The Census of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal, and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (2,105 county, 18,729 municipal, and 16,097 town and township governments) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments (independent school districts) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the special purpose governments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the number of special purpose governments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 46. Wired Broadband internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 47. Additionally, according to Commission data on internet access services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include asymmetric and symmetric digital subscriber line (aDSL and sDSL) (collectively xDSL), Other Wireline, Cable Modem, and fiber to the premises (FTTP).) Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 48. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as voice over internet protocol (VoIP) service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of All Other Telecommunications. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firms in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 49. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide a variety of services, such as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not included in this industry.) 50. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 51. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 52. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers ( Incumbent LECs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 53. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 54. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 55. Operator Service Providers ( OSPs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of operator services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 56. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 57. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of the Wireless internet Service Providers Association (WISPA), including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfers or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 58. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) . This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 59. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to part 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 60. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in the designated entities section in part 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The Designated entities sections in subparts D through Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 61. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 62. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 64. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 65. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 67. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 68. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 69. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under part 90 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commission estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 70. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 71. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including frequency division duplex (FDD)- and time division duplex (TDD)-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 72. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 73. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 74. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806 MHz bands. Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 75. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 76. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800 MHz air-ground spectrum. 77. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 78. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 79. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 80. 3650-3700 MHz band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700 MHz band fall in the Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 81. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are small internet Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the 3650-3700 MHz band. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 82. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of title 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.) They also include the Upper Microwave Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 83. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 84. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 85. Broadband Radio Service and Educational Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of the Broadband Radio Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatory purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmission depends upon the transmitter power, the type of receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 86. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 87. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auction of BRS licenses, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the winning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 88. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million for the preceding five (5) years, and a very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 89. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications. Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 90. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of transmitting telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 91. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers may not provide telephone service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 92. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscription or fee basis. The broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 93. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the purpose of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. Of these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 94. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is a cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000. For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a small cable operator. (In the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determined that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 95. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer. This industry group is categorized based on fuel source and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control, and Electric Power Distribution. 96. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. E. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements 97. In the Fourth Report and Order, we (1) establish a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) adopt a new requirement that utilities retain copies of their cyclical pole inspection reports and, upon request, provide prospective pole attachers with the information included in the most recent report regarding the poles affected by a prospective attacher's submitted attachment application. Our new requirements are minimally burdensome as they merely require (1) parties seeking to have complaints placed on the Accelerated Docket to submit a form to the newly-established Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT) that will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket, and (2) utilities to provide information they already collect in the normal course of business for cyclical pole inspection reports. 98. Parties seeking both RBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. This initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b). Additionally, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. We amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe. The record indicates that utilities already prepare such reports, making this new transparency requirement consistent with the existing practices. For these reasons, we believe that small and other utilities will not have an issue complying with the new obligation. 99. The Commission does not have sufficient information on the record to determine whether small entities will be required to hire professionals to comply with its decisions, or to quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the Fourth Report and Order. While some small entities may have some unique burdens, the Commission anticipates the requirements for pole attachment disputes and data collection by utility companies will have minimal cost implications because many of these obligations are consistent with existing Commission regulations to file disputes, and existing practices by utilities to prepare pole inspection reports. F. Steps Taken To Minimize Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 100. The RFA requires an agency to provide a description of the steps the agency has taken to minimize the significant economic impact on small entities including a statement of the factual, policy, and legal reasons for selecting the alternative adopted in the final rule and why each one of the other significant alternatives to the rule considered by the agency which affect the impact on small entities was rejected. 101. The Commission took steps to minimize significant economic impact on small entities and considered alternatives to new rules and processes adopted in the Fourth Report and Order that may impact small entities. By establishing the RBAT, we addressed commenters' request that we expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes, the delay of which may impose greater harm on small providers. In considering alternatives to the rules, we declined to adopt certain proposals that are burdensome, unnecessary, or would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. For example, we agreed with utilities that they should not be required to gather and provide pole-related data for matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. We also declined to require that small and other utilities provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting an application because this data would be speculative and the build-out may never occur. Additionally, we declined to establish a single pole-information database or require each utility to create a database of all its poles. Similar to our prior decisions on this matter, the record demonstrates that the burdens and costs of creating such a database are considerable given that many utilities own or jointly own poles. Further, the scope of pole data attachers seek exists in information from pole inspection reports we require small and other utility companies to provide in the Fourth Report and Order. We considered and declined to require small and other utilities to provide financial data regarding poles and attachment rates because this would be overly burdensome for the utilities. We also considered but declined to require small and other utilities to provide information on the age or condition of the poles, or number of current or pending attachment applications for each pole because it could be burdensome, unnecessary, or unfeasible in some cases, and would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. Finally, we declined to require small and other utilities to provide more detailed supporting data in their make ready estimates because the current complaint process should be sufficient to address a potential dispute on this matter. G. Report to Congress 102. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order, including the FRFA, in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act. In addition, the Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the FRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. A copy of the Fourth Report and Order (or summaries thereof) will also be published in the Federal Register . V. Procedural Matters 103. Regulatory Flexibility Act. The Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), requires that an agency prepare a regulatory flexibility analysis for notice and comment rulemakings, unless the agency certifies that the rule will not, if promulgated, have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small entities. Accordingly, we have prepared a Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) concerning the possible impact of the rule changes contained in the Fourth Report and Order on small entities. The FRFA is set forth herein. 104. Congressional Review Act. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). 105. Paperwork Reduction Act. This document may contain proposed new or modified information collection requirements subject to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (PRA), Public Law 104-13. Specifically, the rules adopted in 47 CFR 1.1411, 1.1415, and 1.1416 may require new or modified information collections. All such new or modified information collection requirements will be submitted to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) for review under Section 3507(d) of the PRA. OMB, the general public, and other Federal agencies will be invited to comment on the new or modified information collection requirements contained in this proceeding. In addition, we note that pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we previously sought specific comment on how the Commission might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In this document, we describe several steps we have taken to minimize the information collection burdens on small entities. VI. Ordering Clauses 106. Accordingly, it is ordered that pursuant to sections 1-4, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 151-54, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r), the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling hereby is adopted and part 1 of the Commission's Rules, 47 CFR part 1, is amended as set forth in Appendix A of the Fourth Report and Order. 107. It is further ordered that the Fourth Report and Order shall become effective 30 days after publication in the Federal Register , except that the amendments to § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415, 47 CFR 1.1411(c)(4), 1.1415, which may contain new or modified information collection requirements, will not become effective until the Office of Management and Budget completes review of any information collection requirements that the Wireline Competition Bureau determines is required under the Paperwork Reduction Act. The Commission directs the Wireline Competition Bureau to announce the effective date for § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415 by subsequent Public Notice. 108. It is further ordered that, pursuant to 47 CFR 1.4(b)(1), the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Fourth Report and Order will commence on the date that a summary of the Fourth Report and Order is published in the Federal Register , and the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Declaratory Ruling will commence upon release of the Declaratory Ruling. 109. It is further ordered that the Commission's Office of the Secretary, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis and Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. 110. It is further ordered that the Office of the Managing Director, Performance Evaluation and Records Management, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act, see 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Marlene Dortch, Secretary. Final Rules The Federal Communications Commission amends part 1 of title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Delayed indefinitely, amend § 1.1411 by adding paragraph (c)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (c) * * * (4) Information from cyclical pole inspection reports. (i) Upon submitting its attachment application, a new attacher may request in writing that the utility provide, as to the poles covered by such attachment application, the information regarding those poles contained in the utility's most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or, if available, any more recent pole inspection report. The utility shall provide the new attacher with this information within ten (10) business days of the new attacher's written request. (ii) Utilities shall retain copies of their pole inspection reports, in the form they are created, until a superseding report covering the poles included in the attachment application is completed. (iii) For purposes of this section, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of a routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (iv) After requesting and receiving pole inspection information from a utility related to poles covered by its application, a new attacher may amend an attachment application at any time until the utility grants or denies the original application. (A) A utility that receives such an amended attachment application may, at its option, restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) for responding to the application and conducting the survey. (B) A utility electing to restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) shall notify the attacher of its intent to do so within five (5) business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day (or 60th day, if applicable) after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. § 1.1415 [Redesignated as § 1.1416] 3. Redesignate § 1.1415 as § 1.1416. 4. Delayed indefinitely, add a new § 1.1415 to read as follows: § 1.1415 Dispute resolution procedures for pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment; functions of the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team. (a) An inter-bureau team, to be known as the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT), shall be established to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that are alleged to impede or delay the deployment of broadband facilities and to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. The RBAT shall consist of one or more staff from the Enforcement Bureau and one or more staff from the Wireline Competition Bureau. Senior staff in the Enforcement Bureau and the Wireline Competition Bureau shall designate individuals from their respective bureaus to serve on the RBAT. (b) The RBAT shall prioritize the resolution of a pole attachment dispute that a party seeking RBAT review has alleged is impeding or delaying an active broadband deployment project, including where the party is also seeking placement of the dispute on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. The RBAT shall gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and shall have discretion to decide the most appropriate process for resolving the dispute, including recommending an RBAT-supervised mediation process pursuant to § 1.737, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other appropriate action. Although RBAT-supervised mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. The RBAT may recommend to the parties use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined in paragraph (e) of this section, that a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket. (c) A party to a pole attachment dispute, prior to filing a formal complaint, may request RBAT review and assessment of such dispute if the party believes the dispute is impeding or delaying the deployment of a broadband facilities project. The party seeking RBAT review and assessment shall first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) by phone and in writing of the request. The MDRD Chief shall direct the requesting party to the location of a form on the MDRD website—FCC-5653, Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. (d) Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT shall schedule a meeting, through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that the party seeking RBAT review or any other party or parties to the dispute provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. In the initial meeting, or shortly thereafter, the RBAT shall provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including RBAT-supervised mediation pursuant to § 1.737; use of the Accelerated Docket; and/or any other appropriate action. If the parties seek RBAT-supervised mediation, the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, may waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (e) The RBAT shall have discretion to decide whether a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, involving a dispute that a party alleges to be impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. In determining whether to accept a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT shall base its decision on a totality of the factors from the following list: (1) Whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act, or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; (2) Whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities or services, especially in an unserved or underserved area; (3) Whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; (4) The number and complexity of the issues in dispute; (5) Whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; (6) The likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; (7) The likely need for expert testimony; (8) The ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; (9) Whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; (10) Willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and (11) Such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding.
12 12
13 [Supplementary Information] 13 [List of Subjects]
14 SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: This is a summary of the Commission's Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking (FNPRM) in WC Docket No. 17-84, FCC 23-109, adopted on December 13, 2023, and released on December 15, 2023. The full text of this document is available for public inspection at the following internet address: https://www.fcc.gov/document/fcc-seeks-make-pole-attachment-process-faster-more-transparent-and-more-cost-effective. The Providing Accountability Through Transparency Act, Public Law 118-9, requires each agency, in providing notice of a rulemaking, to post online a brief plain-language summary of the proposed rule. The required summary of this FNPRM is available at https://www.fcc.gov/proposed-rulemakings. To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities ( e.g., Braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at (202) 418-0530. Initial Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 Analysis This document may contain proposed information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the general public to comment on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. Comments should address: (a) whether the proposed collection of information is necessary for the proper performance of the functions of the Commission, including whether the information shall have practical utility; (b) the accuracy of the Commission's burden estimates; (c) ways to enhance the quality, utility, and clarity of the information collected; (d) ways to minimize the burden of the collection of information on the respondents, including the use of automated collection techniques or other forms of information technology; and (e) way to further reduce the information collection burden on small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. Comment Period and Filing Procedures Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's rules, 47 CFR 1.415, 1.419, interested parties may file comments and reply comments on or before the dates indicated on the first page of this document. Comments may be filed using the Commission's Electronic Comment Filing System (ECFS) or by paper. Commenters should refer to WC Docket No. 21-341 when filing in response to this FNPRM. • Electronic Filers: Comments may be filed electronically by accessing ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to file by paper must file an original and one copy of each filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and until further notice, the Commission no longer accepts any hand or messenger delivered filings. • Commercial overnight mail (other than U.S. Postal Service Express Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050 Junction Drive, Annapolis Junction, MD 20701. U.S. Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority Mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. People with Disabilities: To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities (braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at 202-418-0530 (voice), 202-418-0432 (TTY). Synopsis I. Introduction 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever federal investment in broadband, as well as other federal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the necessary infrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved and underserved areas in the United States. Key to these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission has taken significant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in states that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the District of Columbia have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently only apply to cable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission's pole attachment rules to broadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. Additionally, as a follow-on to the pole replacement clarification issued in the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, in the Declaratory Ruling below we provide further clarification regarding cost causation when a pole must be replaced for any reason other than lacking capacity to support a new attachment. Specifically, we clarify that a “red tagged” pole is one that the utility has identified as needing replacement for any reason other than the pole's lack of capacity, and we provide additional examples of when a pole replacement is not “necessitated solely” as a result of a third party's attachment or modification request— i.e., when a pole already requires replacement at the time the new attacher makes a request. We also clarify the obligation to share easement information and the applicable timelines for the processing of attachment requests for 3,000 or more poles. Finally, we seek comment in the FNPRM on ways to further facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable faster broadband deployment. II. Background 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the pole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act, the Commission determined that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the benefiting party must assume the cost of the modification. (Section 224(h) states that “[w]henever the owner of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the costs incurred by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible.” Section 224(i) states that “[a]n entity that obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the costs of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including the owner of such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).”) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, the Commission reiterated that application of the cost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the Internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of pole replacements. Specifically, NCTA asked the Commission to declare that: (1) utilities must share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, section 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with pole replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband services to Americans in unserved areas. 5. In the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that the record developed in response to the NCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice (87 FR 25181; Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that this Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second Further Notice, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not caused (necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the costs of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extent to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costs of pole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second Further Notice also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potential attachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expand use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachment complaints and the specific criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. III. Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking 7. We recognize that Congress has undertaken a number of initiatives allocating funding to further the deployment of broadband to unserved and underserved areas of the United States. In connection with this funding, broadband providers will have to deploy extensive facilities. This, in turn will require that they file significant numbers of applications seeking to attach these facilities to large numbers of poles. To that end, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable speedier broadband deployment. In seeking comment on these areas, we emphasize that even when there is not a specific Commission rule or policy that governs a particular situation, it is our expectation that parties negotiate in good faith to resolve issues that may arise. 8. Large Orders. We tentatively conclude that we should adopt a defined make-ready timeline for orders that exceed 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state in order to facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications that are submitted in large numbers. We seek comment on this tentative conclusion. Our current make-ready rule requires make-ready in the communications space to be completed within 30 days after the utility sends a notification to all existing attachers on a pole. (The rule provides 90 days from attachments above the communications space.) The 30-day timeframe applies for communications space make-ready requests up to the lesser of 300 poles or 0.5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. This make-ready timeframe is extended 45 extra days for requests up to the lesser of 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. For requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in the state, the Commission's rules require that a utility shall negotiate the timing of the make-ready in good faith. (As we clarify in the Declaratory Ruling accompanying this FNPRM, the first 3,000 poles of these large orders are subject to the timeline set forth in § 1.1411(g)(3).) We tentatively conclude that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state and seek comment on this tentative conclusion. 9. NCTA asserts that our rules do not at present sufficiently address the needs of attachers with these larger requests in the latter category. For example, NCTA asserts that its members have faced situations where the utilities have imposed limits on (1) the number of poles that may be included in any one application, and (2) the number of applications an attacher may submit at a time. NCTA states that these limitations “create problematic delays and jeopardize operators' ability to meet broadband build-out commitments.” At the same time, USTelecom notes the difficulties presented by these very large orders, noting that “make-ready requests involving more than 3,000 poles require flexibility that make-ready timelines cannot provide, given the many outside factors that impact the time required for make-ready for such large orders, including permitting delays, workforce shortages and staffing issues, and the coordination required among all the attachers to the poles.” Given these factors, would 90 additional days over the timeline set forth in § 1.411(e) be sufficient for processing these larger orders? Would some other amount of time be reasonable in all circumstances, or should the Commission create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles? If the Commission were to adopt additional make-ready timeline tiers, what would be an appropriate cut off number of poles for each tier? For instance, should the Commission add an additional number of days for application processing per 3,000 poles? Does the ability to deviate from the timelines specified in § 1.1411 provide utilities with enough flexibility such that imposing a 90 additional day limit would be reasonable? 10. We also seek comment on NCTA's proposal that the Commission revise its rules to prohibit utilities from limiting “the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application so as to avoid the timelines.” How prevalent are situations of the type described by NCTA? Are the reasons underlying utilities' imposition of such limitations as laid out by USTelecom valid, and do other reasons exist for these limitations? Would prohibiting utilities from imposing such limitations in fact speed up the attachment process, or would the same delays still exist for other reasons ( e.g., lack of qualified workers, shortages in materials, etc.) or even, as USTelecom alleges, “ultimately slow—rather than—accelerate deployment”? Specifically, NCTA proposes adding additional time to the existing timelines for these “larger” orders, for which our rules require that utilities negotiate the timing in good faith. Would NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders? Utilities have raised multiple concerns with such requirements. For example, they assert that compliance with expanded timelines may not be possible “if many permit applications by multiple attachers are submitted at approximately the same time, or if the contractor's workload is already heavy.” They also assert that given constraints on workforce availability, utilities would be forced to “choose between providing safe, reliable and affordable power to electric customers (which is mandated by the states), and performing requested pole replacements in an unreasonable and likely unattainable amount of time.” Are these concerns valid? Are there any other reasons why NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders would not work? What are the respective costs and benefits of such potential requirements? What other steps could we take to facilitate the pole attachment process for larger orders? 11. Self-Help and Use of Contractors. Should the Commission consider modifying its self-help rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly? NCTA also asserts that it has faced issues with utilities failing to process attachment applications in a timely manner. NCTA therefore proposes that utilities notify attachers in advance of survey and make-ready deadlines if the utility will be unable to complete a portion of the process. For instance, NCTA proposes that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period so that the attacher can elect self-help for the survey sooner. NCTA also proposes making self-help available for the estimate process, which is not contemplated under current Commission rules. We seek comment on NCTA's proposal. (We decline NCTA's request to adopt rules in the Fourth Report and Order regarding self-help and the use of contractors. We find that these issues would be better addressed after a more comprehensive record is developed.) How prevalent is the issue cited by NCTA? Can utilities feasibly be required to inform attachers within 15 business days of receiving a completed application that they will be unable to conduct a survey, estimate, or make-ready within the required time period? Do sufficient contractors exist that meet the minimum qualification requirements set forth in our rules such that adoption of NCTA's proposal would have the desired effect of speeding broadband deployment? What are the respective costs and benefits of adopting NCTA's proposal? Are there other ways to assist utilities in processing the larger number of applications they will likely receive in the coming months and years based on the funding initiatives in place for accelerating broadband deployment to unserved and underserved areas? 12. We also seek comment on the impact of contractor availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready for surveys and make-ready work. Specifically, do we need to amend the Commission's rules to make it easier for attachers to use their own contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready surveys and make-ready work when there are no contractors available from a utility list? Utility commenters point out the labor constraints in the contractor workforce; given such constraints, do our current rules provide adequate relief to attachers to timely identify and use qualified contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready work? If not, what can the Commission do to change this dynamic? 13. Pursuant to our rules, an attacher can do its own work when (1) completing surveys and make-ready work when the utility misses the deadlines for these activities, or (2) electing to use the one-touch make-ready process. (Note that there are no attacher self-help remedies for pole replacements.) When conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready work, the attacher must use a utility-approved contractor. For self-help surveys and make-ready work that is complex or is above the communications space on a pole, our rules require that a utility make available and keep up to date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors that it authorizes to perform such work. (The term “complex make-ready” means transfers and work within the communications space on a pole that would be reasonably likely to cause a service outage(s) or facility damage, including work such as splicing of any communication attachment or relocation of existing wireless attachments. Any and all wireless activities, including those involving mobile, fixed, and point-to-point wireless communications and wireless internet service providers, are to be considered complex.) Attachers can request to add contactors to the utility's list—provided the contractor meets the minimum qualifications in the Commission's rules—and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. Further, a utility may, but is not required to, keep up-to-date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors it authorizes to perform surveys and simple make-ready. If a utility provides such a list, then the new attacher must choose a contractor from the list to perform the work. Again, attachers may request the addition to the list of any contractor that meets the minimum qualifications in the Commission's rules, and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. However, if the utility does not provide a list of approved contractors for surveys or simple make-ready work or no utility-approved contractor is available within a reasonable time period, then the new attacher may choose its own qualified contractor who meets the Commission's minimum requirements. Utilities retain the right to disqualify such contractor, but disqualification must be based on reasonable safety or reliability concerns related to the contractor's failure to meet any of the Commission's minimum qualifications or to meet the utility's publicly available and commercially reasonable safety or reliability standards. The utility must provide notice of this objection to the attacher and must identify at least one available qualified contractor that the attacher can use instead to perform simple surveys and make-ready work. 14. Given that our current rules allow for attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utility fails to meet the Commission's deadlines (provided such contractors meet the minimum qualifications set forth in our rules), we seek comment on whether attachers are availing themselves of this option. Have attachers faced any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke this option? While a utility cannot be blamed for a lack of available contractors in an area due to workforce constraints, are utilities seeking to use their discretion set forth in the rules to disqualify otherwise-qualified contractors whom attachers may seek to bring in from outside of an area? We note that, at least for surveys and simple make-ready work, our current rules already require the utility to designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher—is this not being done? If not, is it due to labor constraints for which the utility should not be held responsible? In the instance where no qualified contractors are available for a project, how could the Commission help to solve that problem? IV. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis 15. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), the Commission has prepared this Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities by the policies and rules proposed in this FNPRM. The Commission requests written public comments on this IRFA. Comments must be identified as responses to the IRFA and must be filed by the deadlines for comments provided on the first page of the FNPRM. The Commission will send a copy of the FNPRM, including this IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA). In addition, the FNPRM and IRFA (or summaries thereof) will be published in the Federal Register . A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Proposed Rules 16. In order to continue the Commission's work combating illegal calls, this FNPRM proposes to impose several obligations on gateway providers. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to require gateway providers to authenticate and employ robocall mitigation techniques on all SIP calls that they allow into the United States from abroad that display a U.S. number in the caller ID field. The FNPRM also proposes that gateway providers should engage in robocall mitigation by (1) responding to all traceback requests from the Commission, law enforcement, and the industry traceback consortium within 24 hours; (2) complying with mandatory call blocking requirements; (3) complying with enhanced know-your-customer obligations; (4) complying with a general duty to mitigate illegal robocalls; and (5) filing a certification in the Robocall Mitigation Database. The Commission also proposes one blocking requirement for intermediate and terminating providers immediately downstream from the gateway provider, which would require those providers to block all traffic from a gateway provider that fails to block or effectively mitigate illegal traffic when notified of such traffic by the Commission. B. Legal Basis 17. The FNPRM proposes to find authority largely under those provisions through which it has previously adopted rules to stem the tide of robocalls in its Call Blocking and Call Authentication Orders. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to find authority under sections 201(a) and (b), 202(a), 251(e), the Truth in Caller ID Act, the TRACED Act and, where appropriate, ancillary authority. The FNPRM also proposes to conclude that, to the extent any of the rules we seek to adopt have an effect on foreign service providers, that effect is only indirect and therefore consistent with the Commission's authority. The FNPRM solicits comment on these proposals. C. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which the Proposed Rules Will Apply 18. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that may be affected by the proposed rules, if adopted. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business applies “unless an agency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activities of the agency and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .”) A “small business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA. 19. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small entities that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatory flexibility analysis, according to data from the Small Business Administration's (SBA) Office of Advocacy, in general a small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 20. Next, the type of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally “any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field.” The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the population of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less according to the registration and tax data for exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 21. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as “governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand.” U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the United States. (The Census of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (county, (there were 2,105 county governments with populations less than 50,000. This category does not include subcounty (municipal and township) governments) municipal, and town or township (there were 18,729 municipal and 16,097 town and township governments with populations less than 50,000)) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments—independent school districts (there were 12,040 independent school districts with enrollment populations less than 50,000) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the special purpose governments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the number of special purpose governments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 22. Wired Broadband Internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 23. Additionally, according to Commission data on internet access services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include aDSL, sDSL, Other Wireline, Cable Modem and FTTP). Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 24. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as VoIP service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of All Other Telecommunications. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firms in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 25. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide a variety of services, such as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not included in this industry.) 26. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 27. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 28. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (Incumbent LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 29. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 30. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 31. Operator Service Providers (OSPs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of operator services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 32. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 33. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of WISPA, including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfers or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 34. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 35. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to Part 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 36. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in the designated entities section in Part 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The “Designated entities” sections in subparts D-Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 37. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 38. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 39. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 40. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 41. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 42. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 43. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 44. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 45. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under Part 90 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commission estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 46. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 47. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 48. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 49. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 50. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806 MHz bands. Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 51. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 52. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800 MHz air-ground spectrum. 53. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 54. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 55. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 56. 3650-3700 MHz Band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700 MHz band fall in the Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 57. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are small internet Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the 3650-3700 MHz band. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 58. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of Title 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.) They also include the Upper Microwave Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 59. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 60. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 61. Broadband Radio Service and Educational Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of the Broadband Radio Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatory purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmission depends upon the transmitter power, the type of receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 62. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auction of BRS licenses, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the winning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 64. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million for the preceding five (5) years, and a very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 65. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms “primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications.” Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of transmitting telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g. dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 67. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers may not provide telephone service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 68. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscription or fee basis. The broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 69. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the purpose of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. Of these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 70. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is “a cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000.” For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a small cable operator. (In the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determined that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 71. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of “establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer.” This industry group is categorized based on fuel source and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control and Electric Power Distribution. 72. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. D. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements for Small Entities 73. In the FNPRM, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment. Some of these proposals may impose new or additional reporting or recordkeeping and/or other compliance obligations on small entities. Specifically, we seek comment on a proposal that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. We also seek comment on whether NCTA's proposal to add additional time to the existing application timelines for larger orders and prohibit utilities from limiting the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application, to avoid these timelines, will facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders. Additionally, we seek comment on whether the Commission should create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles. We also consider whether to require that a utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period, making self-help available for the estimate process, which is not contemplated under current Commission rules. We also seek comment on whether attachers face any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke self-help options, which allows attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utility fails to meet the Commission's deadlines. This information will help to inform whether potential rule changes are necessary. At this time, the Commission cannot quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the approaches discussed in the FNPRM, or whether any compliance requirements will require small entities to hire professionals; however, the Commission requests information on the costs and benefits of the approaches discussed, such as the availability of qualified contractors and other workforce constraints that may impact the speed and cost of deployment for utilities and attachers. E. Steps Taken To Minimize the Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 74. The RFA requires an agency to describe any significant, specifically small business, alternatives that it has considered in reaching its proposed approach, which may include the following four alternatives (among others): “(1) the establishment of differing compliance or reporting requirements or timetables that take into account the resources available to small entities; (2) the clarification, consolidation, or simplification of compliance and reporting requirements under the rule for such small entities; (3) the use of performance rather than design standards; and (4) an exemption from coverage of the rule, or any part thereof, for such small entities.” 75. The FNPRM seeks comment on whether the Commission should revise its rules to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment, including a tentative conclusion that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. The Commission's objective in requesting this information is to determine whether it can and should establish clear standards for when and how attachers and utilities must share the costs of a pole replacement precipitated by a new attachment request. Among the alternatives considered in the FNPRM is whether the Commission should allow additional time for the existing larger order timelines where our current rules require that utilities negotiate timing in good faith. We seek comment on whether requiring that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period would allow the attacher to elect self-help for the survey sooner. In the alternative, we inquire whether such expansion of time is reasonable for utilities if numerous permits are submitted around the same time or contractor workload is heavy. We also consider whether attachers are choosing to find their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when utilities fail to meet the Commission's deadlines. Similarly, we request information on whether or not utilities designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher. We also seek comment on how the Commission can help resolve situations where labor shortages may hinder utilities from meeting deadlines to respond to attachers. The Commission also seeks comment on and will consider the relative costs and benefits of any such revisions to its rules. Information submitted in response to these requests for comment will enable the Commission to evaluate the impact that revising its pole attachment rules would have on smaller entities. F. Federal Rules That May Duplicate, Overlap, or Conflict With the Proposed Rules 76. None. V. Procedural Matters 77. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act, the Commission has prepared an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities of the policies and rules addressed in this FNPRM. Written public comments are requested on the IRFA. Comments must be filed by the deadlines for comments on the FNPRM indicated on the first page of this document and must have a separate and distinct heading designating them as responses to the IRFA. The Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference Information Center, will send a copy of this FNPRM, including the IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the SBA. 78. Paperwork Reduction Act. The FNPRM contains proposed new information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the general public and OMB to comment on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. 79. Ex Parte Presentations—Permit-But-Disclose. The proceeding this FNPRM initiates shall be treated as a “permit-but-disclose” proceeding in accordance with the Commission's ex parte rules. Persons making ex parte presentations must file a copy of any written presentation or a memorandum summarizing any oral presentation within two business days after the presentation (unless a different deadline applicable to the Sunshine period applies). Persons making oral ex parte presentations are reminded that memoranda summarizing the presentation must (1) list all persons attending or otherwise participating in the meeting at which the ex parte presentation was made, and (2) summarize all data presented and arguments made during the presentation. If the presentation consisted in whole or in part of the presentation of data or arguments already reflected in the presenter's written comments, memoranda or other filings in the proceeding, the presenter may provide citations to such data or arguments in his or her prior comments, memoranda, or other filings (specifying the relevant page and/or paragraph numbers where such data or arguments can be found) in lieu of summarizing them in the memorandum. Documents shown or given to Commission staff during ex parte meetings are deemed to be written ex parte presentations and must be filed consistent with § 1.1206(b) of the Commission's rules. In proceedings governed by § 1.49(f) of the Commission's rules or for which the Commission has made available a method of electronic filing, written ex parte presentations and memoranda summarizing oral ex parte presentations, and all attachments thereto, must be filed through the electronic comment filing system available for that proceeding, and must be filed in their native format ( e.g., .doc, .xml, .ppt, searchable .pdf). Participants in this proceeding should familiarize themselves with the Commission's ex parte rules. VI. Ordering Clauses 80. Accordingly, it is ordered , pursuant to sections 4(i), 4(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), and 403 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 154(i), 154(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), 403, that this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking is adopted . 81. It is further ordered that the Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference information Center, shall send a copy of this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, including the Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA), to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Katura Jackson, Federal Register Liaison Officer. Proposed Rules The Federal Communications Commission proposes to amend part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Amend § 1.1411 by revising paragraph (g)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (g) * * * (4) A utility may add 90 days to the make-ready periods described in paragraph (e) of this section to all requests for attachment larger than the lesser of 3000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. 14 List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure.
15 15
16 [List of Subjects] 16 [I. Introduction]
17 List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. 17 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever Federal investment in broadband, as well as other Federal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the necessary infrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved and underserved areas in the United States. Key to these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission has taken significant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in states that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the District of Columbia have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently only apply to cable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission's pole attachment rules to broadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds.
18 18
19 [Initial Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 Analysis] 19 [II. Background]
20 This document may contain proposed information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the general public to comment on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. Comments should address: (a) whether the proposed collection of information is necessary for the proper performance of the functions of the Commission, including whether the information shall have practical utility; (b) the accuracy of the Commission's burden estimates; (c) ways to enhance the quality, utility, and clarity of the information collected; (d) ways to minimize the burden of the collection of information on the respondents, including the use of automated collection techniques or other forms of information technology; and (e) way to further reduce the information collection burden on small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. 20 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the pole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act, the Commission determined that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the benefiting party must assume the cost of the modification. (Section 224(h) states that whenever the owner of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the costs incurred by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible. Section 224(i) states that an entity that obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the costs of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including the owner of such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order (83 FR 31659-02, July 9, 2018), the Commission reiterated that application of the cost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of pole replacements. Specifically, NCTA asked the Commission to declare that: (1) utilities must share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with pole replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband services to Americans in unserved areas. 5. In the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that the record developed in response to the NCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking ( Second FNPRM ) (87 FR 25181-01, Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that the Fourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not caused (necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the costs of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extent to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costs of pole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second FNPRM also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potential attachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expand use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachment complaints and the specific criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. (To the extent that the Fourth Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second FNPRM, that issue remains pending.)
21 21
22 [Comment Period and Filing Procedures] 22 [III. Report and Order]
23 Pursuant to sections 1.415 and 1.419 of the Commission's rules, 47 CFR 1.415, 1.419, interested parties may file comments and reply comments on or before the dates indicated on the first page of this document. Comments may be filed using the Commission's Electronic Comment Filing System (ECFS) or by paper. Commenters should refer to WC Docket No. 21-341 when filing in response to this FNPRM. • Electronic Filers: Comments may be filed electronically by accessing ECFS at https://www.fcc.gov/ecfs. • Paper Filers: Parties who choose to file by paper must file an original and one copy of each filing. Paper filings can be sent by commercial overnight courier, or by first-class or overnight U.S. Postal Service mail. • Effective March 19, 2020, and until further notice, the Commission no longer accepts any hand or messenger delivered filings. • Commercial overnight mail (other than U.S. Postal Service Express Mail and Priority Mail) must be sent to 9050 Junction Drive, Annapolis Junction, MD 20701. U.S. Postal Service first-class, Express, and Priority Mail must be addressed to 45 L Street NE, Washington, DC 20554. People with Disabilities: To request materials in accessible formats for people with disabilities (braille, large print, electronic files, audio format), send an email to fcc504@fcc.gov or call the Consumer &amp; Governmental Affairs Bureau at 202-418-0530 (voice), 202-418-0432 (TTY). 23 7. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt measures to expedite resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment. Specifically, we (1) establish an agency-wide rapid response team to provide coordinated review and assessment of such pole attachment disputes and to recommend effective dispute resolution procedures, and (2) adopt specific criteria to guide that team when considering whether a complaint (or portion thereof) should be included on the Enforcement Bureau's Accelerated Docket. We also require utilities to provide information regarding pole conditions and scheduled replacements to the extent that information is contained in cyclical pole inspection reports that utilities already create and maintain in the ordinary course of their business, or in pole inspection reports created between cyclical reports. (Both pole attachers and utilities made several other proposals, not addressed herein, regarding the process for pole attachments and replacements and ways they believe the process could be improved to reduce disputes and promote broadband deployment.) A. Accelerating Resolution of Pole Attachment Disputes That Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment 8. We amend our rules to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment by establishing a Commission intra-agency rapid response team—called the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT)—to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. (We codify these amendments in part 1, subpart J, of the Commission's rules ( i.e., Pole Attachment Complaint Procedures) by redesignating current § 1.1415 as § 1.1416 and adding a new § 1.1415. These rule amendments apply only to disputes involving pole attachments of a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service and do not apply to disputes involving pole attachments of a broadband-only internet service provider. They also do not apply to disputes involving poles that are owned or controlled by a railroad, the Federal Government, a state (including a political subdivision thereof such as a municipality), or a cooperative association, or where the poles at issue are located in a state, or the District of Columbia, that has certified to the Commission that it regulates the rates, terms, and conditions of pole attachments in that state or jurisdiction pursuant to 47 U.S.C. 224(c). Should we adopt the proposal set forth in the Open internet NPRM (88 FR 76048-01, Nov. 3, 2023) to reclassify broadband-only internet service as a telecommunications service, section 224 would once again apply to broadband-only internet service providers deployments.) At the outset, we emphasize that we expect all parties to comply with the Commission's pole attachment rules and to negotiate in good faith to craft solutions that suit the needs of attachers and utilities to facilitate deployment projects. We recognize, however, that in some instances disagreements arise as to the conduct of one or multiple parties, and we encourage parties in those instances to avail themselves of the Commission's dispute resolution processes to both facilitate the resolution of disputes and, when necessary, use the formal adjudication process to develop precedent upon which parties can rely to settle future potential disputes. In this document, we amend our rules to create the RBAT in an effort to make the Commission's pole attachment dispute resolution process more responsive and adaptable with the goal of facilitating deployment. 9. The RBAT will be charged with expediting the resolution of these disputes by swiftly engaging key stakeholders, gathering relevant information, distilling issues in dispute, and recommending to the parties, where appropriate, an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a complaint (or portion of a complaint) on the Accelerated Docket based on consideration of specified criteria, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. (The Schools, Health &amp; Libraries Broadband (SHLB) Coalition suggests that creation of the RBAT may result in a needless administrative step and associated delay, and suggests that the RBAT, if created, be vested with authority to resolve disputes without going through the additional step of a complaint process. We decline to adopt this approach. The RBAT is designed to assist parties in resolving their dispute expeditiously without need for litigation. But if parties are unable to reach a resolution, either through mediation or other means, our existing complaint procedures, including the Accelerated Docket, ensure a means of adjudicating the dispute in accordance with due process.) 10. In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on NCTA's proposed adoption of policies “favoring the placement of pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas on the [Commission's] Accelerated Docket[,]” a mechanism that requires the Commission to quickly resolve disputes between parties within 60 days. (Under § 1.736(a), complaint proceedings on the Accelerated Docket must be concluded within 60 days, and are therefore subject to shorter pleading deadlines and other modifications to the procedural rules that govern formal complaint proceedings.) It also sought comment on measures that would expedite the resolution of “pole replacement[ ]” disputes and on criteria for determining more generally “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” Based on broad record support among attachers for further streamlining our processes as applied to disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we conclude that the targeted measures outlined below are warranted and will advance the Commission's goal of timely broadband deployment. 11. As the Commission observed in the Second FNPRM, our current rules provide a 180-day deadline (or shot clock) for final action on pole access complaints where a cable television system operator or provider of telecommunications service claims that it has been denied access to a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way owned or controlled by a utility. (For purposes of this subsection, the Commission has defined a “pole access complaint” as a complaint “filed by a cable television system or a provider of telecommunications service that alleges a complete denial of access to a utility pole[,]” and clarified that “[the] term [pole access complaint] does not encompass a complaint alleging that a utility is imposing unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions that amount to a denial of pole access.”) In addition, a 270-day shot clock currently applies to final action on all other pole attachment complaints ( i.e., those alleging unjust or unreasonable rates, terms, or conditions of attachment). Several commenters assert that these timeframes are commercially unreasonable for attachers seeking to deploy broadband networks, particularly in rural or unserved areas. (Charter asserts that the “[m]ere existence ” of a path allowing more routine use of the Accelerated Docket “could help broadband providers resolve disagreements without the need for Commission intervention” by “provid[ing] attachers facing government-imposed construction deadlines with a more credible option of seeking relief, thereby reducing the one-sided leverage held by pole owners today.”) NCTA submits that the need for expedited procedures has gained greater urgency recently for “providers . . . receiving government funds to build out broadband under deadlines that afford no time for a lengthy complaint process.” A number of commenters therefore propose more routine use of the Accelerated Docket, with its 60-day shot clock, especially for pole attachment disputes involving time-sensitive deployments in unserved areas. Several commenters also contend that the current Accelerated Docket rule does not sufficiently motivate utilities to comply with their obligation to allow pole access because it is unclear when Commission staff, in the exercise of their discretion under § 1.736(d) of our rules, will include a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Crown Castle asserts that “without certainty that the complaint will be promptly resolved, the decision to bring a formal complaint to the Commission involves business decisions about whether the resolution will be too late to meaningfully assist the deployment.” On the other hand, other commenters argue that sweeping or widespread imposition of the Accelerated Docket rule, with its highly compressed timeframes, could raise potential fairness and due process concerns given the complexity of the issues raised in most pole attachment cases. (Other commenters question the necessity of new rules (1) due to the relative infrequency of requests for Accelerated Docket treatment, see, e.g., Edison Electric Institute Comments at 54 (challenging the need to further expedite “denial of access” complaints based on “[t]he complete absence of [such] complaints before the Commission”), or (2) due to the lack of evidence of instances where dilatory actions of utilities have caused broadband grant recipients to lose access to such funding.) After considering these competing concerns, we find that the adoption of targeted dispute resolution reforms, as set forth below, will address the expressed need for quicker resolution of pole attachment disputes that may impede or delay broadband deployment while ensuring sufficient fairness and due process for all involved parties. 12. Disputes Subject to RBAT Review and Assessment Procedures. The Commission asked in the Second FNPRM whether any new dispute resolution procedures should be “limited to complaints that raise only discrete pole access issues” and do not require consideration of “whether a rate, term, or condition of attachment is unjust or unreasonable.” To address the need for timely broadband deployment, particularly in unserved or underserved areas, we apply the new procedures discussed below to any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities. To provide greater clarity regarding when such a dispute would be eligible for placement on the Accelerated Docket, we also adopt below specific criteria that will guide the RBAT in determining when a dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition. In light of the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, disputes raising relatively straightforward legal and evidentiary issues, as determined based on the RBAT's review of these criteria, are more likely to be considered appropriate for placement on the Accelerated Docket. 13. Although the record reflects differing views regarding which disputes should be subject to new dispute resolution procedures, a significant proportion of commenters seeking such reforms ask that we limit the focus of any new procedures to disputes that are interfering with active broadband deployment plans or projects. We adopt this suggestion based on our conclusion that focusing on pole attachment disputes that impede or delay a provider's ability to deploy new broadband facilities will align with, and advance most directly, the goal of timely broadband deployment. (Several utilities argue that across-the-board application of dispute resolution reforms to an entire category of disputes would fail to account for complexities in individual cases. But such comments assume that Accelerated Docket treatment would automatically apply to all disputes within the identified category. In fact, under the reforms we adopt herein, such disputes will receive individualized assessment and review (by the RBAT) based on a totality of factors analysis.) 14. RBAT Review and Assessment of Disputes that Impede or Delay Broadband Deployment. To expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay an active broadband deployment project, we amend our rules to establish the RBAT, which will be comprised of Enforcement Bureau and Wireline Competition Bureau staff with expertise in the Commission's pole attachment rules and orders. We charge the RBAT with prioritizing the resolution of any pole attachment dispute that a party alleges is impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities (including where the party is also seeking placement of the matter on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736). In performing this role, the RBAT will gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and provide guidance and advice on the most effective means of resolving the parties' dispute. Where appropriate, the RBAT will recommend to the parties an abbreviated mediation process, placement of a complaint, or portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, and/or any other action that the RBAT determines will help the parties resolve their dispute. The RBAT will recommend use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined below, that a complaint, or portion thereof, is suitable for accelerated disposition. (The RBAT may recommend placement of a dispute on the Accelerated Docket in the exercise of the discretion afforded Commission staff “to decide whether a complaint, or portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket.” A prospective complainant may accept the recommendation, with or without the consent of the other party or parties to the dispute, by moving forward with the agreed upon schedule and process established by Commission staff in the case.) To request RBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party to the dispute contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. (The RBAT review and assessment process will be available only to attachers and pole owners that are direct parties to such dispute (including any legal counsel retained to represent a party in that specific dispute). For parties seeking both RBAT review and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, this initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b).) The MDRD Chief will direct the party to a streamlined form on the MDRD website—Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. The form will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute, and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket. (The form will require a submitting party to provide: information identifying the parties and the services they offer; the section(s) of the Act or Commission rule or order alleged to have been violated; a brief description of the parties' dispute (including how it relates to broadband deployment plans or projects, whether such plans or projects are subject to a deadline under a government funded broadband program, whether the dispute arises in an unserved or underserved area, what harm is occurring or is likely to occur as a result of the situation, and what aspects of the dispute require immediate redress); the specific relief sought; whether the parties have entered into a non-disclosure agreement; the steps the party has taken to resolve the matter with other parties to the dispute; a statement as to whether the parties are amenable to mediation; and a statement indicating whether the party intends to seek inclusion of the matter on the Accelerated Docket. The form also will elicit information relevant to whether the dispute is suitable for accelerated disposition including, for example, the number of poles in question, the number and complexity of claims at issue, and the likely need for discovery or expert affidavits. The RBAT may request additional information from the submitting party if more information is necessary to determine a course of action.) 15. Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT will schedule a meeting through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that one or both parties provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. (NCTA suggests that we specify the information the respondent will be required to provide. We find this approach impracticable, as the information required in a response will depend on the complainant's allegations. We employ a more flexible approach that enables the RBAT to request relevant information and documentation from either party, as appropriate.) In the initial meeting, or in a meeting shortly thereafter, the RBAT will provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including staff-supervised mediation, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other action. (Because mediation will be a prominent feature of the RBAT review, we decline to adopt INCOMPAS's proposal that the 180-day deadline for resolution of a pole access complaint be triggered by the submission of the request for RBAT Review and Assessment. If mediation succeeds, there will be no need for a complaint. If it does not, the filing of a complaint will commence review period deadlines under the relevant Commission rules.) To that end, the RBAT will attempt to distill the issues in dispute and identify issues that are most impacting a party's broadband deployment plans. For example, the RBAT may encourage parties to focus on the resolution of one or more threshold issues, or what appears to be the most urgent issue(s), if it finds that doing so may help the parties to narrow their dispute. Likewise, the RBAT may encourage parties, where appropriate, to streamline the proceeding by agreeing to focus on “test cases”— i.e., disputes over specific poles that the parties agree are representative of disputes over multiple poles. In this way, deciding the issue as to the test case will have broader impact. 16. Should the RBAT recommend staff-supervised mediation, it shall be conducted pursuant to § 1.737 of the Commission's rules. Because § 1.737 generally contemplates that mediations will be conducted by MDRD staff, we delegate authority to the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, to modify or waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (Waiver is appropriate for “good cause,” and is warranted only if both: (1) special circumstances warrant a deviation from the general rule, and (2) such deviation will serve the public interest.) The strict confidentiality requirements will apply to all written and oral communications prepared or made for purposes of a mediation pursuant to § 1.737(f), including mediation submissions, offers of compromise, and staff and party comments made during the course of the mediation (Mediation Communications). Through mediation, the RBAT will make every effort to settle or narrow the issues in dispute as expeditiously as possible. 17. In the event that the parties are unable to settle their dispute, and a prospective complainant seeks placement of its complaint on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT will decide whether the complaint or a portion of the complaint is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of the criteria set forth below. Because of the very short deadlines that apply in Accelerated Docket proceedings, Commission staff historically have carefully evaluated whether a particular dispute is appropriate for expedited disposition, resulting in the placement of relatively few cases on the Accelerated Docket. In evaluating whether a matter is suitable for expedited disposition, the RBAT must similarly be mindful of the due process concerns raised by commenters, such as the Pennsylvania PUC, regarding affording parties “the opportunity to be heard at a meaningful time and in a meaningful manner.” In addition, although mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under rule 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. Finally, if the RBAT determines that a matter is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT is authorized to send appropriate matters to the Commission's Administrative Law Judge (ALJ) for an expedited “minitrial” ( i.e., trial-type hearing) as contemplated by § 1.736(h). 18. Criteria for Placement on the Accelerated Docket. The Commission sought comment in the Second FNPRM on the adoption of specific criteria to guide Commission staff on “when pole attachment complaints should be placed on the Accelerated Docket.” (For example, the Commission asked if its policy should “take into account the number and complexity of the claims, need for discovery, need for expert affidavits, and ability of the parties to stipulate to facts.”) Based on the requests of several commenters for greater predictability surrounding Accelerated Docket placement decisions with respect to pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment, we establish criteria to aid the RBAT in making determinations regarding the placement of such matters on the Accelerated Docket. 19. In light of the strict time constraints that apply in Accelerated Docket cases, we decline to adopt a “presumption,” as suggested by some commenters, that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket and, instead, entrust the RBAT with this decision based on the criteria specified below. (There is no basis for us to conclude that a dispute will be suitable for the Accelerated Docket simply based on the number of poles at issue as INCOMPAS's proposal suggests.) We agree with Dominion/Xcel that a “one-size-fits-all policy” would not adequately take into account the complexity of the issues in particular complaint proceedings. We also agree with the Coalition of Concerned Utilities that the 60-day timeframe will be “too short” to resolve certain pole attachment disputes, and thus “blanket imposition” of the Accelerated Docket requirements would be unreasonable and “raise due process concerns” for utilities. Although Charter argues that the presumption could simply be rebutted if a particular complaint raises unusually complex issues, we reject this argument based on our experience with formal complaints. In particular, when parties oppose the operation of a presumption in a particular proceeding, these rebuttal efforts often lead to significant additional argumentation attendant to resolving the specific question of the presumption, thus unnecessarily complicating resolution of the underlying issues in dispute. To avoid the potential for unnecessary rounds of argumentation and to ensure that complaints accepted onto the Accelerated Docket are suitable for decision under the relevant time constraints, we reject proposals to create a presumption that all pole access disputes for active deployments be placed on the Accelerated Docket. 20. After careful consideration of the record on this issue, we direct the RBAT to consider the factors below in determining whether to accept onto the Accelerated Docket a pole attachment dispute that is allegedly impeding or delaying a broadband facilities deployment plan or project. The RBAT shall determine eligibility for placement on the Accelerated Docket based on the totality of these factors: • whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; • whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities, especially in an unserved or underserved area; • whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; • the number and complexity of the issues in dispute; • whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; • the likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; • the likely need for expert testimony; • the ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; • whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; • the willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and • such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding. The first three of these criteria will help the RBAT to ensure appropriate use of the Commission's processes in support of the goal of timely broadband deployment and ensure that the parties have made a sufficient effort to resolve or, at a minimum, identify and narrow the disputed issues prior to filing a complaint. The remaining criteria will help the RBAT to determine if a dispute is suitable for decision under the strict time constraints of the Accelerated Docket, and also require it to consider whether including a matter on the Accelerated Docket would ensure the prompt and fair adjudication of the dispute. (A responding party's refusal to stipulate to facts or cooperate in the exchange of relevant information bearing on disputed facts will not itself defeat a request for acceptance of a pole attachment dispute on the Accelerated Docket.) By specifying the criteria that the RBAT must consider in making its determination, we hope to make the Accelerated Docket a more useful tool in the resolution of eligible pole attachment disputes and provide prospective complainants with greater certainty regarding which complaints will be deemed suitable for expedited resolution. 21. We will closely monitor the impact of the dispute resolution procedures adopted here and consider additional streamlining measures should we observe ongoing delay tactics or other unreasonable practices that hinder the ability of broadband providers to deploy new services or facilities. (Two commenters suggest narrowing the list of criteria to avoid delay tactics by utilities. We find that eliminating criteria is unnecessary, however, as these criteria are holistic in nature, and no single one will be dispositive. Moreover, the RBAT is not required to credulously accept assertions from either party.) B. Increasing Transparency by Providing Attachers With Utility Pole Inspection Information 22. We next amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe (if any). (The record demonstrates that utilities conduct inspections of their poles on a multi-year cycle, either as part of normal network management or as required by state law.) In the Second FNPRM, the Commission sought comment on requiring utilities to provide more information about their poles to prospective attachers, in order to reduce disputes. (Utilities did not challenge the Commission's general jurisdiction to require them to provide relevant information to prospective attachers, and ACA Connects asserted the Commission has such authority.) Several attaching entities indicated pole inspection information would be helpful in planning deployments. (This requirement applies only in the states that have not certified that they regulate pole attachments themselves. To the extent such reports may include sensitive or confidential network or financial information, we rely upon utilities and attachers to address the issue through redactions or non-disclosure agreements.) We believe this new requirement strikes a reasonable balance between additional transparency for prospective attachers and ensuring the utilities' expenditure of resources is no greater than necessary. As discussed below, however, we also strongly encourage utilities to voluntarily share pole-related information that is reasonably available and that they track in the normal course of business, both before and after receiving attachment applications, and we intend to continue to monitor the record in this proceeding to determine if additional information sharing mandates may be required. 23. For the purposes of the new transparency requirement, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle, while a periodic pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of the inspection of any of its poles outside the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (Electric Utilities request that the new rule not require utilities to provide periodic pole inspection reports, arguing that the requirement will create confusion and invite disputes. We find that the definition of “periodic inspection report” is sufficiently clear and note that no other utility commenters claimed the definition was vague or otherwise problematic. We further find that this requirement is an important aspect of the rule. Cyclical pole inspections typically occur several years apart, sometimes by ten or more years, and periodic inspection reports will contain more recent inspection information. We also decline the Electric Utilities' request to seek further comment on transparency requirements in lieu of adopting a rule on report sharing. We find that the record is sufficient to adopt an information sharing rule at this time and the rule we adopt strikes an appropriate balance between providing attachers with additional helpful information while not being overly resource-intensive for utilities. Indeed, several utility parties are supportive of the new transparency requirement.) We note that this new transparency requirement is consistent with the existing practices of certain utilities to prepare such reports. When asking for information about the status of a utility's poles for a planned buildout, the attacher must submit its information request no earlier than contemporaneously with an attachment application. The utility will have ten business days to respond to the request. (The utility has the same amount of time to determine whether the application is complete.) This should allow sufficient time before the make-ready survey for the attacher to revise or amend its application as may be appropriate based on the information it receives. (“The term make-ready means the modification or replacement of a utility pole, or of the lines or equipment on the utility pole, to accommodate additional facilities on the utility pole.” After receiving a complete attachment application, a utility conducts a make-ready survey and provides a make-ready cost estimate to the attacher. During the survey stage, “the pole owner conducts an engineering study to determine whether and where attachment is feasible, and what make-ready is required.”) 24. We recognize that in some situations, the information provided by utilities in their pole inspection reports may lead new attachers to amend their attachment applications. In order to ensure that utilities have enough time to review such applications, in situations when the utility receives an amended attachment application prior to granting or denying the original application, we will allow a utility the option to restart the 45-day period for responding to the application on the merits and conducting the survey. (The option to restart the time period also applies to larger orders that are subject to a 60-day timeframe.) Utilities electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period in this manner must notify the attacher within 5 business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. (For example, if an amended application was filed on the 42nd day following the utility's determination that the original application was complete, the utility would only have three days, not five business days, to notify the attacher that the utility is restarting the 45-day application review and survey.) To avoid unnecessary delays and costs, we strongly encourage attachers to notify utilities of their intent to file, and to file, amended applications as quickly as possible after receiving a pole inspection report from the utility. We also encourage utilities to exercise their right to restart this 45-day period judiciously and to review amended applications as quickly as possible even when electing to restart the 45-day application review and survey period. (Several parties asked that we require an automatic restart of the 45-day response period or start the application process over in such instances by requiring an attacher to file a new application rather than an amended application. We decline these requests and find that the procedures we adopt are sufficiently tailored to account for the needs of utilities to review amended applications while not needlessly slowing deployment. Under the new rule, utilities will always have the option of electing to restart the 45-day review period; but given that there may be instances where an amendment is minor or otherwise will not require a restart of the 45-day period, we find it reasonable to require utilities to actually review an amended application to determine whether a restart is necessary given the specific circumstances.) Regardless of whether the utility elects to restart the 45-day response period, any additional survey costs necessitated by the amended application, such as a second survey after a survey for the original application has been completed, will be borne by the new attacher consistent with the new attacher's obligation to pay for make-ready costs associated with its application. 25. In connection with the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule, we also require utilities to retain copies, in whatever form they were created, of any such cyclical or periodic pole inspection reports they conduct in the normal course of business, until such time as the utility completes a superseding cyclical pole inspection report covering the poles included in the attachment application. In creating these obligations, we reiterate that utilities are required to provide only the information they already possess and track in the normal course of conducting pole inspections at the time of the attacher's request for data. The new rule does not require utilities to collect or create new information for the sole purpose of responding to such requests or to provide all information they may possess on the affected poles outside their pole inspection reports. (Edison Electric Institute contends that “access to critical infrastructure by non-electric company personnel presents serious safety, reliability, and homeland security hazards,” and that “existing law bars electric companies from releasing some information about system infrastructure.” It does not directly assert, however, that utilities would be barred from disclosing information contained in a pole inspection report. And it notes that most of the information is “already available” and an attacher “can readily learn the condition” of poles by driving a proposed route. Although we do not know exactly what information utilities may include in their pole inspection reports, we anticipate that legal constraints on disclosure of critical infrastructure information can be addressed, to the extent that they arise, by the parties involved via appropriate redactions or use of a non-disclosure agreement. We do not intend our new rule to override laws precluding disclosure of certain information, but expect utilities to work in good faith to provide potential attachers with the information they can from their pole inspection reports.) We find this new limited requirement achieves a balance between a potential attacher's need for more information about the poles that it plans to use as part of a broadband buildout and the utility's interest in minimizing the burden of mandatory disclosures. 26. We conclude that requiring utilities to provide information about the state of their poles to attachers will help improve the attachment process and potentially reduce disputes. In particular, having such information early in the process will help attachers evaluate whether they want to adjust their plans in light of the poles' conditions. At the same time, we recognize the potential burdens on utilities that would result from imposing a mandate to compile extensive information for every pole attachment application the utility receives. We seek to strike a balance by (1) requiring utilities to provide such information as they already collect in the normal course of inspections done as part of managing their network and poles (which the record indicates include which poles have been identified as needing replacement), rather than having to gather information solely for attachers or from many disparate sources, and (2) tying requests for such information to poles contained in submitted attachment applications. 27. In striking this balance, we agree with utilities that they should not be required by rule to gather and provide extensive pole-related data for every pole attachment application about matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. The record shows that many utilities do not create specific maintenance or replacement schedules for poles. It also shows that some utilities provide a range of pole-related information—including whether any poles are red-tagged or otherwise identified for replacement—when responding to an attachment application after conducting a make-ready survey. We agree with the commenters asserting that a pre-application survey conducted by the attacher, or a make-ready survey conducted by a utility in response to a specific attachment application, are often the best ways to ensure the potential attacher and utility have up-to- date, accurate information on the current state of poles. (We recognize that a visual inspection may not necessarily provide all the information an attacher might desire. This supports requiring disclosure of pole inspection reports.) We also agree with Dominion/Xcel, however, that the information contained in general survey or pole inspection reports can be useful to prospective attachers in some cases. Therefore, although we decline at this time to impose broader duties on utilities to collect and provide more expansive pole-related information for every attachment application, we will require utilities to furnish already available information in pole inspection reports concerning specific poles upon request at the time an attachment application is submitted. (Some commenters support the balance struck in this new rule. Electric Utilities, on the other hand, request that any consideration of a rule to require disclosure of pole inspection reports be deferred to a further notice of proposed rulemaking.) 28. While we do not at this time codify a requirement for utilities to provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting a pole attachment application, as requested by some commenters, we understand that often utilities share pole information with attachers prior to the application process, particularly information not easily attained through visual inspection. We strongly encourage this pre-application collaboration and cooperation because there is value for both utilities and attachers in having the best available pole information to inform deployment forecasts and attachment requests. Although we recognize that some potential attachers could benefit from obtaining pole-related information prior to submitting an application, we decline to impose this requirement on utilities given that the underlying requests for information would be for preliminary build-out plans that may substantially change. Furthermore, establishing a pre-application duty for utilities would require the Commission to create a new process and timeline prior to the codified make-ready process, which has always been triggered by the filing of an application. Finally, given that prospective attachers also have the ability to gather information about poles on prospective routes through pre-application surveys and visual inspection of poles on a prospective route, we find that imposing an additional pre-application requirement on utilities is not justified at this time. (Through such visual inspection, an attacher typically can learn the age of a pole, whether it has been red tagged, when the most recent inspection occurred, and a pole's load and potential suitability for more attachments. As noted above, however, we also recognize that visual inspection alone may not always provide all the information an attacher may desire, thus supporting the new requirement that utilities provide attachers with cyclical and periodic pole inspection reports. For example, with regard to utility tags on poles, Crown Castle asserts that “not all poles are appropriately tagged or inspection tags may be missing, damaged, or unable to be interpreted without additional information from the pole owner.”) 29. We reject requests at this time that we mandate a variety of other disclosure requirements on utilities. (Several attachers requested that utilities be required to provide any relevant requested information about their poles that they retain in the ordinary course of business, which would go beyond pole inspection reports. While we encourage parties to voluntarily share information, we find that codifying a broad disclosure requirement for all information collected in the ordinary course of business could force utilities to expend significant resources to gather such information and could lead to additional disputes and complaints related to information sharing.) We agree with utilities that the most relevant information for purposes of an attachment request is whether the poles at issue are available or due for replacement. (Some utilities suspect that the purpose of many of the attachers' requests is only to provide ammunition for rate disputes with utilities, not to improve the attachment process.) For example, some attacher commenters ask the Commission to require utilities to create accessible databases (or establish a single database for all utilities) with information on things like pole age, condition, repair/replacement schedules, location, number of attachments, standard rate structure, and applicable engineering standards. They also ask that utilities be required to provide data from the owners' periodic load analyses for poles; the age, height, class, and condition of poles; and data on current attachments and pending attachment requests for relevant poles. And ACA Connects asks the Commission to require utilities to provide more details in their make-ready cost estimates to support those costs. For the reasons discussed below, we decline to adopt these requirements. With respect to certain financial information requested by some commenters regarding pole rates, we do not adopt new disclosure requirements, but make clear that some financial information is already required to be disclosed under our rules. 30. Before addressing these specific proposals, however, we note some attachers express concern that, by adopting a requirement to provide pole inspection reports but not codifying additional mandates, we may be inadvertently discouraging utilities from voluntarily providing pole-related information before receiving an attachment application, which at least some utilities do today. We stress that our actions in this final rule should not be understood to undermine or disincentivize such voluntary sharing. To the contrary, voluntary sharing of pole-related information is consistent with longstanding Commission policy favoring transparency in the pole attachment context, and we strongly encourage both utilities and attachers to collaborate and voluntarily share information with each other whenever such information is reasonably available and obtained in the normal course of business. (We reject claims that our actions here are inconsistent with the policy of promoting transparency, as Crown Castle asserts. To the contrary, this Order increases transparency by adopting a new disclosure requirement.) Voluntary sharing can be helpful to both attachers and utilities to promote more efficient buildouts by informing deployment forecasts, allowing more accurate applications, and decreasing disputes or delays after an application is submitted. (Such voluntary sharing also is helpful because “not all pole owners conduct these denominated inspections,” yet attachers still could benefit from receiving the kind of information that would have been included in such inspections had they occurred.) Having better and more accurate information prior to attachment applications will likely reduce make-ready costs, the frequency and severity of disputes, and improve the efficiency of the attachment process—benefiting both attachers and utilities. We will continue to monitor the record in this proceeding and will take further action if it becomes clear that voluntary information sharing arrangements are insufficiently promoting broadband deployment. 31. Database(s) of Pole Information. We decline (1) to require that each utility create an accessible database with an array of data on all its poles, or (2) to establish a single pole-information database for all utilities. The Commission rejected previous calls for a similar database requirement in 2011, in part based on the large burden outweighing potential benefits. We find that the 2011 reasoning remains valid. In particular, we find that the record continues to demonstrate that the burdens and costs of creating such a database (if a utility does not already have one) would be very large given the number of poles many utilities own or jointly own and the scope of pole data attachers seek, and that the alleged benefits of requiring such a database would be reduced by the new requirement we adopt in this final rule that utilities provide information from their pole inspection reports. Commenters contend that requiring such a pole-related database would help speed deployment by helping attachers plan better and avoid intermediate steps for both attachers and utilities. Utilities, however, assert that due to the very large number of poles they own or co-own and the ever-changing nature of pole networks, maintaining a fully up-to-date database would be almost impossible, and so the information for any given group of poles in a database could easily be out of date when the attacher needs it. One utility also submits that granting access to such voluminous pole information could result in the submission of incorrect applications. We find that the benefits of a database requirement remain speculative at best given how difficult it would be to keep such a large database up-to-date. 32. While some commenters argue that circumstances have changed since 2011, with some state utility commissions adopting database requirements for pole-related information, the states cited by these commenters are limited and, in any event, all regulate pole attachments at the state level pursuant to section 224(c) of the Act. As a result, compliance with pre-existing state-specific database requirements would likely offer little, if any, relief in complying with a newly imposed Federal database requirement. To the extent any utilities may have developed pole-related databases in states that do not regulate pole attachments, the record indicates that attachers are interested in specific types of data, not merely access to existing databases, which would require utilities to absorb additional, and potentially substantial, costs of either adding specific types of new data or searching databases for specific data of interest to attachers. (ACA Connects asserts that many utilities have developed pole-related databases since 2011, but it does not identify utilities that have done so in states that do not regulate pole attachments.) Again, we agree with the utilities that the value of such database information to attachers is highly unlikely to outweigh those burdens, as the information may well be out of date by the time an attacher submits an attachment request. Moreover, any added benefit would likely be minimal in light of the new information-sharing requirement we adopt in this final rule. 33. Loading Studies. According to NCTA, some utilities provide and allow attachers to rely on loading studies included in the utilities' cyclical pole inspection reports rather than making the attacher do its own loading study, but other utilities do not. NCTA asserts that “[w]here such studies have been conducted, pole owners should be required to use that existing analysis rather than forcing a new attacher to incur the expense and delay of performing a duplicative and redundant study.” We decline to adopt this proposal. To the extent pole inspection reports include loading studies, attachers will have access to such information under the new rule we adopt in this final rule. (In cases where the loading study is not part of the inspection report, we decline, at this time, to codify a requirement for a utility to provide an attacher with a loading study as NCTA requests, but strongly encourage utilities to provide such loading studies when reasonably requested and readily available.) We will not, however, dictate when a utility can require a loading study, as NCTA seems to request, as we continue to believe, consistent with the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, that such studies “can be important tools to address safety, reliability, and engineering concerns.” (NCTA also asserts that a utility should have to bear the cost of a loading analysis where none has been performed but the utility believes a study is necessary before allowing an attachment, and that utilities can instead recover the costs of such loading studies through annual attachment rental fees. As that issue relates to cost recovery rather than transparency, we do not address it here.) 34. Age, Height, Class, and Condition of Poles. We reject attachers' request to require utilities to provide data on the age, height, class, and condition of their poles, or the last date the pole was inspected, make-ready was conducted, or a pre-existing violation on the pole was fixed. The utilities state that they either routinely provide this type of data with make-ready estimates, that the information is accessible to attachers through their own pre-application surveys or when the attacher accompanies the utility on a make-ready survey, or that they do not track this data. To the extent utilities' pole inspection reports include such data, that information would be covered by the new transparency requirement we adopt in this final rule and available to attachers upon request after an application is filed. Given that attachers can often obtain this information either from the utility or through their own survey or inspection, we reject any additional requirement for pole condition information beyond that which we have already outlined, but we strongly encourage utilities to share this information when it is readily available and collected in the normal course of business. 35. Existing Attachments and Pending Attachment Requests. We also decline to require that utilities provide data on the number of attachments or pending attachment applications for each pole covered by an attachment request. As the utilities explain, pole networks are dynamic and pole conditions frequently change. We find that the record sufficiently demonstrates that attempting to keep a fully up-to-date list of the number of attachments or pending applications on every pole would be a very time-consuming and expensive proposition. (Some attachers also sought to require pole owners to produce information on utility transformers or voltage on a pole or the total attachment load on the pole, but utilities either deny the usefulness of such information or state that they do not track it.) Even if some utilities track this information, requiring them to compile the information and send it across a vast and shifting landscape of attachers and poles—and to keep that information updated—would be a considerable burden. Although attachers assert there would be some value in having this kind of data earlier, even if it is old, we find that, as with the proposed pole attachment database discussed above, any purported benefit is outweighed by the potentially considerable cost utilities would have to bear in complying with such a requirement. 36. Data Supporting Make-Ready Estimates. With regard to the request that utilities be required to provide more detailed supporting data in their make-ready estimates, particularly regarding the utility's costs, we again decline to adopt any new requirement. Current rules already require utilities to provide supporting cost details in their make-ready cost estimates. If utilities are not complying with those rules, attachers remain free to invoke the complaint process or seek mediation. 37. Financial Records Regarding Poles. We decline attachers' requests to create new obligations requiring utilities to provide additional financial data regarding poles and attachment rates, including outside plant records (also called continuing property records) as part of the rules being adopted at this time. (Continuing Property Records are “[o]utside plant records relevant to poles,” typically “including a detailed accounting of the units associated with accounts used to report pole plant investment such as vintage height, class, etc.” Several attachers repeated these requests in later submissions, asking that utilities be required to disclose a range of information related to rates, rather than only the information the utility relied on in computing rates, to enable attachers to, for example, evaluate the validity of utilities' reliance on presumptions in the pole attachment rate formula.) Attachers argue that such a duty for utilities to provide information will reduce rate disputes or make them easier to resolve. Our focus here, however, is on deployment rather than rate disputes. Further, § 1.1404(e) and (f) of the Commission's rules—which we do not alter here—already require that pole owners, upon request of a cable operator or telecommunications carrier, provide the information they have relied on in calculating rates, and information an attacher seeks to rely on in establishing that a rate, term, or condition is not just and reasonable. The Commission has explained that “it is critical that attaching entities have this information well in advance of executive-level discussions to ensure that those pre-complaint negotiations have a chance of success.” (NCTA contends the former language in § 1.1404(g) was inadvertently removed in a prior rule revision. We disagree. The Commission sought to “streamline the rules in [§ ] 1.1404” by removing the long list of information specified in that section but did not narrow the scope of information utilities must provide attachers. In light of these existing rules and the policy stated by the Commission in 2018, to the extent an attacher has a specific dispute with a utility, it already can seek and obtain certain financial data from the utility, prior to filing a complaint, under current rules.) We therefore decline to impose a new, broader duty to disclose additional financial records related to poles. (USTelecom, whose members include both pole owners and attachers, argues that imposing a duty beyond current law “would not accelerate broadband deployment or reduce its costs, but would likely have the opposite effect by diverting broadband providers' capital away from their own broadband deployment to subsidize their competitors' builds.”)
24 24
25 [I. Introduction] 25 [IV. Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis]
26 1. Access to a broadband connection is a necessity of modern life. With consumers more dependent than ever on fixed and mobile broadband networks for work, healthcare services, education, and social activities, the Commission remains committed to ensuring consumers across the nation have meaningful access to broadband. With the support of the Commission's universal service fund, the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, which included the largest ever federal investment in broadband, as well as other federal and state broadband deployment programs, more funding than ever is available to build the necessary infrastructure to bring much-needed broadband services to unserved and underserved areas in the United States. Key to these broadband projects are the utility poles that support the wires and the wireless equipment that carry broadband to American homes and businesses. 2. Over the last several years, the Commission has taken significant steps in setting the “rules for the road” for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. (Note that section 224(c) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended (the Act), exempts from Commission jurisdiction those pole attachments in states that have elected to regulate pole attachments themselves. To date, 23 states and the District of Columbia have opted out of Commission regulation of pole attachments in their jurisdictions. The Commission's pole attachment rules currently only apply to cable operators and providers of telecommunications services and therefore do not apply to broadband-only internet service providers. We recently proposed to reclassify broadband internet access service as a telecommunications service, which would, if completed, apply section 224 and the Commission's pole attachment rules to broadband-only internet service providers.) In this item, we take additional steps to speed broadband deployment by making the pole attachment process faster, more transparent, and more cost effective. Specifically, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing communications providers with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. Additionally, as a follow-on to the pole replacement clarification issued in the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, in the Declaratory Ruling below we provide further clarification regarding cost causation when a pole must be replaced for any reason other than lacking capacity to support a new attachment. Specifically, we clarify that a “red tagged” pole is one that the utility has identified as needing replacement for any reason other than the pole's lack of capacity, and we provide additional examples of when a pole replacement is not “necessitated solely” as a result of a third party's attachment or modification request— i.e., when a pole already requires replacement at the time the new attacher makes a request. We also clarify the obligation to share easement information and the applicable timelines for the processing of attachment requests for 3,000 or more poles. Finally, we seek comment in the FNPRM on ways to further facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable faster broadband deployment. 26 38. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) was incorporated into the Second FNPRM. The Commission sought written public comment on the proposals in the Second FNPRM, including comment on the IRFA. No comments were filed addressing the IRFA. This present Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) conforms to the RFA. A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Fourth Report and Order 39. In the Fourth Report and Order, the Commission adopts rules and policy changes that will make the pole attachment process faster and cheaper, particularly when poles have to be replaced during broadband buildouts. In the last five years, the Commission took significant steps in setting standards for the discussions between utilities and telecommunications companies about the timing and cost of attaching broadband equipment to utility poles, with the backstop of a robust complaint process when parties cannot agree on the rates, terms, and conditions for pole attachments. In the Fourth Report and Order, we adopt rules (1) establishing a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) providing telecommunications companies with information about the status of the utility poles they plan to use as they map out their broadband builds. B. Summary of Significant Issues Raised by Public Comments in Response to the IRFA 40. There were no comments raised that specifically addressed the proposed rules and policies presented in the Second FNPRM IRFA. Nonetheless, the Commission considered the potential impact of the rules proposed in the IRFA on small entities and took steps where appropriate and feasible to reduce the compliance burden for small entities in order to reduce the economic impact of the rules enacted herein on such entities. C. Response to Comments by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration 41. Pursuant to the Small Business Jobs Act of 2010, which amended the RFA, the Commission is required to respond to any comments filed by the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA), and to provide a detailed statement of any change made to the proposed rules as a result of those comments. The Chief Counsel did not file any comments in response to the proposed rules in this proceeding. D. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which Rules Will Apply 42. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that may be affected by the rules adopted herein. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small-business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business applies unless an agency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activities of the agency and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .) A “small-business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA. 43. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small entities that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatory flexibility analysis, according to data from the SBA's Office of Advocacy, in general a small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 44. Next, the type of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the population of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less according to the registration and tax data for exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 45. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand. U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the United States. (The Census of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal, and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (2,105 county, 18,729 municipal, and 16,097 town and township governments) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments (independent school districts) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the special purpose governments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the number of special purpose governments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 46. Wired Broadband internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 47. Additionally, according to Commission data on internet access services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include asymmetric and symmetric digital subscriber line (aDSL and sDSL) (collectively xDSL), Other Wireline, Cable Modem, and fiber to the premises (FTTP).) Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 48. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as voice over internet protocol (VoIP) service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of All Other Telecommunications. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firms in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 49. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide a variety of services, such as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not included in this industry.) 50. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 51. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 52. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers ( Incumbent LECs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 53. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 54. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 55. Operator Service Providers ( OSPs ). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of operator services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 56. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 57. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of the Wireless internet Service Providers Association (WISPA), including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfers or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 58. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) . This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 59. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to part 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 60. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in the designated entities section in part 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The Designated entities sections in subparts D through Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 61. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 62. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 64. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 65. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 67. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 68. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 69. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under part 90 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commission estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 70. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 71. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including frequency division duplex (FDD)- and time division duplex (TDD)-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 72. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 73. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 74. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806 MHz bands. Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 75. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 76. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800 MHz air-ground spectrum. 77. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 78. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 79. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 80. 3650-3700 MHz band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700 MHz band fall in the Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 81. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are small internet Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the 3650-3700 MHz band. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 82. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of title 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.) They also include the Upper Microwave Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 83. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 84. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 85. Broadband Radio Service and Educational Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of the Broadband Radio Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatory purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmission depends upon the transmitter power, the type of receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 86. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 87. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auction of BRS licenses, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the winning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 88. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million for the preceding five (5) years, and a very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 89. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications. Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 90. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of transmitting telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 91. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers may not provide telephone service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 92. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscription or fee basis. The broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 93. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the purpose of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. Of these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 94. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is a cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000. For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a small cable operator. (In the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determined that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 95. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer. This industry group is categorized based on fuel source and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control, and Electric Power Distribution. 96. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. E. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements 97. In the Fourth Report and Order, we (1) establish a new process for the Commission's review and assessment of pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment in order to expedite resolution of such disputes, and (2) adopt a new requirement that utilities retain copies of their cyclical pole inspection reports and, upon request, provide prospective pole attachers with the information included in the most recent report regarding the poles affected by a prospective attacher's submitted attachment application. Our new requirements are minimally burdensome as they merely require (1) parties seeking to have complaints placed on the Accelerated Docket to submit a form to the newly-established Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT) that will elicit information relevant to the scope and nature of the dispute and to whether the dispute is appropriate for expedited mediation and/or placement on the Accelerated Docket, and (2) utilities to provide information they already collect in the normal course of business for cyclical pole inspection reports. 98. Parties seeking both RBAT review and assessment of a dispute that a party contends is impeding or delaying deployment of broadband facilities, and inclusion of a proceeding relating to broadband facilities deployment on the Accelerated Docket, the party must first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) of the request by phone and in writing. This initial notification by phone and in writing would need to be made prior to filing the formal complaint and would constitute the notification required under § 1.736(b). Additionally, the RBAT may require that the parties participate, if appropriate, in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. We amend our pole attachment make-ready rules to require utilities to provide to potential attachers, upon request, the information contained in their most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or any intervening, periodic reports created before the next cyclical inspection, for the poles covered by a submitted attachment application, including whether any of the affected poles have been “red tagged” by the utility for replacement, and the scheduled replacement date or timeframe. The record indicates that utilities already prepare such reports, making this new transparency requirement consistent with the existing practices. For these reasons, we believe that small and other utilities will not have an issue complying with the new obligation. 99. The Commission does not have sufficient information on the record to determine whether small entities will be required to hire professionals to comply with its decisions, or to quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the Fourth Report and Order. While some small entities may have some unique burdens, the Commission anticipates the requirements for pole attachment disputes and data collection by utility companies will have minimal cost implications because many of these obligations are consistent with existing Commission regulations to file disputes, and existing practices by utilities to prepare pole inspection reports. F. Steps Taken To Minimize Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 100. The RFA requires an agency to provide a description of the steps the agency has taken to minimize the significant economic impact on small entities including a statement of the factual, policy, and legal reasons for selecting the alternative adopted in the final rule and why each one of the other significant alternatives to the rule considered by the agency which affect the impact on small entities was rejected. 101. The Commission took steps to minimize significant economic impact on small entities and considered alternatives to new rules and processes adopted in the Fourth Report and Order that may impact small entities. By establishing the RBAT, we addressed commenters' request that we expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes, the delay of which may impose greater harm on small providers. In considering alternatives to the rules, we declined to adopt certain proposals that are burdensome, unnecessary, or would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. For example, we agreed with utilities that they should not be required to gather and provide pole-related data for matters they do not track in the normal course of business through their inspections. We also declined to require that small and other utilities provide new attachers with information about poles prior to the attacher submitting an application because this data would be speculative and the build-out may never occur. Additionally, we declined to establish a single pole-information database or require each utility to create a database of all its poles. Similar to our prior decisions on this matter, the record demonstrates that the burdens and costs of creating such a database are considerable given that many utilities own or jointly own poles. Further, the scope of pole data attachers seek exists in information from pole inspection reports we require small and other utility companies to provide in the Fourth Report and Order. We considered and declined to require small and other utilities to provide financial data regarding poles and attachment rates because this would be overly burdensome for the utilities. We also considered but declined to require small and other utilities to provide information on the age or condition of the poles, or number of current or pending attachment applications for each pole because it could be burdensome, unnecessary, or unfeasible in some cases, and would impose significant costs on utilities with little or no benefit to broadband deployment. Finally, we declined to require small and other utilities to provide more detailed supporting data in their make ready estimates because the current complaint process should be sufficient to address a potential dispute on this matter. G. Report to Congress 102. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order, including the FRFA, in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act. In addition, the Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the FRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. A copy of the Fourth Report and Order (or summaries thereof) will also be published in the Federal Register .
27 27
28 [II. Background] 28 [V. Procedural Matters]
29 3. In 1996, as part of its implementation of the pole attachment requirements located in sections 224(h) and 224(i) of the Act, the Commission determined that when a modification, such as a pole replacement, is undertaken for the benefit of a particular party, then under cost causation principles, the benefiting party must assume the cost of the modification. (Section 224(h) states that “[w]henever the owner of a pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way intends to modify or alter such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way, the owner shall provide written notification of such action to any entity that has obtained an attachment to such conduit or right-of-way so that such entity may have a reasonable opportunity to add to or modify its existing attachment. Any entity that adds to or modifies its existing attachment after receiving such notification shall bear a proportionate share of the costs incurred by the owner in making such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way accessible.” Section 224(i) states that “[a]n entity that obtains an attachment to a pole, conduit, or right-of-way shall not be required to bear any of the costs of rearranging or replacing its attachment, if such rearrangement or replacement is required as a result of an additional attachment or the modification of an existing attachment sought by any other entity (including the owner of such pole, duct, conduit, or right-of-way).”) The Commission also found that when a utility decides to modify a pole for its own benefit, and no other attachers derive a benefit from the modification, the utility must bear the full cost of the new pole. The Commission further adopted a cost sharing principle for when an existing attacher uses a modification by another party as an opportunity to add to or modify its own attachments and applied this principle to utilities and other attachers seeking to use modifications as an opportunity to bring their own facilities into compliance with safety or other requirements. In the 2018 Wireline Infrastructure Order, the Commission reiterated that application of the cost sharing principle. 4. On July 16, 2020, NCTA—the Internet &amp; Television Association (NCTA) filed a Petition asking the Commission to clarify its rules in the context of pole replacements. Specifically, NCTA asked the Commission to declare that: (1) utilities must share in the cost of pole replacements in unserved areas pursuant to section 224 of the Act, section 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules, and Commission precedent; (2) pole attachment complaints arising in unserved areas should be prioritized through placement on the Accelerated Docket under § 1.736 of the Commission's rules; and (3) § 1.1407(b) of the Commission's rules authorizes the Commission to order a utility to complete a pole replacement within a specified time frame or designate an authorized contractor to do so. NCTA argued that without Commission action, the costs and operational challenges associated with pole replacements will inhibit attachers from deploying broadband services to Americans in unserved areas. 5. In the 2021 Pole Replacement Declaratory Ruling, although the Wireline Competition Bureau declined to act on NCTA's Petition, finding that “it is more appropriate to address questions concerning the allocation of pole replacement costs within the context of a rulemaking, which provides the Commission with greater flexibility to tailor regulatory solutions,” it observed that the record developed in response to the NCTA Petition revealed inconsistent practices by utilities with regard to cost responsibility for pole replacements. Accordingly, the Bureau clarified that, pursuant to § 1.1408(b) of the Commission's rules and prior precedent, “utilities may not require requesting attachers to pay the entire cost of pole replacements that are not solely caused by the new attacher and, thus, may not avoid responsibility for pole replacement costs by postponing replacements until new attachment requests are submitted.” The Commission subsequently affirmed the Bureau's clarifications. 6. Last year, the Commission issued a Second Further Notice (87 FR 25181; Apr. 28, 2022) in this proceeding seeking comment on the universe of situations where the requesting attacher should not be required to pay for the full cost of a pole replacement and the proper allocation of costs among utilities and attachers in those situations. (To the extent that this Report and Order does not expressly address a topic that was subject to comment in the Second Further Notice, that issue remains pending.) Specifically, the Commission sought comment on the applicability of cost causation and cost allocation principles in the context of pole replacements— e.g., when is a pole replacement not caused (necessitated solely) by a new attachment request, and when and how parties must share in the costs of a pole replacement. The Commission also sought comment on the extent to which utilities directly benefit from pole replacements, including a utility's responsibility for the costs of pole upgrades and modifications unrelated to new attachments and the effect of early pole retirements on pole replacement cost causation and cost allocation calculations. The Second Further Notice also sought comment on whether the Commission should require utilities to share information with potential attachers concerning the condition and replacement status of their poles and other measures that may help avoid or expedite the resolution of disputes between the parties, including whether to expand use of the Commission's Accelerated Docket for pole attachment complaints and the specific criteria that Commission staff should use in deciding whether to place a pole complaint on the Accelerated Docket. 29 103. Regulatory Flexibility Act. The Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), requires that an agency prepare a regulatory flexibility analysis for notice and comment rulemakings, unless the agency certifies that the rule will not, if promulgated, have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small entities. Accordingly, we have prepared a Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (FRFA) concerning the possible impact of the rule changes contained in the Fourth Report and Order on small entities. The FRFA is set forth herein. 104. Congressional Review Act. The Commission will send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). 105. Paperwork Reduction Act. This document may contain proposed new or modified information collection requirements subject to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (PRA), Public Law 104-13. Specifically, the rules adopted in 47 CFR 1.1411, 1.1415, and 1.1416 may require new or modified information collections. All such new or modified information collection requirements will be submitted to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) for review under Section 3507(d) of the PRA. OMB, the general public, and other Federal agencies will be invited to comment on the new or modified information collection requirements contained in this proceeding. In addition, we note that pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we previously sought specific comment on how the Commission might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. In this document, we describe several steps we have taken to minimize the information collection burdens on small entities.
30 30
31 [III. Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking] 31 [VI. Ordering Clauses]
32 7. We recognize that Congress has undertaken a number of initiatives allocating funding to further the deployment of broadband to unserved and underserved areas of the United States. In connection with this funding, broadband providers will have to deploy extensive facilities. This, in turn will require that they file significant numbers of applications seeking to attach these facilities to large numbers of poles. To that end, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable speedier broadband deployment. In seeking comment on these areas, we emphasize that even when there is not a specific Commission rule or policy that governs a particular situation, it is our expectation that parties negotiate in good faith to resolve issues that may arise. 8. Large Orders. We tentatively conclude that we should adopt a defined make-ready timeline for orders that exceed 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state in order to facilitate the processing of pole attachment applications that are submitted in large numbers. We seek comment on this tentative conclusion. Our current make-ready rule requires make-ready in the communications space to be completed within 30 days after the utility sends a notification to all existing attachers on a pole. (The rule provides 90 days from attachments above the communications space.) The 30-day timeframe applies for communications space make-ready requests up to the lesser of 300 poles or 0.5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. This make-ready timeframe is extended 45 extra days for requests up to the lesser of 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. For requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in the state, the Commission's rules require that a utility shall negotiate the timing of the make-ready in good faith. (As we clarify in the Declaratory Ruling accompanying this FNPRM, the first 3,000 poles of these large orders are subject to the timeline set forth in § 1.1411(g)(3).) We tentatively conclude that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state and seek comment on this tentative conclusion. 9. NCTA asserts that our rules do not at present sufficiently address the needs of attachers with these larger requests in the latter category. For example, NCTA asserts that its members have faced situations where the utilities have imposed limits on (1) the number of poles that may be included in any one application, and (2) the number of applications an attacher may submit at a time. NCTA states that these limitations “create problematic delays and jeopardize operators' ability to meet broadband build-out commitments.” At the same time, USTelecom notes the difficulties presented by these very large orders, noting that “make-ready requests involving more than 3,000 poles require flexibility that make-ready timelines cannot provide, given the many outside factors that impact the time required for make-ready for such large orders, including permitting delays, workforce shortages and staffing issues, and the coordination required among all the attachers to the poles.” Given these factors, would 90 additional days over the timeline set forth in § 1.411(e) be sufficient for processing these larger orders? Would some other amount of time be reasonable in all circumstances, or should the Commission create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles? If the Commission were to adopt additional make-ready timeline tiers, what would be an appropriate cut off number of poles for each tier? For instance, should the Commission add an additional number of days for application processing per 3,000 poles? Does the ability to deviate from the timelines specified in § 1.1411 provide utilities with enough flexibility such that imposing a 90 additional day limit would be reasonable? 10. We also seek comment on NCTA's proposal that the Commission revise its rules to prohibit utilities from limiting “the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application so as to avoid the timelines.” How prevalent are situations of the type described by NCTA? Are the reasons underlying utilities' imposition of such limitations as laid out by USTelecom valid, and do other reasons exist for these limitations? Would prohibiting utilities from imposing such limitations in fact speed up the attachment process, or would the same delays still exist for other reasons ( e.g., lack of qualified workers, shortages in materials, etc.) or even, as USTelecom alleges, “ultimately slow—rather than—accelerate deployment”? Specifically, NCTA proposes adding additional time to the existing timelines for these “larger” orders, for which our rules require that utilities negotiate the timing in good faith. Would NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders? Utilities have raised multiple concerns with such requirements. For example, they assert that compliance with expanded timelines may not be possible “if many permit applications by multiple attachers are submitted at approximately the same time, or if the contractor's workload is already heavy.” They also assert that given constraints on workforce availability, utilities would be forced to “choose between providing safe, reliable and affordable power to electric customers (which is mandated by the states), and performing requested pole replacements in an unreasonable and likely unattainable amount of time.” Are these concerns valid? Are there any other reasons why NCTA's proposed new timing requirements for larger orders would not work? What are the respective costs and benefits of such potential requirements? What other steps could we take to facilitate the pole attachment process for larger orders? 11. Self-Help and Use of Contractors. Should the Commission consider modifying its self-help rules to enable prospective attachers to access poles more quickly? NCTA also asserts that it has faced issues with utilities failing to process attachment applications in a timely manner. NCTA therefore proposes that utilities notify attachers in advance of survey and make-ready deadlines if the utility will be unable to complete a portion of the process. For instance, NCTA proposes that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period so that the attacher can elect self-help for the survey sooner. NCTA also proposes making self-help available for the estimate process, which is not contemplated under current Commission rules. We seek comment on NCTA's proposal. (We decline NCTA's request to adopt rules in the Fourth Report and Order regarding self-help and the use of contractors. We find that these issues would be better addressed after a more comprehensive record is developed.) How prevalent is the issue cited by NCTA? Can utilities feasibly be required to inform attachers within 15 business days of receiving a completed application that they will be unable to conduct a survey, estimate, or make-ready within the required time period? Do sufficient contractors exist that meet the minimum qualification requirements set forth in our rules such that adoption of NCTA's proposal would have the desired effect of speeding broadband deployment? What are the respective costs and benefits of adopting NCTA's proposal? Are there other ways to assist utilities in processing the larger number of applications they will likely receive in the coming months and years based on the funding initiatives in place for accelerating broadband deployment to unserved and underserved areas? 12. We also seek comment on the impact of contractor availability when attachers seek to use their own contractors when conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready for surveys and make-ready work. Specifically, do we need to amend the Commission's rules to make it easier for attachers to use their own contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready surveys and make-ready work when there are no contractors available from a utility list? Utility commenters point out the labor constraints in the contractor workforce; given such constraints, do our current rules provide adequate relief to attachers to timely identify and use qualified contractors to do self-help and one-touch make-ready work? If not, what can the Commission do to change this dynamic? 13. Pursuant to our rules, an attacher can do its own work when (1) completing surveys and make-ready work when the utility misses the deadlines for these activities, or (2) electing to use the one-touch make-ready process. (Note that there are no attacher self-help remedies for pole replacements.) When conducting self-help or one-touch make-ready work, the attacher must use a utility-approved contractor. For self-help surveys and make-ready work that is complex or is above the communications space on a pole, our rules require that a utility make available and keep up to date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors that it authorizes to perform such work. (The term “complex make-ready” means transfers and work within the communications space on a pole that would be reasonably likely to cause a service outage(s) or facility damage, including work such as splicing of any communication attachment or relocation of existing wireless attachments. Any and all wireless activities, including those involving mobile, fixed, and point-to-point wireless communications and wireless internet service providers, are to be considered complex.) Attachers can request to add contactors to the utility's list—provided the contractor meets the minimum qualifications in the Commission's rules—and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. Further, a utility may, but is not required to, keep up-to-date a reasonably sufficient list of contractors it authorizes to perform surveys and simple make-ready. If a utility provides such a list, then the new attacher must choose a contractor from the list to perform the work. Again, attachers may request the addition to the list of any contractor that meets the minimum qualifications in the Commission's rules, and the utility cannot unreasonably withhold its consent. However, if the utility does not provide a list of approved contractors for surveys or simple make-ready work or no utility-approved contractor is available within a reasonable time period, then the new attacher may choose its own qualified contractor who meets the Commission's minimum requirements. Utilities retain the right to disqualify such contractor, but disqualification must be based on reasonable safety or reliability concerns related to the contractor's failure to meet any of the Commission's minimum qualifications or to meet the utility's publicly available and commercially reasonable safety or reliability standards. The utility must provide notice of this objection to the attacher and must identify at least one available qualified contractor that the attacher can use instead to perform simple surveys and make-ready work. 14. Given that our current rules allow for attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utility fails to meet the Commission's deadlines (provided such contractors meet the minimum qualifications set forth in our rules), we seek comment on whether attachers are availing themselves of this option. Have attachers faced any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke this option? While a utility cannot be blamed for a lack of available contractors in an area due to workforce constraints, are utilities seeking to use their discretion set forth in the rules to disqualify otherwise-qualified contractors whom attachers may seek to bring in from outside of an area? We note that, at least for surveys and simple make-ready work, our current rules already require the utility to designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher—is this not being done? If not, is it due to labor constraints for which the utility should not be held responsible? In the instance where no qualified contractors are available for a project, how could the Commission help to solve that problem? 32 106. Accordingly, it is ordered that pursuant to sections 1-4, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r) of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 151-54, 201, 202, 224, and 303(r), the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling hereby is adopted and part 1 of the Commission's Rules, 47 CFR part 1, is amended as set forth in Appendix A of the Fourth Report and Order. 107. It is further ordered that the Fourth Report and Order shall become effective 30 days after publication in the Federal Register , except that the amendments to § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415, 47 CFR 1.1411(c)(4), 1.1415, which may contain new or modified information collection requirements, will not become effective until the Office of Management and Budget completes review of any information collection requirements that the Wireline Competition Bureau determines is required under the Paperwork Reduction Act. The Commission directs the Wireline Competition Bureau to announce the effective date for § 1.1411(c)(4) and new § 1.1415 by subsequent Public Notice. 108. It is further ordered that, pursuant to 47 CFR 1.4(b)(1), the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Fourth Report and Order will commence on the date that a summary of the Fourth Report and Order is published in the Federal Register , and the period for filing petitions for reconsideration or petitions for judicial review of the Declaratory Ruling will commence upon release of the Declaratory Ruling. 109. It is further ordered that the Commission's Office of the Secretary, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order and Declaratory Ruling, including the Final Regulatory Flexibility Analysis and Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. 110. It is further ordered that the Office of the Managing Director, Performance Evaluation and Records Management, shall send a copy of the Fourth Report and Order in a report to be sent to Congress and the Government Accountability Office pursuant to the Congressional Review Act, see 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(1)(A). List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Marlene Dortch, Secretary.
33 33
34 [IV. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis] 34 [Final Rules]
35 15. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act of 1980, as amended (RFA), the Commission has prepared this Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities by the policies and rules proposed in this FNPRM. The Commission requests written public comments on this IRFA. Comments must be identified as responses to the IRFA and must be filed by the deadlines for comments provided on the first page of the FNPRM. The Commission will send a copy of the FNPRM, including this IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration (SBA). In addition, the FNPRM and IRFA (or summaries thereof) will be published in the Federal Register . A. Need for, and Objectives of, the Proposed Rules 16. In order to continue the Commission's work combating illegal calls, this FNPRM proposes to impose several obligations on gateway providers. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to require gateway providers to authenticate and employ robocall mitigation techniques on all SIP calls that they allow into the United States from abroad that display a U.S. number in the caller ID field. The FNPRM also proposes that gateway providers should engage in robocall mitigation by (1) responding to all traceback requests from the Commission, law enforcement, and the industry traceback consortium within 24 hours; (2) complying with mandatory call blocking requirements; (3) complying with enhanced know-your-customer obligations; (4) complying with a general duty to mitigate illegal robocalls; and (5) filing a certification in the Robocall Mitigation Database. The Commission also proposes one blocking requirement for intermediate and terminating providers immediately downstream from the gateway provider, which would require those providers to block all traffic from a gateway provider that fails to block or effectively mitigate illegal traffic when notified of such traffic by the Commission. B. Legal Basis 17. The FNPRM proposes to find authority largely under those provisions through which it has previously adopted rules to stem the tide of robocalls in its Call Blocking and Call Authentication Orders. Specifically, the FNPRM proposes to find authority under sections 201(a) and (b), 202(a), 251(e), the Truth in Caller ID Act, the TRACED Act and, where appropriate, ancillary authority. The FNPRM also proposes to conclude that, to the extent any of the rules we seek to adopt have an effect on foreign service providers, that effect is only indirect and therefore consistent with the Commission's authority. The FNPRM solicits comment on these proposals. C. Description and Estimate of the Number of Small Entities to Which the Proposed Rules Will Apply 18. The RFA directs agencies to provide a description of, and where feasible, an estimate of the number of small entities that may be affected by the proposed rules, if adopted. The RFA generally defines the term “small entity” as having the same meaning as the terms “small business,” “small organization,” and “small governmental jurisdiction.” In addition, the term “small business” has the same meaning as the term “small business concern” under the Small Business Act. (Pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 601(3), the statutory definition of a small business applies “unless an agency, after consultation with the Office of Advocacy of the Small Business Administration and after opportunity for public comment, establishes one or more definitions of such term which are appropriate to the activities of the agency and publishes such definition(s) in the Federal Register .”) A “small business concern” is one which: (1) is independently owned and operated; (2) is not dominant in its field of operation; and (3) satisfies any additional criteria established by the SBA. 19. Small Businesses, Small Organizations, Small Governmental Jurisdictions. Our actions, over time, may affect small entities that are not easily categorized at present. We therefore describe, at the outset, three broad groups of small entities that could be directly affected herein. First, while there are industry specific size standards for small businesses that are used in the regulatory flexibility analysis, according to data from the Small Business Administration's (SBA) Office of Advocacy, in general a small business is an independent business having fewer than 500 employees. These types of small businesses represent 99.9% of all businesses in the United States, which translates to 33.2 million businesses. 20. Next, the type of small entity described as a “small organization” is generally “any not-for-profit enterprise which is independently owned and operated and is not dominant in its field.” The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) uses a revenue benchmark of $50,000 or less to delineate its annual electronic filing requirements for small exempt organizations. (The IRS benchmark is similar to the population of less than 50,000 benchmark in 5 U.S.C. 601(5) that is used to define a small governmental jurisdiction. Therefore, the IRS benchmark has been used to estimate the number of small organizations in this small entity description. We note that the IRS data does not provide information on whether a small exempt organization is independently owned and operated or dominant in its field.) Nationwide, for tax year 2020, there were approximately 447,689 small exempt organizations in the U.S. reporting revenues of $50,000 or less according to the registration and tax data for exempt organizations available from the IRS. (The IRS Exempt Organization Business Master File (E.O. BMF) Extract provides information on all registered tax-exempt/non-profit organizations. The data utilized for purposes of this description was extracted from the IRS E.O. BMF data for businesses for the tax year 2020 with revenue less than or equal to $50,000 for Region 1—Northeast Area (58,577), Region 2—Mid-Atlantic and Great Lakes Areas (175,272), and Region 3—Gulf Coast and Pacific Coast Areas (213,840) that includes the continental U.S., Alaska, and Hawaii. This data does not include information for Puerto Rico.) 21. Finally, the small entity described as a “small governmental jurisdiction” is defined generally as “governments of cities, counties, towns, townships, villages, school districts, or special districts, with a population of less than fifty thousand.” U.S. Census Bureau data from the 2017 Census of Governments indicate there were 90,075 local governmental jurisdictions consisting of general purpose governments and special purpose governments in the United States. (The Census of Governments survey is conducted every five (5) years compiling data for years ending with “2” and “7”.) (Local governmental jurisdictions are made up of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) and special purpose governments (special districts and independent school districts).) Of this number, there were 36,931 general purpose governments (county, (there were 2,105 county governments with populations less than 50,000. This category does not include subcounty (municipal and township) governments) municipal, and town or township (there were 18,729 municipal and 16,097 town and township governments with populations less than 50,000)) with populations of less than 50,000 and 12,040 special purpose governments—independent school districts (there were 12,040 independent school districts with enrollment populations less than 50,000) with enrollment populations of less than 50,000. (While the special purpose governments category also includes local special district governments, the 2017 Census of Governments data does not provide data aggregated based on population size for the special purpose governments category. Therefore, only data from independent school districts is included in the special purpose governments category.) Accordingly, based on the 2017 U.S. Census of Governments data, we estimate that at least 48,971 entities fall into the category of “small governmental jurisdictions.” (This total is derived from the sum of the number of general purpose governments (county, municipal and town or township) with populations of less than 50,000 (36,931) and the number of special purpose governments—independent school districts with enrollment populations of less than 50,000 (12,040), from the 2017 Census of Governments—Organizations tbls. 5, 6 &amp; 10.) 1. Internet Access Service Providers 22. Wired Broadband Internet Access Service Providers (Wired ISPs). (Formerly included in the scope of the Internet Service Providers (Broadband), Wired Telecommunications Carriers and All Other Telecommunications small entity industry descriptions.) Providers of wired broadband internet access service include various types of providers except dial-up internet access providers. Wireline service that terminates at an end user location or mobile device and enables the end user to receive information from and/or send information to the internet at information transfer rates exceeding 200 kilobits per second (kbps) in at least one direction is classified as a broadband connection under the Commission's rules. Wired broadband internet services fall in the Wired Telecommunications Carriers industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) 23. Additionally, according to Commission data on internet access services as of June 30, 2019, nationwide there were approximately 2,747 providers of connections over 200 kbps in at least one direction using various wireline technologies. (The technologies used by providers include aDSL, sDSL, Other Wireline, Cable Modem and FTTP). Other wireline includes: all copper-wire based technologies other than xDSL (such as Ethernet over copper, T-1/DS-1 and T3/DS-1) as well as power line technologies which are included in this category to maintain the confidentiality of the providers.) The Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for providers of these services, therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of providers that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. However, in light of the general data on fixed technology service providers in the Commission's 2022 Communications Marketplace Report, we believe that the majority of wireline internet access service providers can be considered small entities. 24. Internet Service Providers (Non-Broadband). Internet access service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections ( e.g., dial-up ISPs) as well as VoIP service providers using client-supplied telecommunications connections fall in the industry classification of All Other Telecommunications. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Consequently, under the SBA size standard a majority of firms in this industry can be considered small. 2. Wireline Providers 25. Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating and/or providing access to transmission facilities and infrastructure that they own and/or lease for the transmission of voice, data, text, sound, and video using wired communications networks. Transmission facilities may be based on a single technology or a combination of technologies. Establishments in this industry use the wired telecommunications network facilities that they operate to provide a variety of services, such as wired telephony services, including VoIP services, wired (cable) audio and video programming distribution, and wired broadband internet services. By exception, establishments providing satellite television distribution services using facilities and infrastructure that they operate are included in this industry. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared-Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, and Other Local Service Providers. Local Resellers fall into another U.S. Census Bureau industry group and therefore data for these providers is not included in this industry.) 26. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of fixed local services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 27. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include both incumbent and competitive local exchange service providers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. Wired Telecommunications Carriers are also referred to as wireline carriers or fixed local service providers. (Fixed Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 4,590 providers that reported they were fixed local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 4,146 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 28. Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (Incumbent LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA have developed a small business size standard specifically for incumbent local exchange carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 1,212 providers that reported they were incumbent local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 916 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of incumbent local exchange carriers can be considered small entities. 29. Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (LECs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a size standard for small businesses specifically applicable to local exchange services. Providers of these services include several types of competitive local exchange service providers. (Competitive Local Exchange Service Providers include the following types of providers: Competitive Access Providers (CAPs) and Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), Cable/Coax CLECs, Interconnected VOIP Providers, Non-Interconnected VOIP Providers, Shared Tenant Service Providers, Audio Bridge Service Providers, Local Resellers, and Other Local Service Providers.) Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 3,378 providers that reported they were competitive local exchange service providers. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 3,230 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 30. Interexchange Carriers (IXCs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for Interexchange Carriers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 127 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of interexchange services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 109 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, the Commission estimates that the majority of providers in this industry can be considered small entities. 31. Operator Service Providers (OSPs). Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a small business size standard specifically for operator service providers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wired Telecommunications Carriers. The SBA small business size standard classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 20 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of operator services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that all 20 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, all of these providers can be considered small entities. 32. Other Toll Carriers. Neither the Commission nor the SBA has developed a definition for small businesses specifically applicable to Other Toll Carriers. This category includes toll carriers that do not fall within the categories of interexchange carriers, operator service providers, prepaid calling card providers, satellite service carriers, or toll resellers. Wired Telecommunications Carriers is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard. The SBA small business size standard for Wired Telecommunications Carriers classifies firms having 1,500 or fewer employees as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 3,054 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,964 firms operated with fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 90 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of other toll services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 87 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 3. Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile 33. The broadband internet access service provider category covered by these new rules may cover multiple wireless firms and categories of regulated wireless services. (This includes, among others, the approximately 800 members of WISPA, including those entities who provide fixed wireless broadband service using unlicensed spectrum. We also consider the impact to these entities for the purposes of this FRFA, by including them under the “Wireless Providers—Fixed and Mobile” category.) Thus, to the extent the wireless services listed below are used by wireless firms for broadband internet access service, the actions may have an impact on those small businesses as set forth above and further below. In addition, for those services subject to auctions, we note that, as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that claim to qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Also, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments and transfers or reportable eligibility events, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. 34. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). This industry comprises establishments engaged in operating and maintaining switching and transmission facilities to provide communications via the airwaves. Establishments in this industry have spectrum licenses and provide services using that spectrum, such as cellular services, paging services, wireless internet access, and wireless video services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 594 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of wireless services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 511 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 35. Wireless Communications Services. Wireless Communications Services (WCS) can be used for a variety of fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and digital audio broadcasting satellite services. Wireless spectrum is made available and licensed for the provision of wireless communications services in several frequency bands subject to Part 27 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 36. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to WCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in WCS. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in WCS frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in the designated entities section in Part 27 of the Commission's rules for the specific WCS frequency bands. (The “Designated entities” sections in subparts D-Q each contain the small business size standards adopted for the auction of the frequency band covered by that subpart.) 37. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 38. 1670-1675 MHz Services. These wireless communications services can be used for fixed and mobile uses, except aeronautical mobile. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 39. According to Commission data as of November 2021, there were three active licenses in this service. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 8, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BC; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to 1670-1675 MHz Services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For licenses in the 1670-1675 MHz service band, a “small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” is defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. The 1670-1675 MHz service band auction's winning bidder did not claim small business status. 40. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 41. Wireless Telephony. Wireless telephony includes cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio telephony carriers. The closest applicable industry with an SBA small business size standard is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The size standard for this industry under SBA rules is that a business is small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 331 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of cellular, personal communications services, and specialized mobile radio services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that 255 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, most of these providers can be considered small entities. 42. Broadband Personal Communications Service. The broadband personal communications services (PCS) spectrum encompasses services in the 1850-1910 and 1930-1990 MHz bands. The closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 43. Based on Commission data as of November 2021, there were approximately 5,060 active licenses in the Broadband PCS service. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 16, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CW; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Broadband PCS involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. In auctions for these licenses, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. Winning bidders claiming small business credits won Broadband PCS licenses in C, D, E, and F Blocks. 44. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 45. Specialized Mobile Radio Licenses. Special Mobile Radio (SMR) licenses allow licensees to provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation services) in the 800 MHz and 900 MHz spectrum bands on a commercial basis including but not limited to services used for voice and data communications, paging, and facsimile services, to individuals, Federal Government entities, and other entities licensed under Part 90 of the Commission's rules. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. For this industry, U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 95 providers that reported they were of SMR (dispatch) providers. Of this number, the Commission estimates that all 95 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, these 119 SMR licensees can be considered small entities. (We note that there were also SMR providers reporting in the “Cellular/PCS/SMR” classification, therefore there are maybe additional SMR providers that have not been accounted for in the SMR (dispatch) classification.) 46. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were 3,924 active SMR licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 15, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match radio services within this group”, Radio Service = SMR; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing SMR services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. Nevertheless, for purposes of this analysis the Commission estimates that the majority of SMR licensees can be considered small entities using the SBA's small business size standard. 47. Lower 700 MHz Band Licenses. The lower 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 698-746 MHz frequency bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 48. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 2,824 active Lower 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WY, WZ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Lower 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For auctions of Lower 700 MHz Band licenses the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur was defined as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. In auctions for Lower 700 MHz Band licenses seventy-two winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 329 licenses, twenty-six winning bidders claiming a small business classification won 214 licenses, and three winning bidders claiming a small business classification won all five auctioned licenses. 49. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 50. Upper 700 MHz Band Licenses. The upper 700 MHz band encompasses spectrum in the 746-806 MHz bands. Upper 700 MHz D Block licenses are nationwide licenses associated with the 758-763 MHz and 788-793 MHz bands. Permissible operations in these bands include flexible fixed, mobile, and broadcast uses, including mobile and other digital new broadcast operation; fixed and mobile wireless commercial services (including FDD- and TDD-based services); as well as fixed and mobile wireless uses for private, internal radio needs, two-way interactive, cellular, and mobile television broadcasting services. (We note that in Auction 73, Upper 700 MHz Band C and D Blocks as well as Lower 700 MHz Band A, B, and E Blocks were auctioned.) Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to licenses providing services in these bands. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of that number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus, under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 51. According to Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately 152 active Upper 700 MHz Band licenses. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 14, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = WP, WU; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Upper 700 MHz Band licensees involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For the auction of these licenses, the Commission defined a “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling principals, has average gross revenues that are not more than $15 million for the preceding three years. Pursuant to these definitions, three winning bidders claiming very small business status won five of the twelve available licenses. 52. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service is a wireless service in which licensees are authorized to offer and provide radio telecommunications service for hire to subscribers in aircraft. A licensee may provide any type of air-ground service ( i.e., voice telephony, broadband internet, data, etc.) to aircraft of any type, and serve any or all aviation markets (commercial, government, and general). A licensee must provide service to aircraft and may not provide ancillary land mobile or fixed services in the 800 MHz air-ground spectrum. 53. The closest industry with an SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 54. Based on Commission data as of December 2021, there were approximately four licensees with 110 active licenses in the Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service. (Based on a FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 20, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = CG, CJ; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses. For purposes of auctions, the Commission defined “small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $40 million for the preceding three years, and a “very small business” as an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has had average annual gross revenues not exceeding $15 million for the preceding three years. In the auction of Air-Ground Radiotelephone Service licenses in the 800 MHz band, neither of the two winning bidders claimed small business status. 55. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services therefore, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 56. 3650-3700 MHz Band. Wireless broadband service licensing in the 3650-3700 MHz band provides for nationwide, non-exclusive licensing of terrestrial operations, utilizing contention-based technologies, in the 3650 MHz band ( i.e., 3650-3700 MHz). Licensees are permitted to provide services on a non-common carrier and/or on a common carrier basis. Wireless broadband services in the 3650-3700 MHz band fall in the Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) industry with an SBA small business size standard that classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 57. The Commission has not developed a small business size standard applicable to 3650-3700 MHz band licensees. Based on the licenses that have been granted, however, we estimate that the majority of licensees in this service are small internet Access Service Providers (ISPs). As of November 2021, Commission data shows that there were 902 active licenses in the 3650-3700 MHz band. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on November 19, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = NN; Authorization Type =All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) However, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 58. Fixed Microwave Services. Fixed microwave services include common carrier, private-operational fixed, and broadcast auxiliary radio services. (Auxiliary Microwave Service is governed by part 74 of Title 47 of the Commission's Rules. Available to licensees of broadcast stations and to broadcast and cable network entities, broadcast auxiliary microwave stations are used for relaying broadcast television signals from the studio to the transmitter, or between two points such as a main studio and an auxiliary studio. The service also includes mobile TV pickups, which relay signals from a remote location back to the studio.) They also include the Upper Microwave Flexible Use Service (UMFUS), Millimeter Wave Service (70/80/90 GHz), Local Multipoint Distribution Service (LMDS), the Digital Electronic Message Service (DEMS), 24 GHz Service, Multiple Address Systems (MAS), and Multichannel Video Distribution and Data Service (MVDDS), where in some bands licensees can choose between common carrier and non-common carrier status. Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite) is the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services. The SBA small size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of fixed microwave service licensees can be considered small. 59. The Commission's small business size standards with respect to fixed microwave services involve eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for the various frequency bands included in fixed microwave services. When bidding credits are adopted for the auction of licenses in fixed microwave services frequency bands, such credits may be available to several types of small businesses based average gross revenues (small, very small and entrepreneur) pursuant to the competitive bidding rules adopted in conjunction with the requirements for the auction and/or as identified in part 101 of the Commission's rules for the specific fixed microwave services frequency bands. 60. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 61. Broadband Radio Service and Educational Broadband Service. Broadband Radio Service systems, previously referred to as Multipoint Distribution Service (MDS) and Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service (MMDS) systems, and “wireless cable,” transmit video programming to subscribers and provide two-way high speed data operations using the microwave frequencies of the Broadband Radio Service (BRS) and Educational Broadband Service (EBS) (previously referred to as the Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS)). (The use of the term “wireless cable” does not imply that it constitutes cable television for statutory or regulatory purposes.) Wireless cable operators that use spectrum in the BRS often supplemented with leased channels from the EBS, provide a competitive alternative to wired cable and other multichannel video programming distributors. Wireless cable programming to subscribers resembles cable television, but instead of coaxial cable, wireless cable uses microwave channels. (Generally, a wireless cable system may be described as a microwave station transmitting on a combination of BRS and EBS channels to numerous receivers with antennas, such as single-family residences, apartment complexes, hotels, educational institutions, business entities and governmental offices. The range of the transmission depends upon the transmitter power, the type of receiving antenna and the existence of a line-of-sight path between the transmitter or signal booster and the receiving antenna.) 62. In light of the use of wireless frequencies by BRS and EBS services, the closest industry with a SBA small business size standard applicable to these services is Wireless Telecommunications Carriers ( except Satellite). The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business as small if it has 1,500 or fewer employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 2,893 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 2,837 firms employed fewer than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Thus under the SBA size standard, the Commission estimates that a majority of licensees in this industry can be considered small. 63. According to Commission data as December 2021, there were approximately 5,869 active BRS and EBS licenses. (Based on an FCC Universal Licensing System search on December 10, 2021, search parameters: Service Group = All, “Match only the following radio service(s)”, Radio Service = BR, ED; Authorization Type = All; Status = Active. We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) The Commission's small business size standards with respect to BRS involves eligibility for bidding credits and installment payments in the auction of licenses for these services. For the auction of BRS licenses, the Commission adopted criteria for three groups of small businesses. A very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average annual gross revenues exceed $3 million and did not exceed $15 million for the preceding three years, a small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues exceed $15 million and did not exceed $40 million for the preceding three years, and an entrepreneur is an entity that, together with its affiliates and controlling interests, has average gross revenues not exceeding $3 million for the preceding three years. Of the ten winning bidders for BRS licenses, two bidders claiming the small business status won 4 licenses, one bidder claiming the very small business status won three licenses and two bidders claiming entrepreneur status won six licenses. One of the winning bidders claiming a small business status classification in the BRS license auction has an active license as of December 2021. (We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses.) We note that the number of active licenses does not equate to the number of licensees. A licensee can have one or more licenses. 64. The Commission's small business size standards for EBS define a small business as an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $55 million for the preceding five (5) years, and a very small business is an entity that, together with its affiliates, its controlling interests and the affiliates of its controlling interests, has average gross revenues that are not more than $20 million for the preceding five (5) years. In frequency bands where licenses were subject to auction, the Commission notes that as a general matter, the number of winning bidders that qualify as small businesses at the close of an auction does not necessarily represent the number of small businesses currently in service. Further, the Commission does not generally track subsequent business size unless, in the context of assignments or transfers, unjust enrichment issues are implicated. Additionally, since the Commission does not collect data on the number of employees for licensees providing these services, at this time we are not able to estimate the number of licensees with active licenses that would qualify as small under the SBA's small business size standard. 4. Satellite Service Providers 65. Satellite Telecommunications. This industry comprises firms “primarily engaged in providing telecommunications services to other establishments in the telecommunications and broadcasting industries by forwarding and receiving communications signals via a system of satellites or reselling satellite telecommunications.” Satellite telecommunications service providers include satellite and earth station operators. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies a business with $35 million or less in annual receipts as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that 275 firms in this industry operated for the entire year. Of this number, 242 firms had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Additionally, based on Commission data in the 2022 Universal Service Monitoring Report, as of December 31, 2021, there were 65 providers that reported they were engaged in the provision of satellite telecommunications services. Of these providers, the Commission estimates that approximately 42 providers have 1,500 or fewer employees. Consequently, using the SBA's small business size standard, a little more than half of these providers can be considered small entities. 66. All Other Telecommunications. This industry is comprised of establishments primarily engaged in providing specialized telecommunications services, such as satellite tracking, communications telemetry, and radar station operation. This industry also includes establishments primarily engaged in providing satellite terminal stations and associated facilities connected with one or more terrestrial systems and capable of transmitting telecommunications to, and receiving telecommunications from, satellite systems. Providers of internet services ( e.g. dial-up ISPs) or voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services, via client-supplied telecommunications connections are also included in this industry. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts of $35 million or less as small. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 show that there were 1,079 firms in this industry that operated for the entire year. Of those firms, 1,039 had revenue of less than $25 million. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that the majority of “All Other Telecommunications” firms can be considered small. 5. Cable Service Providers 67. Because section 706 of the Act requires us to monitor the deployment of broadband using any technology, we anticipate that some broadband service providers may not provide telephone service. Accordingly, we describe below other types of firms that may provide broadband services, including cable companies, MDS providers, and utilities, among others. 68. Cable and Other Subscription Programming. The U.S. Census Bureau defines this industry as establishments primarily engaged in operating studios and facilities for the broadcasting of programs on a subscription or fee basis. The broadcast programming is typically narrowcast in nature ( e.g., limited format, such as news, sports, education, or youth-oriented). These establishments produce programming in their own facilities or acquire programming from external sources. The programming material is usually delivered to a third party, such as cable systems or direct-to-home satellite systems, for transmission to viewers. The SBA small business size standard for this industry classifies firms with annual receipts less than $41.5 million as small. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017, 378 firms operated in this industry during that year. (The U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated for the entire year to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for this category).) Of that number, 149 firms operated with revenue of less than $25 million a year and 44 firms operated with revenue of $25 million or more. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard. We note that the U.S. Census Bureau withheld publication of the number of firms that operated with sales/value of shipments/revenue in all categories of revenue less than $500,000 to avoid disclosing data for individual companies (see Cell Notes for the sales/value of shipments/revenue in these categories). Therefore, the number of firms with revenue that meet the SBA size standard would be higher than noted herein. We also note that according to the U.S. Census Bureau glossary, the terms receipts and revenues are used interchangeably.) Based on this data, the Commission estimates that a majority of firms in this industry are small. 69. Cable Companies and Systems (Rate Regulation). The Commission has developed its own small business size standard for the purpose of cable rate regulation. Under the Commission's rules, a “small cable company” is one serving 400,000 or fewer subscribers nationwide. Based on industry data, there are about 420 cable companies in the U.S. Of these, only seven have more than 400,000 subscribers. In addition, under the Commission's rules, a “small system” is a cable system serving 15,000 or fewer subscribers. Based on industry data, there are about 4,139 cable systems (headends) in the U.S. Of these, about 639 have more than 15,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable companies and cable systems are small. 70. Cable System Operators (Telecom Act Standard). The Communications Act of 1934, as amended, contains a size standard for a “small cable operator,” which is “a cable operator that, directly or through an affiliate, serves in the aggregate fewer than one percent of all subscribers in the United States and is not affiliated with any entity or entities whose gross annual revenues in the aggregate exceed $250,000,000.” For purposes of the Telecom Act Standard, the Commission determined that a cable system operator that serves fewer than 498,000 subscribers, either directly or through affiliates, will meet the definition of a small cable operator. (In the 2023 Subscriber Threshold Public Notice, the Commission determined that there were approximately 49.8 million cable subscribers in the United States at that time using the most reliable source publicly available. This threshold will remain in effect until the Commission issues a superseding Public Notice.) Based on industry data, only six cable system operators have more than 498,000 subscribers. Accordingly, the Commission estimates that the majority of cable system operators are small under this size standard. We note however, that the Commission neither requests nor collects information on whether cable system operators are affiliated with entities whose gross annual revenues exceed $250 million. (The Commission does receive such information on a case-by-case basis if a cable operator appeals a local franchise authority's finding that the operator does not qualify as a small cable operator pursuant to § 76.901(e) of the Commission's rules.) Therefore, we are unable at this time to estimate with greater precision the number of cable system operators that would qualify as small cable operators under the definition in the Communications Act. 6. All Other Telecommunications 71. Electric Power Generators, Transmitters, and Distributors. The U.S. Census Bureau defines the utilities sector industry as comprised of “establishments, primarily engaged in generating, transmitting, and/or distributing electric power. Establishments in this industry group may perform one or more of the following activities: (1) operate generation facilities that produce electric energy; (2) operate transmission systems that convey the electricity from the generation facility to the distribution system; and (3) operate distribution systems that convey electric power received from the generation facility or the transmission system to the final consumer.” This industry group is categorized based on fuel source and includes Hydroelectric Power Generation, Fossil Fuel Electric Power Generation, Nuclear Electric Power Generation, Solar Electric Power Generation, Wind Electric Power Generation, Geothermal Electric Power Generation, Biomass Electric Power Generation, Other Electric Power Generation, Electric Bulk Power Transmission and Control and Electric Power Distribution. 72. The SBA has established a small business size standard for each of these groups based on the number of employees which ranges from having fewer than 250 employees to having fewer than 1,000 employees. U.S. Census Bureau data for 2017 indicate that for the Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution industry there were 1,693 firms that operated in this industry for the entire year. Of this number, 1,552 firms had less than 250 employees. (The available U.S. Census Bureau data does not provide a more precise estimate of the number of firms that meet the SBA size standard.) Based on this data and the associated SBA size standards, the majority of firms in this industry can be considered small entities. D. Description of Projected Reporting, Recordkeeping, and Other Compliance Requirements for Small Entities 73. In the FNPRM, we seek comment on ways to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment. Some of these proposals may impose new or additional reporting or recordkeeping and/or other compliance obligations on small entities. Specifically, we seek comment on a proposal that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. We also seek comment on whether NCTA's proposal to add additional time to the existing application timelines for larger orders and prohibit utilities from limiting the size of an application or the number of poles included in an application, to avoid these timelines, will facilitate the pole attachment process for such orders. Additionally, we seek comment on whether the Commission should create additional make-ready timeline tiers in its rules to differentiate between attachment applications that could range from requesting access to thousands of poles to tens or even hundreds of thousands of poles. We also consider whether to require that a utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period, making self-help available for the estimate process, which is not contemplated under current Commission rules. We also seek comment on whether attachers face any obstacles from utilities when seeking to invoke self-help options, which allows attachers to choose their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when the utility fails to meet the Commission's deadlines. This information will help to inform whether potential rule changes are necessary. At this time, the Commission cannot quantify the cost of compliance for small entities with the approaches discussed in the FNPRM, or whether any compliance requirements will require small entities to hire professionals; however, the Commission requests information on the costs and benefits of the approaches discussed, such as the availability of qualified contractors and other workforce constraints that may impact the speed and cost of deployment for utilities and attachers. E. Steps Taken To Minimize the Significant Economic Impact on Small Entities, and Significant Alternatives Considered 74. The RFA requires an agency to describe any significant, specifically small business, alternatives that it has considered in reaching its proposed approach, which may include the following four alternatives (among others): “(1) the establishment of differing compliance or reporting requirements or timetables that take into account the resources available to small entities; (2) the clarification, consolidation, or simplification of compliance and reporting requirements under the rule for such small entities; (3) the use of performance rather than design standards; and (4) an exemption from coverage of the rule, or any part thereof, for such small entities.” 75. The FNPRM seeks comment on whether the Commission should revise its rules to further facilitate the approval process for pole attachment applications and make-ready to enable quicker broadband deployment, including a tentative conclusion that utilities should have an additional 90 days for make-ready for requests exceeding 3,000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state. The Commission's objective in requesting this information is to determine whether it can and should establish clear standards for when and how attachers and utilities must share the costs of a pole replacement precipitated by a new attachment request. Among the alternatives considered in the FNPRM is whether the Commission should allow additional time for the existing larger order timelines where our current rules require that utilities negotiate timing in good faith. We seek comment on whether requiring that the utility notify an attacher 15 days after receiving a complete application that it cannot conduct the survey within the required 45-day period would allow the attacher to elect self-help for the survey sooner. In the alternative, we inquire whether such expansion of time is reasonable for utilities if numerous permits are submitted around the same time or contractor workload is heavy. We also consider whether attachers are choosing to find their own contractors for one-touch make-ready and for self-help when utilities fail to meet the Commission's deadlines. Similarly, we request information on whether or not utilities designate an available contractor if it properly exercises its discretion to disqualify one chosen by an attacher. We also seek comment on how the Commission can help resolve situations where labor shortages may hinder utilities from meeting deadlines to respond to attachers. The Commission also seeks comment on and will consider the relative costs and benefits of any such revisions to its rules. Information submitted in response to these requests for comment will enable the Commission to evaluate the impact that revising its pole attachment rules would have on smaller entities. F. Federal Rules That May Duplicate, Overlap, or Conflict With the Proposed Rules 76. None. 35 The Federal Communications Commission amends part 1 of title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Delayed indefinitely, amend § 1.1411 by adding paragraph (c)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (c) * * * (4) Information from cyclical pole inspection reports. (i) Upon submitting its attachment application, a new attacher may request in writing that the utility provide, as to the poles covered by such attachment application, the information regarding those poles contained in the utility's most recent cyclical pole inspection reports, or, if available, any more recent pole inspection report. The utility shall provide the new attacher with this information within ten (10) business days of the new attacher's written request. (ii) Utilities shall retain copies of their pole inspection reports, in the form they are created, until a superseding report covering the poles included in the attachment application is completed. (iii) For purposes of this section, a cyclical pole inspection report is any report that a utility creates in the normal course of its business that sets forth the results of a routine inspection of its poles during the utility's normal pole inspection cycle. (iv) After requesting and receiving pole inspection information from a utility related to poles covered by its application, a new attacher may amend an attachment application at any time until the utility grants or denies the original application. (A) A utility that receives such an amended attachment application may, at its option, restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) for responding to the application and conducting the survey. (B) A utility electing to restart the 45-day period (or 60-day period for larger orders) shall notify the attacher of its intent to do so within five (5) business days of receipt of the amended application or by the 45th day (or 60th day, if applicable) after the original application is considered complete, whichever is earlier. § 1.1415 [Redesignated as § 1.1416] 3. Redesignate § 1.1415 as § 1.1416. 4. Delayed indefinitely, add a new § 1.1415 to read as follows: § 1.1415 Dispute resolution procedures for pole attachment disputes that impede or delay broadband deployment; functions of the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team. (a) An inter-bureau team, to be known as the Rapid Broadband Assessment Team (RBAT), shall be established to prioritize and expedite the resolution of pole attachment disputes that are alleged to impede or delay the deployment of broadband facilities and to provide coordinated review and assessment of such disputes. The RBAT shall consist of one or more staff from the Enforcement Bureau and one or more staff from the Wireline Competition Bureau. Senior staff in the Enforcement Bureau and the Wireline Competition Bureau shall designate individuals from their respective bureaus to serve on the RBAT. (b) The RBAT shall prioritize the resolution of a pole attachment dispute that a party seeking RBAT review has alleged is impeding or delaying an active broadband deployment project, including where the party is also seeking placement of the dispute on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. The RBAT shall gather and promptly review all pertinent information submitted by the parties and shall have discretion to decide the most appropriate process for resolving the dispute, including recommending an RBAT-supervised mediation process pursuant to § 1.737, use of the Accelerated Docket, and/or other appropriate action. Although RBAT-supervised mediation is generally voluntary, the RBAT may require that the parties participate in pre-filing settlement negotiations or mediation under § 1.737 as a condition for including a matter on the Accelerated Docket. The RBAT may recommend to the parties use of the Accelerated Docket where it determines, based upon a totality of the criteria outlined in paragraph (e) of this section, that a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket. (c) A party to a pole attachment dispute, prior to filing a formal complaint, may request RBAT review and assessment of such dispute if the party believes the dispute is impeding or delaying the deployment of a broadband facilities project. The party seeking RBAT review and assessment shall first notify the Chief of the Enforcement Bureau's Market Disputes Resolution Division (MDRD) by phone and in writing of the request. The MDRD Chief shall direct the requesting party to the location of a form on the MDRD website—FCC-5653, Request for RBAT Review and Assessment—and to instructions for completing and electronically transmitting the form to the RBAT. (d) Upon receipt of the completed Request for RBAT Review and Assessment, the RBAT shall schedule a meeting, through a manner of the RBAT's choosing, with all parties as soon as practicable. The RBAT may request a written response from the other party or parties to the dispute with respect to one or more issues raised by the party seeking RBAT review. The RBAT also may request that the party seeking RBAT review or any other party or parties to the dispute provide the RBAT with documentation or other information relevant to the dispute. In the initial meeting, or shortly thereafter, the RBAT shall provide guidance and advice to the parties on the most effective means of resolving their dispute, including RBAT-supervised mediation pursuant to § 1.737; use of the Accelerated Docket; and/or any other appropriate action. If the parties seek RBAT-supervised mediation, the MDRD Chief, in consultation with the RBAT, may waive the procedures or requirements of § 1.737 as appropriate in this context, or as needed in light of the facts or circumstances of a particular case. (e) The RBAT shall have discretion to decide whether a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, involving a dispute that a party alleges to be impeding or delaying the deployment of broadband facilities is suitable for inclusion on the Accelerated Docket pursuant to § 1.736. In determining whether to accept a complaint, or a portion of a complaint, on the Accelerated Docket, the RBAT shall base its decision on a totality of the factors from the following list: (1) Whether the prospective complainant states a claim for violation of the Act, or a Commission rule or order that falls within the Commission's jurisdiction; (2) Whether the expedited resolution of a particular dispute or category of disputes appears likely to advance the deployment of broadband facilities or services, especially in an unserved or underserved area; (3) Whether the parties to the dispute have exhausted all reasonable opportunities for settlement during any staff-supervised mediation; (4) The number and complexity of the issues in dispute; (5) Whether the dispute raises new or novel issues versus settled interpretations of rules or policies; (6) The likely need for, and complexity of, discovery; (7) The likely need for expert testimony; (8) The ability of the parties to stipulate to facts; (9) Whether the parties have already assembled relevant evidence bearing on the disputed facts; (10) Willingness of the prospective complainant to seek a ruling on a subset of claims or issues ( e.g., threshold or “test cases”); and (11) Such other factors as the RBAT, within its discretion, may deem appropriate and conducive to the prompt and fair adjudication of the complaint proceeding.
36
37 [V. Procedural Matters]
38 77. Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis. As required by the Regulatory Flexibility Act, the Commission has prepared an Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA) of the possible significant economic impact on small entities of the policies and rules addressed in this FNPRM. Written public comments are requested on the IRFA. Comments must be filed by the deadlines for comments on the FNPRM indicated on the first page of this document and must have a separate and distinct heading designating them as responses to the IRFA. The Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference Information Center, will send a copy of this FNPRM, including the IRFA, to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the SBA. 78. Paperwork Reduction Act. The FNPRM contains proposed new information collection requirements. The Commission, as part of its continuing effort to reduce paperwork burdens, invites the general public and OMB to comment on the information collection requirements contained in this document, as required by the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, Public Law 104-13. In addition, pursuant to the Small Business Paperwork Relief Act of 2002, Public Law 107-198, see 44 U.S.C. 3506(c)(4), we seek specific comment on how we might further reduce the information collection burden for small business concerns with fewer than 25 employees. 79. Ex Parte Presentations—Permit-But-Disclose. The proceeding this FNPRM initiates shall be treated as a “permit-but-disclose” proceeding in accordance with the Commission's ex parte rules. Persons making ex parte presentations must file a copy of any written presentation or a memorandum summarizing any oral presentation within two business days after the presentation (unless a different deadline applicable to the Sunshine period applies). Persons making oral ex parte presentations are reminded that memoranda summarizing the presentation must (1) list all persons attending or otherwise participating in the meeting at which the ex parte presentation was made, and (2) summarize all data presented and arguments made during the presentation. If the presentation consisted in whole or in part of the presentation of data or arguments already reflected in the presenter's written comments, memoranda or other filings in the proceeding, the presenter may provide citations to such data or arguments in his or her prior comments, memoranda, or other filings (specifying the relevant page and/or paragraph numbers where such data or arguments can be found) in lieu of summarizing them in the memorandum. Documents shown or given to Commission staff during ex parte meetings are deemed to be written ex parte presentations and must be filed consistent with § 1.1206(b) of the Commission's rules. In proceedings governed by § 1.49(f) of the Commission's rules or for which the Commission has made available a method of electronic filing, written ex parte presentations and memoranda summarizing oral ex parte presentations, and all attachments thereto, must be filed through the electronic comment filing system available for that proceeding, and must be filed in their native format ( e.g., .doc, .xml, .ppt, searchable .pdf). Participants in this proceeding should familiarize themselves with the Commission's ex parte rules.
39
40 [VI. Ordering Clauses]
41 80. Accordingly, it is ordered , pursuant to sections 4(i), 4(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), and 403 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C. 154(i), 154(j), 201, 202, 217, 227, 227b, 251(e), 303(r), 403, that this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking is adopted . 81. It is further ordered that the Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau, Reference information Center, shall send a copy of this Third Further Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, including the Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis (IRFA), to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Business Administration. List of Subjects in 47 CFR Part 1 Administrative practice and procedure. Federal Communications Commission. Katura Jackson, Federal Register Liaison Officer.
42
43 [Proposed Rules]
44 The Federal Communications Commission proposes to amend part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows: PART 1—PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE 1. The authority citation for part 1 continues to read as follows: Authority: 47 U.S.C. chs. 2, 5, 9, 13; 28 U.S.C. 2461. 2. Amend § 1.1411 by revising paragraph (g)(4) to read as follows: § 1.1411 Timeline for access to utility poles. (g) * * * (4) A utility may add 90 days to the make-ready periods described in paragraph (e) of this section to all requests for attachment larger than the lesser of 3000 poles or 5 percent of the utility's poles in a state.